S COM 7K Owner's Manual Manual7k203i

User Manual: manual7k203i

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 400

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

S-COM 7K
Microprocessor Repeater Controller
Version 2.03B
(July 20 1998, updated 25 November 2000)

S-COM Industries
P.O. Box 1546
LaPorte, CO 80535-1546
970-416-6505
www.scomcontrollers.com
support@scomcontrollers.com

This manual Copyright 2000 by S-COM Industries, All Rights Reserved.
Except where otherwise noted, no part of this manual may be duplicated in any form,
whether electronic, mechanical, or otherwise.
Published in the United States of America by:
S-COM Industries
P.O. Box 1546
LaPorte, CO 80535-1546
USA

Limited Warranty
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state
to state.

Coverage
Except as specified below, this warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship in this product.
The following are not covered by the warranty:
•

Damage to, or deterioration of, the external cabinet.

•

Damage resulting from lightning, accident, misuse, abuse, or neglect.

•

Damage resulting from failure to follow instructions contained in the owner's manual.

•

Damage occurring during shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier).

•

Damage resulting from repair or attempted repair by anyone other than S-COM Industries.

•

Damage resulting from causes other than product defects, including lack of technical skill,
competence, or experience of the user.

•

Damage to any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified, or removed.

Enforcement
This warranty may be enforced only by the original purchaser. The warranty is not transferrable.

Length Of Warranty
For both labor and parts, this warranty will be effective for one (1) year from the date of original
purchase.

What We Will Pay For
We will pay all labor and material expenses for items covered by the warranty. Payment of shipping
charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty.

How You Can Get Warranty Service
Your unit must be serviced by S-COM's Service Department. Please do not return your unit to the factory
without prior authorization. You must pay any shipping charges if it is necessary to ship the product to
service. However, if the necessary repairs are covered by the warranty, we will pay the return
shipping charges to any destination within the U.S. Whenever warranty service is required, you must
present the original dated invoice or a photocopy.
S-COM's liability for any defective products is limited to repair or replacement of the product, at S-COM's
option.
S-COM reserves the right to make any changes in design or additions to, or improvements in, its products
without any obligation to install such additions or improvements in equipment previously sold. S-COM
further reserves the right to replace defective parts under warranty with different or improved parts.
This warranty is expressly in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including any implied
warranty of merchantability or fitness, and of all other obligations of liabilities on the part of S-COM.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Selected Tables ...................................................................................................................... xiii

Product Description .......................................... 1-1
Standard Hardware Features .................................................................................................... 1-1
Configuration....................................................................................................................... 1-1
Cabinet................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Main Board.......................................................................................................................... 1-2
Optional Hardware Features ..................................................................................................... 1-2
Telephone Interface Module ............................................................................................... 1-2
Speech Synthesis Module................................................................................................... 1-2
Audio Delay Module ............................................................................................................ 1-2
Standard Software Features...................................................................................................... 1-2
CW Identifier ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
CW Messages and Paging Formats ................................................................................... 1-2
Timers ................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Repeater Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1-3
Clock and Calendar ............................................................................................................ 1-3
Logic Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................... 1-3
Command Language .......................................................................................................... 1-3

Getting Started................................................... 2-1
Power ON Initialization .............................................................................................................. 2-1
Initialize Controller............................................................................................................... 2-1
Cold Start ............................................................................................................................ 2-2
Warm Start.......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Default Condition ................................................................................................................ 2-2

Programming Fundamentals ............................ 3-1
Valid Digit and Time Detection .................................................................................................. 3-2
Control Command Structure...................................................................................................... 3-2
Example Control Command................................................................................................ 3-3
Command Response Messages ............................................................................................... 3-4
Acknowledgment................................................................................................................. 3-4
Errors .................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Special Keys .............................................................................................................................. 3-5
Star (*) and Carrier Drop as Terminators............................................................................ 3-5
Pound (#) as Clear or Abort Key......................................................................................... 3-5
DTMF Interdigit Timer ............................................................................................................... 3-6
DTMF Mute Delay ..................................................................................................................... 3-6

Messages............................................................ 4-1
Message Buffer ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
Message Handler ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
Control Characters .................................................................................................................... 4-2
Routing and Unrouting Control Characters ............................................................................... 4-3
Default................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Examples ............................................................................................................................ 4-4
Synchronizing Messages and Commands ................................................................................ 4-5
CW Messages ........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Control Character................................................................................................................ 4-6

7K •
Format................................................................................................................................. 4-6
Pre-Message Delay Character............................................................................................ 4-6
Wordspace Character......................................................................................................... 4-6
Frequency Change.............................................................................................................. 4-6
Speed Change .................................................................................................................... 4-7
CW Alphanumeric Characters ............................................................................................ 4-8
CW Punctuation and Related Characters........................................................................... 4-9
CW Frequency Change and Speed Change Characters.................................................. 4-10
Command: Enable/Disable CW ........................................................................................4-11
Command: Select Frequency of CW ................................................................................4-12
Command: Send Next Message Slowly ............................................................................4-13
Command: Select CW Speed ...........................................................................................4-14
Beep Messages....................................................................................................................... 4-16
Control Character.............................................................................................................. 4-16
Format............................................................................................................................... 4-16
Beep Parameters (General).............................................................................................. 4-16
Pre-Message Delay Character.......................................................................................... 4-16
Factory-Fixed-Frequency Beeps....................................................................................... 4-17
Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps ........................................................................................ 4-18
Command: Select Frequency of Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps .....................................4-19
Custom Beeps .................................................................................................................. 4-21
Custom Beep Delay .......................................................................................................... 4-21
Beep Gap Change Characters.......................................................................................... 4-21
Beep Duration Change Characters................................................................................... 4-22
Automatic Beep Gap ON Character ................................................................................. 4-22
Automatic Beep Gap OFF Character................................................................................ 4-23
Defaults............................................................................................................................. 4-23
Single Tone Page Messages................................................................................................... 4-23
Control Character.............................................................................................................. 4-23
Format............................................................................................................................... 4-23
Delays ............................................................................................................................... 4-23
Two-Tone Sequential Page Messages ................................................................................... 4-24
Control Character.............................................................................................................. 4-24
Format............................................................................................................................... 4-24
Delays ............................................................................................................................... 4-24
Five/Six-Tone Page Messages ............................................................................................... 4-25
Control Character.............................................................................................................. 4-25
Format............................................................................................................................... 4-25
Delays ............................................................................................................................... 4-25
DTMF Page Messages............................................................................................................ 4-26
Control Character.............................................................................................................. 4-26
Format............................................................................................................................... 4-26
Delays ............................................................................................................................... 4-26
Defaults............................................................................................................................. 4-26
DTMF Characters ............................................................................................................. 4-27
DTMF Duration Change Characters ................................................................................. 4-27
DTMF Custom Duration Change Characters.................................................................... 4-28
DTMF Gap Change Characters ........................................................................................ 4-28
DTMF Custom Gap Change Characters .......................................................................... 4-28
DTMF Pause Characters .................................................................................................. 4-29
DTMF Custom Pause Characters..................................................................................... 4-29
DTMF Custom Changes (Duration • Gap • Pause) .......................................................... 4-30
DTMF-Related Notes ........................................................................................................ 4-30
DTMF Character Set Tables Explained................................................................................... 4-31

Table of Contents
Examples .......................................................................................................................... 4-31
Synthesized Speech Messages .............................................................................................. 4-33
Control Character.............................................................................................................. 4-33
Format............................................................................................................................... 4-33
Delay Character ................................................................................................................ 4-33
Pause Character ............................................................................................................... 4-33
Timeout Timer................................................................................................................... 4-33
Synthesized Speech Vocabulary....................................................................................... 4-33
Tone Codes ............................................................................................................................. 4-33
Tone Code Table Explained ............................................................................................. 4-34
Calculating Tone Codes.................................................................................................... 4-34
Run-Time Variables................................................................................................................. 4-45
Command: Select Programmable Messages ..........................................................................4-37
Command: Review Programmable Messages ........................................................................4-40
Command: Select/Review/Play User Messages .....................................................................4-41
Command: Send Message ......................................................................................................4-42
Command: Select/Review Command Response Messages ...................................................4-44

Security............................................................... 5-1
Command: Assign Control Operator Password ........................................................................5-2
Command: Assign Master Password ........................................................................................5-3
Command: Assign Control Operator Priviledge Level ...............................................................5-4
Command: Assign Control Operator Priviledge Level to a Range of Commands......................5-5
Command: Enable/Disable Front Panel Display .......................................................................5-6

Macros ................................................................ 6-1
Quantity of Macros .................................................................................................................... 6-1
Size of Macros........................................................................................................................... 6-1
Names of Macros ...................................................................................................................... 6-2
Contents of Macros ................................................................................................................... 6-2
Sequence of Execution.............................................................................................................. 6-3
Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Applications of Macros .............................................................................................................. 6-3
Command: Create New Macro ..................................................................................................6-5
Command: Append To Macro ...................................................................................................6-7
Command: List Macro in CW or Speech....................................................................................6-9
Command: Erase Macro .........................................................................................................6-11
Command: Erase All Macros ...................................................................................................6-12
Command: Rename Macro .....................................................................................................6-13
Command: Pause ....................................................................................................................6-15
Command: Select Power ON-Triggered Macro .......................................................................6-16

Telephone Interface Functions......................... 7-1
Autopatch................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Accessing the Autopatch .................................................................................................... 7-2
Store-and-Forward Operation. ............................................................................................ 7-2
Dumping the Autopatch ...................................................................................................... 7-3
Autopatch Setup and Configuration........................................................................................... 7-3
Autopatch Dialer ................................................................................................................. 7-3
Examples ............................................................................................................................ 7-4
Autopatch Conversation Control ......................................................................................... 7-4
Autopatch Dialing Mode ............................................................................................................ 7-5
Command: Select Autopatch Dialing Mode ........................................................................7-6

vii

7K •
Command: Select/Review Autopatch Dialing Message ......................................................7-7
Command: Select/Review Autopatch Error Messages .......................................................7-8
Command: Select/Review Autopatch Dump Message .......................................................7-9
Command: Enable/Disable Autopatch Dialing Mixed-Mode .............................................7-10
Command: Select Pause ("B") Digit Time ........................................................................7-11
Command: Enable/Disable Pound Down (# Dump) .........................................................7-12
Command: Select Dialing Prefix .......................................................................................7-13
Command: Dump Autopatch Using a Code ......................................................................7-15
Command: Select Autopatch Access- and Dump-Triggered Macro .................................7-16
Command: Enable/Disable Full-Duplex Mode ..................................................................7-17
Command: Enable/Disable Autopatch Privacy .................................................................7-18
Command: Enable/Disable Repeater-to-Phone DTMF Mute ...........................................7-19
Command: Enable/Disable ID Messages During Autopatch ............................................7-20
Command: Require Dump Before Next Call .....................................................................7-21
Command: Select Receiver-to-Autopatch-Triggered Macros ...........................................7-22
Command: Landline Hookflash .........................................................................................7-23
Autopatch Timeout Timer ........................................................................................................ 7-24
Command: Select Autopatch Timeout Timer ....................................................................7-25
Command: Reset Autopatch Timeout Timer ....................................................................7-26
Command: Select/Review Autopatch Timeout Warning Message ...................................7-27
Autopatch Access and Passwords .......................................................................................... 7-28
Command: Access Autopatch (With Password) ...............................................................7-29
Command: Access Autopatch (Without Password) ..........................................................7-30
Command: Change Autopatch Access Password ............................................................7-32
Command: Enable/Disable Autopatch Access Without Password ...................................7-33
Command: Go Off-Hook ...................................................................................................7-34
Autopatch Call Types .............................................................................................................. 7-35
Command: Select Autopatch Call Types ..........................................................................7-36
Autopatch Restrictions............................................................................................................. 7-38
Uses of Autopatch Restrictions......................................................................................... 7-38
Command: Clear (or Enter) Accepted Number Table ......................................................7-40
Command: Clear (or Enter) Rejected Number Table .......................................................7-42
Autopatch Redialer .................................................................................................................. 7-44
Command: Redial Last Number .......................................................................................7-45
Command: Clear Autopatch Redialer ...............................................................................7-46
Autopatch Call Counter ........................................................................................................... 7-47
Command: Clear Autopatch Call Counter .........................................................................7-48
Command: Send Autopatch Call Count ............................................................................7-49
Phone Line Control Mode..................................................................................................... 7-50
Phone Line Busy Input............................................................................................................. 7-50
Phone Line Busy Output.......................................................................................................... 7-50
Phone Line Answer Modes...................................................................................................... 7-50
Ring-In Delay .................................................................................................................... 7-52
Ringout Limit ..................................................................................................................... 7-52
Command: Select Phone Line Answer Mode ..........................................................................7-53
Command: Select (Review) Phone Line Answer Message .....................................................7-54
Command: Select Phone Line Answer Macro .........................................................................7-55
Command: Select Phone Line Dump-Triggered Macro ..........................................................7-56
Command: Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer .......................................................................7-57
Command: Monitor/Talk Out Via Phone ..................................................................................7-58
Reverse Patch........................................................................................................................ 7-59
Command: Trigger Reverse Patch ..........................................................................................7-60
Command: Answer Reverse Patch .........................................................................................7-61

viii

Table of Contents
Command: Select (Review) Reverse Patch Ringout Message ...............................................7-62
Command: Select Reverse Patch Ring-Triggered Macro .......................................................7-63
Multiple Port Access ............................................................................................................ 7-64
Autopatch Audio Routing ........................................................................................................ 7-65
Autopatch Command Response Message Routing ............................................................... 7-65
Receiver-Specific Autopatch Access ...................................................................................... 7-66
Preventing Multiple Accesses ................................................................................................. 7-66
Command: Select Receiver-Specific Access-Triggered Macros .............................................7-67
Command: Select Command Response Message Routing ....................................................7-68

Clock and Calendar ........................................... 8-1
Command: Set Clock and Calendar ..........................................................................................8-2
Command: Adjust Daylight Savings Time .................................................................................8-4
Command: Reset Clock Seconds .............................................................................................8-6
Command: Adjust Clock Seconds .............................................................................................8-7

Scheduler ........................................................... 9-1
Command: Create Setpoint .......................................................................................................9-2
Scheduler Day Code Table ....................................................................................................... 9-3
Command: Delete One or More Setpoints ................................................................................9-6
Command: Enable/Disable Scheduler ......................................................................................9-7

CTCSS Functions ............................................ 10-1
Command: Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder ..........................................................................10-2
Command: Select Frequency of CTCSS .................................................................................10-3
TS-32 Programming Table ..................................................................................................... 10-4

DTMF Decoder ................................................. 11-1
Command: Enable/Disable Command Response Messages .................................................11-2
Command: Select DTMF Priority/Scan ...................................................................................11-3
Command: Select DTMF Decoder Access Mode ...................................................................11-5
Command: Select DTMF Decoder Interdigit Timer .................................................................11-7
Command: Select DTMF Decoder Mute Delay .......................................................................11-8
Command: Enable/Disable DTMF Decoder Mute ...................................................................11-9
Command: Enable/Disable DTMF Long Tones .....................................................................11-10
Command: Select DTMF Long Tone Macros ........................................................................11-11
Command: Select DTMF Digit-Decoded Macro ....................................................................11-12

Identifier ........................................................... 12-1
Command: Select (or Review) Identifier Messages ................................................................12-3
Command: Select ID-Triggered Macros ..................................................................................12-4
Command: Select ID Message Interval ...................................................................................12-5
Command: Select ID Pending Interval ....................................................................................12-6
Command: Reset Initial ID Message To Normal .....................................................................12-7
Command: Send Initial ID Message ........................................................................................12-8
Command: Select Programmable Tail Messages for Tx1 ......................................................12-9
Command: Select/Review Initial and Normal ID Tail Message .............................................12-10
Command: Enable/Disable ID Messages During Autopatch .................................................12-11

Links ................................................................. 13-1
Command: Enable/Disable Path .............................................................................................13-2
Command: Select Audio Routing Priority ................................................................................13-3
Command: Select Path Access Mode .....................................................................................13-4

7K •

Logic Inputs ..................................................... 14-1
Command: Assign Macro To Logic Input ................................................................................14-2

Logic Outputs .................................................. 15-1
Command: Select Logic Outputs .............................................................................................15-2

Receiver Functions.......................................... 16-1
Command: Select Receiver Activity-Triggered Macros
Command: Select Receiver Post-Activity Timers ....................................................................16-2
Command: Select COR Pulse-Triggered Macro
Command: Select Pulse Parameters ......................................................................................16-4
Command: Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission Command Execution .................................16-6
Command: Select From-Start-of-Transmission Timer ............................................................16-8

Transmitter Functions..................................... 17-1
Transmitter Tail Sequence ..................................................................................................... 17-1
Courtesy Delay and Courtesy Message ........................................................................... 17-1
Dropout Delay and Dropout Message .............................................................................. 17-1
Transmitter Timeout Timer and Timeout Message ......................................................... 17-1
Transmitter Unkey Delay ................................................................................................. 17-2
Command: Select Courtesy Delay ..........................................................................................17-3
Command: Select Dropout Delay ............................................................................................17-4
Command: Select Transmitter Timeout Timer ........................................................................17-5
Command: Reset Transmitter Timeout Timer .........................................................................17-7
Command: Enable/Disable Transmitter ..................................................................................17-8
Command: Key Transmitter (Timed) .......................................................................................17-9
Command: Key Transmitter (Untimed) .................................................................................17-10
Command: Enable/Disable Transmitter Minimum Unkey Delay ...........................................17-11
Command: Select Transmitter Minimum Unkey Delay .........................................................17-12
Command: Select Receiver-to-Transmitter-Triggered Macros .............................................17-13
Command: Select Transmitter PTT-Triggered Macros .........................................................17-14

Repeater Functions ......................................... 18-1
Command: Select Repeater Access Mode (Path 1) ................................................................18-2
Command: Select Repeater Activity-Triggered Macros
Command: Select Repeater Activity Counter/Timer ................................................................18-4
Command: Select Anti-Kerchunker Parameters .....................................................................18-6
Command: Select Anti-Kerchunk No Hangtime Mode ............................................................18-8
Command: Select (Review) Courtesy Messages ....................................................................18-9
Command: Select Repeater Action-Triggered Macros .........................................................18-11

Base Station Functions................................... 19-1
Command: Enable/Disable Star/Pound Talkout ......................................................................19-2
Command: Select Talkout Transmitter Mode ..........................................................................19-4
Command: Enable/Disable Command Execution on Interdigit Timer .....................................19-5

User Timers ..................................................... 20-1
Command: Select Timeout Value ............................................................................................20-2
Command: Select Timer Event Macro ....................................................................................20-3
Command: Stop Timer ............................................................................................................20-4
Command: Start Timer (Retriggerable) ...................................................................................20-5
Command: Start Timer (One-Shot) .........................................................................................20-6
Example: Fan Control .......................................................................................................20-7
Example: An Activity Timer ...............................................................................................20-8

Table of Contents

Remote Base Interface ................................... 21-1
Remote Base Setup and Configuration ...................................................................................21-2
Wiring ................................................................................................................................21-2
Switch Setting ...................................................................................................................21-2
Software Configuration .....................................................................................................21-2
Event-Triggered Macros ...................................................................................................21-3
Command: Assign Remote Base Password .....................................................................21-4
Command: Select Remote Base Access- and Dump-Triggered Macros .........................21-5
Command: Select (Review) Remote Base Off Message ..................................................21-6
Command: Reset RBI-1 ....................................................................................................21-7
Command: Enable/Disable Access to the Remote Base ..................................................21-8
User Functions: Controlling the Radios ................................................................................ 21-10
Defining Memory Channels using Macros ..................................................................... 21-11
User Function: Accessing the Remote Base ................................................................. 21-12
User Function: Dump Remote Base .............................................................................. 21-13
User Function: Speak Radio Configuration ................................................................... 21-14
User Function: Select Memory Channel and Band ........................................................ 21-16
User Function: Select VFO Frequency and Offset ........................................................ 21-17
User Function: Select Transmitter Offset ...................................................................... 21-19
User Function: Enable/Disable Transmitter ................................................................... 21-20
User Function: Enable/Disable Receiver ....................................................................... 21-21
User Function: Enable/Disable Radio Power ................................................................. 21-22
User Function: Select Transmitter Power Output .......................................................... 21-23
User Function: Select Frequency of CTCSS ................................................................. 21-24
User Function: Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder ........................................................... 21-25
User Function: Enable/Disable CTCSS Decoder .......................................................... 21-26
Macro Function: Send Queued Settings ........................................................................ 21-27
RBI-1 User Function Outputs ............................................................................................... 21-28
Command: Select RBI-1 Number of User Function Outputs ..........................................21-29
User Function: Select Individual RBI-1 User Function Outputs ......................................21-30
User Function: Enter RBI-1 User Function Output Group ..............................................21-31

Programming Tables ......................................... A-1
CW Character Set Tables ........................................................................................................ A-2
Beep Character Set Tables ...................................................................................................... A-4
DTMF Character Set Tables .................................................................................................... A-7
Synthesized Speech Vocabulary (Male) ................................................................................ A-10
Synthesized Speech Vocabulary (Female and Sound Effects) ............................................. A-15
Message Run-Time Variables ................................................................................................ A-16
Message Control Characters ................................................................................................. A-17
Scheduler Day Code Table .................................................................................................... A-18
Tone Code Table.................................................................................................................... A-19
Root Numbers (Commands) by Number ............................................................................... A-22
Event Macros by Number ...................................................................................................... A-24
Messages by Number ............................................................................................................ A-27
Tenth-Second Timers by Number ......................................................................................... A-29
Tenth-Minute Timers by Number ........................................................................................... A-29
Path Access Mode by Number .............................................................................................. A-29
Software Switches by Number .............................................................................................. A-30
Command Quick Reference................................................................................................... A-32

Application Notes .............................................. B-1
Using the 7K as a Beacon Controller ....................................................................................... B-1
Positive Voltage TX Keying Circuit ........................................................................................... B-3

7K •

Installation.......................................................... C-1
Theory of Operation.................................................................................................................. C-1
Pre-Programming .............................................................................................................. C-1
Default Information............................................................................................................. C-1
Power Supply ..................................................................................................................... C-1
Repeater Interfacing .......................................................................................................... C-2
Control Receiver Interfacing .............................................................................................. C-2
External Device Interfacing ................................................................................................ C-2
Audio Gating ...................................................................................................................... C-2
Tone Generation ................................................................................................................ C-2
Memory Protection............................................................................................................. C-3
Cables ...................................................................................................................................... C-3
Repeater Receiver COR........................................................................................................... C-3
Repeater Transmitter PTT ....................................................................................................... C-5
Repeater Receiver Audio ......................................................................................................... C-6
Repeater Transmitter Audio ..................................................................................................... C-7
Repeater CTCSS Decoder ....................................................................................................... C-8
Control Receiver COR.............................................................................................................. C-9
Control Receiver Audio........................................................................................................... C-10
DC Power ............................................................................................................................... C-10
Logic Inputs ............................................................................................................................ C-11
Logic Outputs ......................................................................................................................... C-11
Telephone Line Connection.................................................................................................... C-12
FCC Part 68 Rules........................................................................................................... C-13
Input and Output Connectors ................................................................................................. C-15
Audio Level Potentiometers.................................................................................................... C-16
Message Level Potentiometers .............................................................................................. C-17
DIP Switches .......................................................................................................................... C-18
Testing The Controller-To-Repeater Transmitter Interface.................................................... C-18
Testing The Controller-To-Repeater Receiver Interface ........................................................ C-19
Testing The DTMF Decoder................................................................................................... C-19
Command Sources .......................................................................................................... C-20
Local Control.................................................................................................................... C-20
Performing the Tests ....................................................................................................... C-20
Falsing ............................................................................................................................. C-21
Real-Time Clock..................................................................................................................... C-21

Parts Lists and Schematics .............................. D-1
Controller Main Board .............................................................................................................. D-1
Speech Synthesizer Module (SSM) ....................................................................................... D-10
Telephone Interface Module (TIM) ........................................................................................ D-13
Audio Delay Module (ADM) ................................................................................................... D-17

xii

Table of Contents

Selected Tables
A
Autopatch Call Types

.........................................................................................7-35

Beep Duration Change Characters ......................................................... 4-22,
Beep, Factory-Fixed Frequency ............................................................. 4-17,
Beep Gap Change Characters .............................................................. 4-21,
Beep, Owner-Fixed Frequency .............................................................. 4-18,
Beep Parameters (General) .................................................................. 4-16,

A-5
A-4
A-5
A-4
A-6

Command Quick Reference ............................................................................... A-33
Connectors, Input and Output ............................................................................. C-15
CW Alphanumeric Characters ................................................................. 4-8,
A-2
CW Frequency and Speed Changes ...................................................... 4-10,
A-3
CW Punctuation and Related Characters .................................................. 4-9,
A-3
CW Speed .......................................................................................................4-13

DTMF Characters .............................................................................. 4-27,
A-7
DTMF Custom Changes (Duration • Gap • Pause) ..................................... 4-30,
A-9
DTMF Decoder Access Mode ..............................................................................11-5
DTMF Duration Change Characters ....................................................... 4-27,
A-7
DTMF Gap Change Characters ............................................................. 4-28,
A-8
DTMF Pause Characters ..................................................................... 4-29,
A-8

E
Event Macros by Number

................................................................................... A-24

Message Control Character Definitions
4-3,
A-17
Message Run-Time Variables ............................................................... 4-35,
A-16
Messages by Number ....................................................................................... A-27

Potentiometers, Audio Level ............................................................................... C-16
Potentiometers, Message Level ........................................................................... C-17
Parts • Audio Delay Module (ADM) ....................................................................... D-17
Parts • Controller Main Board ................................................................................ D-1
Parts • Speech Synthesizer Module (SSM) ............................................................. D-10
Parts • Telephone Interface Module (TIM) .............................................................. D-13
Path Access Mode by Number ............................................................................ A-29

R
Root Numbers (Commands) by Number

................................................................ A-22

xiii

7K •

Scheduler Day Code Table ..................................................................... 9-3,
A-18
Switches, Software, by Number ........................................................................... A-30
Switches, DIP .................................................................................................. C-18
Synthesized Speech Vocabulary (Female Voice and Sound Effects) ............................ A-15
Synthesized Speech Vocabulary (Male Voice) ........................................................ A-10

Tail Messages ................................................................................................12-10
Telephone Line Suppressors Market Sources ......................................................... C-13
Timers, Tenth-Minute, by Number ........................................................................ A-29
Timers, Tenth-Second, by Number ....................................................................... A-29
Tone Code Table ............................................................................................. A-19
TS-32 Programming ..........................................................................................10-4

xiv

Product Description

Chapter 1

Product
Description
The S-COM 7K is a high-quality, compact, microprocessor-based repeater
controller intended for use in amateur radio and commercial installations.
Incorporating advanced hardware and software designs, the 7K provides mostoften-needed control functions and powerful new features not found in any
comparably priced controller.
•
•
•

The 7K is fully remotely programmable via DTMF commands over the
telephone or receiver ports—eliminating the inconvenience of returning
EPROMs, microcontroller ICs, and boards to the factory for reprogramming.
No jumpers of diodes are needed for programming.
Data is retained in non-volatile memory, ensuring that no information is lost
during power outages, making extra trips to the repeater site unnecessary.

1-1

7K • Chapter 1

Standard Hardware Features
Configuration
The standard 7K controller package consists of a main board mounted in a
mainframe cabinet, a set of mating connectors, and a manual. No options are
required to perform the most-often-needed repeater control functions.

Cabinet
The standard cabinet provides mounting for the main board and for optional
boards, and can be installed in a standard 19" wide equipment rack. The
cabinet is constructed of three parts: An iridite-plated chassis box, an iriditeplated chassis cover, and a black front panel. The complete assembly is only 13/4" high and 7" deep, allowing installation in any rack (including slim Motorola
racks).

Main Board
The 7K Main Board measures 6" deep by 9-3/4" wide, and can operate as a
stand-alone controller. The digital portion of the board contains the
microprocessor, memory, logic input/output, and real-time clock circuits. The
analog portion contains the DTMF encoder/decoder, audio crosspoint switch,
tone synthesis, and audio interface circuits. Three connectors (two DB25S and
one 2.5-mm power jack) are mounted on the main board. These connectors
protrude through cutouts in the rear of the cabinet, making the interior of the
cabinet free of wiring.

Optional Hardware Features
Telephone Interface Module
The Telephone Interface Module (TIM) is constructed on a 3" by 6" PC board,
and adds autopatch, reverse patch, and phone line control capabilities to the
7K. The module is registered with the FCC under Part 68 Rules, eliminating the
need for a separate telephone coupler. Transient protection and RFI filtering
are provided. All solid-state design eliminates mechanical relays. Built-in
electronic hybrid allows both half-duplex and full-duplex autopatch calls.
Supports both regenerated DTMF dialing and 10/20 PPS rotary dialing.

Speech Synthesis Module
The Speech Synthesis Module (SSM) is constructed on a 3" by 6" PC board,
and adds convenient, high-quality speech message capabilities to the 7K. The
SSM has its own microprocessor for controlling the speech synthesizer,
supplied with a large vocabulary. A third-order lowpass filter smooths analog
output of the synthesizer IC.

1-2

Product Description

Digital Audio Delay Module
The Digital Audio Delay Module (DADM) is constructed on a 2.1" by 2.7" PC
board, and removes squelch noise bursts and DTMF tone bursts from repeated
audio. As many as two DADMs may be installed in the cover of the 7K cabinet,
one each for receiver #1 and receiver #2. The DADM delays the audio from 12
to 197 milliseconds, adjustable via a dip switch.

Standard Software Features
CW Identifier
The software CW Identifier stores remotely-programmable multiple callsigns
with ID tail messages. Time between identifications is also programmable. CW
is internally mixed with repeat audio. The ID-er is polite, and attempts to
identify during breaks between transmissions.

CW Messages and Paging Formats
Most of the CW Messages are remotely programmable. CW pitch and speed
are programmable, and can be changed within a message. The character set
includes alphanumerics, punctuation, and a large library of “Beeps.” CW level
is set with a potentiometer.
The 7K supports the following paging formats: Single-tone (group call), twotone sequential, 5/6-tone, and DTMF. Pages may be stacked for convenient
call-up of ARES members, weather spotters, DX club members, on-the-air
meetings, etc.

Timers
All timers in the 7K are derived from the microprocessor's crystal-controlled
clock circuit for improved accuracy over other methods. Most timers are
remotely programmable, including: Courtesy Delay, Dropout Delay, Transmitter
Timeout, and Autopatch Timeout.

Repeater Characteristics
The character of a repeater can be varied with choices of Courtesy Messages,
Dropout Messages, Timeout Messages, and their associated timers. The
repeater can be placed into one of several access modes, or disabled.
Repeater characteristics can be changed by either a command or a transition
on one of the logic inputs.

1-3

7K • Chapter 1

Clock and Calendar
Time and date information may be obtained by inserting one or more Run-Time
Variables into any programmable message. CW readout is available from the
main board. Male and female voice readout is available if the optional SSM
board is installed.
A 100-setpoint Scheduler executes commands at programmable times and
dates.

Logic Inputs and Outputs
Logic inputs are used to detect a change of state in monitored devices at the
repeater site. Logic outputs can be manipulated by command to pulse or latch
a controlled device at the site.

Command Language
Commands are given to the 7K with an easy-to-use DTMF language. Security
is enhanced with a Password (PW) system, as well as programmable
restrictions on DTMF decode operation. A library of Macros may be defined for
repeater users. Macros may be created, deleted, renamed, and modified at any
time by authorized programmers.

1-4

Getting Started

Chapter 2

Getting Started
In this section, we will assume that you have either completed the installation
of the controller into the repeater, or you are simulating a repeater with
switches for COR signals, LEDs for PTT loads, and so on. To perform the
installation of your new controller, see the Installation appendix on page C-1.
If desired, the controller can be programmed on your workbench, then moved
to the repeater site for installation.
Note: Be sure to transport the controller in anti-static packing material. Large
electrostatic discharges can damage components and destroy the data stored
in memory.

Power ON Initialization
Initialize Controller
Each time power is applied to the controller, it will check to see if the Initialize
Push- Button is being pressed. (The initialize push-button is located in the right
rear corner of the main board.) At that moment, the controller will decide
whether to retrieve default information stored in the EPROM and write it into
the non-volatile RAM (push-button DOWN), or retain the previously-stored
information (push-button UP)
Note: If the initialize push-button is pressed at any other time, it will have no
effect. Likewise, since a specific sequence is needed to initialize your
controller, accidental contact with the push-button will not destroy your
programming efforts.
Controllers are initialized as part of the testing procedure at the factory.
However, we recommend that you do another initialization before attempting to
program the controller.

2-1

7K • Chapter 2
There may be other occasions when you will need to initialize the controller.
Some examples follow:
•
•
•
•
•

The programming password was never written down, and was forgotten by
the programmer.
A general erasing of all programming is desired, since the controller is being
transferred to a new repeater and will receive all new programming.
You are installing a new software upgrade EPROM.
It has been necessary to replace the battery, RAM IC, RAM controller IC, or
some other part in the non-volatile RAM circuit.
In this last case, you must perform the initialization sequence twice to
ensure proper operation of the RAM controller IC.

To initialize the controller, follow these four steps:
•

Remove power from the controller. This can be done by pulling out the 2.5
mm DC power plug.
• Press and hold down the initialize push-button.
• While holding down the push-button, restore power to the controller. This
can be done by inserting the 2.5 mm DC power plug.
• Continue holding down the push-button for several seconds after the power
has been restored.

Cold Start
An initialization is sometimes called a cold start. When a cold start occurs, the
controller will send ? RES C (reset, cold) in CW.

Warm Start
Applying power without doing an initialization is sometimes called a warm start.
When a warm start occurs, the controller will send ? RES (reset) in CW.

Default Condition
After an initialization, the controller's programming is in the Default Condition.
Default conditions are necessary if you want the controller to be able to operate
the repeater before you’ve had a chance to program it. An initialization can
therefore be though of as a quick pre-programming of the controller. Most
commands have default conditions. They remain in effect until you change
them through programming. The default conditions are described with the
commands in this manual.
Note: There is a push-ON jumper in the main board which is used to
disconnect the battery from the RAM IC. This jumper is removed during some
repair operations, and during current drain tests. Removing this jumper will not
initialize the controller. Removing and replacing the jumper will require an
initialization sequence before proper operation will resume

2-2

Programming Fundamentals

Chapter 3

Programming
Fundamentals
Note: Throughout this manual, numerous Programming Tables are used to
facillitate programming the controller. Most of these tables are reprinted in
Appendix A (on page A-1). Additionally, all commands used in this book appear
in the Command Quick Reference on page A-25.
You program the controller by entering strings of DTMF digits. These strings of
digits are referred to as Commands. A standard DTMF keyboard with 12 digits
may be used for nearly all commands. A few advanced features are available
to programmers with 16- button keyboards. The extra 4 lettered keys may be
used in passwords or macro names to increase the security of the system.
(See the Special Keys section on page 3-4.) The controller may be
programmed over any of the receiver inputs and the telephone line, if enabled.
The controller responds to valid commands by sending Acknowledgment
Messages (Acknowledgments). These responses may be disable if desired
using the Enable/Disable Command Response Messages command on page
11-2.

3-1

7K • Chapter 3

Valid Digit and Time Detection
As shipped from the factory, the DTMF decoder requires about 40mS to detect
a valid digit. The microprocessor scans the decoder once every 10mS to see if
a digit has been detected. Thus, it can take about 50mS to store a valid digit.
Allowing a 50mS pause between digits, the controller is able to store about 10
digits per second. Since these are best-case times, use longer durations and
pauses if you wish to reliably program the controller with automatic DTMF
sending equipment.
In the following section of the manual, we will discuss the basic structure of
control commands.

Control Command Structure
All control commands follow the format as shown in Figure 1.

(Add Figure Here!)

Figure 1

A control command always begins with a Security Password—generally
referred to as “Password,” and using the symbol “(PW)” in this manual.
•
•
•
•
•
•

The default security password is 99.
The password increases the security of the system.
It can be changed at any time.
The password can be 2, 4, or 6 digits long, and may consist of any
combination of the numbers 0–9, and the letters A, B, C and D.
Star (*) and pound (#) are not allowed in passwords.
The controller supports several passwords, used in programming the
system and in accessing the Autopatch.

Note: Choose a security password immediately! If you begin creating
macros using the default password and later wish to change it, all your
commands will have to be re- entered using the new password.

3-2

Programming Fundamentals
Following the security password is a Root Number, and sometimes, a
Post-Root Number. (Some of the tables in this manual use the term “Code” to
mean root number or post-root number.)
•
•

•
•

The root number tells the controller which function the user wishes to
program.
Root numbers are either 2 or 4 digits long, and consist only of the numbers
0–9. (Technically, when a root number is 4 digits long, a post-root number
comprises the second 2 digits. Generally, we use the term root number to
mean both the root and post- root number.)
Each control command has a unique root number.
The root number is fixed by the controller's internal software, and cannot be
changed.

Following the root number is one or more Data Digits.
•
•
•
•

Data digits may be thought of as “variables.”
Some commands are quite simple, and do not need any data digits. Other
commands require a string of data digits.
A particular command may have more than one type of data digit (x, y, or
z).
Do not confuse the types of variables with the number of data digits. The
number of symbols (x, y, or z) indicate the number of digits expected by the
controller. For example, “xx yyy zzzz” means enter two digits of data digit x,
3 digits of data digit y, and 4 digits of z.

Following the Data Digits (if any) is a Terminator.
•
•
•
•
•

The terminator can be either the star character (*) or a carrier drop (if
enabled).
The star character will always work as a terminator; in fact, it is necessary
when programming the controller via the telephone, since there is no carrier
to drop.
The terminator tells the controller that the command has ended.
It is necessary, since control commands vary in length.
The terminator is similar to a “carriage return” on a computer keyboard, or
the “equals” key on a calculator.

Example Control Command
Here's an example of a control command:
99 63 00 0 *
Note: We've put spaces between some digits to help explain this example.
However, you do not need any pauses between the digits when you are
programming the controller.

3-3

7K • Chapter 3
•
•
•
•
•

The security password in this example is 99, the default password. The
password tells the controller that you are a legitimate programmer.
The root number is 63. This root number tells the controller that you wish to
control a software switch.
The 00 specifies the switch, in this case it is the Transmitter 1
Enable/Disable switch.
The data digits is 0. In this particular command, the 0 tells the controller to
disable transmitter 1.
The terminator is “*,” which tells the controller that you have reached the
end of this particular command. The controller always waits for the
terminator before it processes a command.

If we make no mistakes in entering this command, the controller will respond
with a message, and turn OFF Transmitter 1. If a mistake is made in the
command, such as a data digit of 2, the controller will send an Error Message,
and Transmitter 1 will not change. If you enter a control command with an
incorrect password or a non-existent root number, the controller will not
respond to the command.

Command Response Messages
Acknowledgment
Most Control Commands respond in some way to tell you that they were
accepted by the controller, or that you made a mistake in entering the
command. The usual Acknowledgment Message is OK (sent in CW). If another
response is more appropriate, a different acknowledgment will be sent instead
of the OK.

Errors
When a mistake is made entering a command, an error message (error) is sent
in CW. There are two commonly-used error messages:
•
•

? err 1 means you have made an error in the number of keystrokes entered
for a particular command. If the command requires 5 keystrokes, for
example, and you entered 6, the response will be an error 1.
? err 2 means you have made an error in the data presented for a particular
command. If a timer, for example, has a range of 0 to 5.0 seconds, and you
entered 6.0 seconds, the response will be an error 2.

Command Response Messages can be turned ON and OFF using the
Enable/Disable Command Response Messages command on page 11-2.

3-4

Programming Fundamentals

Special Keys
There are two keys on your 12-button or 16-button DTMF keyboard which have
special meanings to the controller. They are the star (*) and pound (#) keys.
(Technically, the # is called an octothorpe, but we’ll just call it a Pound.). These
two characters are not allowed to be part of a password or macro name, and
they won't be found in root numbers or data digits.

Star (*) and Carrier Drop as Terminators
As mentioned earlier, the Star (*) digit serves as a terminator, indicating to the
controller that you have finished entering a command.
•
•
•
•

The (*) will always work as a terminator.
The (*) method cannot be turned OFF, and will terminate any command.
You can also allow a carrier drop to work as a terminator if you wish.
The carrier drop method can be turned ON and OFF.

Why do we have the two methods?
•

•

It's easier to terminate a command by simply releasing the PTT (push-totalk) button on your microphone, saving you one keystroke (the *). However,
there could be a carrier on the repeater's input frequency some day when
you enter a command. If the carrier continues to hold up the repeater after
you've released the PTT button, your command won't be executed. Entering
the (*) at the end of the command will guarantee that the command is
properly terminated.
A second reason for using the (*) terminator is that you may enter a series
of commands, one after the other, without releasing the PTT button. (You
do not have to wait for the acknowledgment message before entering the
next command.) You must, of course, use the (*) terminator when entering
commands from a Touch-Tone™ telephone, since there is no carrier drop
for the controller to detect.

Pound (#) as Clear or Abort Key
The pound (#) digit serves as the Clear or Abort key. It indicates to the
controller that you have made an error, and you wish to clear the command
buffer. (The command buffer is a holding area of the partially-entered
command.)
•
•
•

The (#) key only works if a command is still in the buffer, and has not been
executed.
When you enter the terminator, the command is immediately executed and
it is too late to clear the buffer.
You may start entering the next command immediately after pressing the
(#) key.

3-5

7K • Chapter 3
•
•

There is no acknowledgment message sent by the controller when a
command is cleared.
Any digits following the (#) digit will be considered a new command.

DTMF Interdigit Timer
The controller uses a DTMF Interdigit Timer for the purpose of clearing the
command buffer if a command is not completely entered.
For example, if a user accidentally presses a digit, or if a digit is falsed into the
buffer, or if a user drives out of range or his signal flutters while entering a
command, the command buffer will have only a piece of a command. If the
controller had no time limit between digits, that piece of a command would stay
in the buffer. The controller would confuse it with the next command it receives.
The DTMF interdigit timer works as follows:
•
•
•

When you release any DTMF key, the timer is started.
If you do not enter another DTMF digit within the time limit, the controller will
clear the command buffer.
The interdigit timer initially defaults to 5.0 seconds, but it can be
reprogrammed with a different value if desired.

DTMF Mute Delay
The controller has a DTMF Mute feature that prevents your DTMF commands
from being repeated. This feature can be turned ON and OFF for various
Receiver-Transmitter combinations using the Enable/Disable DTMF Decoder
Mute commands on page 11-9.
Unless your controller has been fitted with the optional Audio Delay Module,
there will be a short burst (40 to 50mS) of DTMF that is repeated at the
beginning of a digit. This short burst occurs because the controller requires
some time to detect the DTMF digit and shut OFF the audio gate.
To reduce the number of bursts, the controller will continue to mute the audio
for a while after you have released the DTMF key. Therefore, if you enter a
string of digits rapidly, there will be only a single burst (caused by the beginning
of the first digit). If you wait too long between digits, the muting will end. The
next digit you enter will cause a short burst at the beginning. The DTMF
Decoder Mute Delay initially defaults to 0.5 seconds, but it can be
reprogrammed with a different value if desired.

3-6

Messages

Chapter 4

Messages
The controller uses Messages to communicate with users of the repeater. Most
of the controller's messages are remotely programmable via DTMF commands.
Messages may be composed of combinations of CW (Morse) characters,
beeps, DTMF characters, synthesized speech words, and various paging
formats.

Message Buffer
A portion of the controller’s memory is dedicated to the Message Buffer. The
message buffer is used to temporarily store messages that the controller is
asked to send. The message buffer is a FIFO buffer (first-in, first-out), which
means that the first message to arrive in the buffer is the first one to be sent
out. The purpose of the message buffer is to prevent overruns when several of
the controller’s software programs want to send messages at the same time.
Each program sends its message to the message buffer: The messages are
then unloaded and transmitted by a program called the message handler.

Message Handler
The Message Handler needs to know what kind of message it is unloading—
and where it is to go—so that it can operate the proper hardware to send the
message. For example, a DTMF Message requires different hardware than a
speech synthesized message. A message intended for transmitter #1 requires
a different path be set up than a message intended for transmitter #2.
The way to tell the message handler the type of message and the routing of the
message desired is with special control characters. The control characters are
defined next.

4-1

7K • Chapter 4

Control Characters
Control Characters are small code groups which you place into a message to
give instructions to the message handler. The message handler recognizes
control characters because they always begin with 99.
When the message handler encounters a group of characters which begin with
99, it looks at the digits immediately following the 99 for the instructions. It then
performs the desired action.
Since none of the libraries (CW, beeps, synthesized speech, etc.) have
characters beginning with 99, the message handler won’t confuse library
characters with control characters. (Don’t be concerned if you program a tone
page or a custom code group that happens to contain a 99 sequence in the
data. Since the character group doesn’t begin with 99, it will be interpreted
correctly.
Note: Don’t confuse the 99 being discussed with the password (PW) used to
enter commands, which happens to default to 99. control characters are used
only within messages. You can change the password, but you cannot change
the control characters. They must always begin with 99.
Any message that you program into the controller can contain one or more
control characters. Control characters can occur anywhere in the message
depending on how you want the message to be sent. Of course, you will need
the Speech Synthesis Module option if you want to send a speech message,
and you’ll need a Telephone Interface Module option if you want to send a
message to the phone line.
It’s a good idea to begin every message you program with two control
characters: One defines the type of message you want to send. The other
selects the routing (audio path). If you don’t specify the message type, the
controller will assume you want to send a CW message. If you don’t specify the
routing, the controller will assume the message goes to transmitter #1, unless
the phone line is engaged in control mode. In that case, all messages go to the
phone line. Since many of your messages won’t fit these conditions, get into
the habit of specifying your choices with control characters.
The message handler executes control characters as it finds them in the
message. It does not “look ahead” to see if you will be changing any conditions.
Therefore, you must enter the control character ahead of the desired message.
We list the possible control characters next, then show some examples of their
use.

4-2

Messages

Control Character Definitions
Control Character

Definition

9900
9910
9920
9930
9940
9950
9960
9981
9982
9983
9984
9985
9986
9987
9988
9989
9999

CW characters follow
beep characters follow
single-tone page follows
two-tone page follows
5/6-tone page follows
DTMF characters follow
synthesized speech characters follow
route this message to transmitter #1 mixed
route this message to transmitter #1 not mixed (clear)
route this message to transmitter #2 mixed
route to this message to transmitter #2 not mixed (clear)
route this message to phone line mixed
route this message to phone line not mixed (clear)
do not route (cancel) to transmitter #1
do not route (cancel) to transmitter #2
do not route (cancel) to phone line
Execute the macro that follows

As you can see, control characters 9900–9960 tell the message handler what
kind of message you want. Control characters 9981–9989 tell the message
handler how you want the message routed. 9999 synchronizes messages with
macros. We’ll discuss the 9900 through 9960 and 9999 control characters in
their appropriate sections to follow. We’ll discuss the Routing control characters
here.

Routing and Unrouting Control Characters
Default
The defaults for Routing and Unrouting Control Characters are as follows:
•

•

CW and beep messages default to 9981 if the phone line is not active in the
control mode. That is, all CW and beep messages will be sent to transmitter
#1 and will be mixed with the receiver audio (if present); but will go to the
phone line if it is active.
All pages and speech synthesized messages default to 9982 if the phone
line is not active in the control mode. That is, all pages and speech
messages will be sent to transmitter #1, and receiver audio will be muted. If
the phone line is active in control mode, speech messages will go to it;
Pages will be sent to both transmitter #1 and the phone line.

4-3

7K • Chapter 4
You can override these default conditions, since the “route” and “don’t route”
(Unroute or Cancel Route) control characters have higher priority than the
defaults. Specifying any routing will automatically cancel the default routing.

Examples
You can stack up routing and unrouting codes within a message, and you can
change your routing within a message. Here are some examples. For clarity,
we’ll just show your desired message as “(message).”
To send a message to transmitter #1 along with the receiver audio, enter:
(PW) 15 9981 (message) *

If the message is a page, you will want to sent it in the clear, with no receiver
audio present. Enter:
(PW) 15 9982 (message) *

Note: Password 15 is the command to send a message. It is not stored in the
controller, like a transmitter timeout message would be.
To send a message to transmitter #2, not mixed, enter:
(PW) 15 9984 (message) *

To send a message to both transmitters, not mixed, enter:
(PW) 15 9982 9984 (message) *

Routing accumulates within a message. If you enter:
(PW) 15 9982 (message 1) 9984 (message 2) *

Message 1 goes to transmitter #1, but both messages go to transmitter #2. If
you want message 1 to go to transmitter #1 and message 2 to go to transmitter
#2, you must cancel transmitter #1’s routing, like this:
(PW) 15 9982 (message 1) 9987 9984 (message 2) *.

We have been using the command “(PW) 15” in these examples, since that is
the way you send a one-time message. Or, you can send a message from a
macro by using this command. However, the controller supports many
programmable messages, such as IDs, courtesy messages, and so on. Feel
free to use control characters in these programmable messages as well as the
one-time message examples.
Routing and unrouting (cancel routing) control characters are only in effect for
the duration of the message. When the message ends, default routing takes
over. Our suggestion, then, is to enter control characters in each message you
4-4

Messages
program to be sure the controller follows your wishes. Most users expect CW
messages, beeps and perhaps speech messages to be mixed with repeat
audio, since sending them unmixed would mute repeat audio for the duration of
the message. However, pages, announcements, and so forth, may be sent
unmixed to ensure they are received and decoded properly.

Synchronizing Messages and Commands
In the controller, the Message Handler processes messages from the Message
Queue. The Command Executive processes commands and macros from the
Execution Queue. These queues are processed independently but
simultaneously. Messages and commands queued at the same time and
expected to operate in sequence can have unexpected results. That is, unless
you use the message control character to keep everything in synchronization.
Suppose you want to generate a DTMF page of “1234”, then switch on logic
output number 1. You might write a macro with the following commands:
(PW) 20 9000 (PW) 15 9950 01 02 03 04 *
(PW) 29 9000 (PW) 70 1 *

However, this command sequence will not have the expected results. The first
command queues the DTMF page to the message queue for execution then
immediately executes the command to turn on the logic output. The logic
output will change before the DTMF command has completed.
To cause the second line of the macro to wait until after the first line has sent
the DTMF page, you write this as two macros:
(PW) 20 9000 (PW) 15 9950 01 02 03 04 9999 9001 *
(PW) 20 9001 (PW) 70 1 *

“9999” in the macro 9000 is a Message Control Character that causes a macro
to be executed when the Message Handler reaches that point in the message.
The “9001” that follows the 9999 message control character is the name of the
macro to execute. This sequence operates as expected because the DTMF
page will complete before the command to turn on the logic output is executed.

Note: Macro names used with the 9999 Message Control Character must be 4
digits long. Add leading zeros if required.
This type of sequencing also has uses in Autopatch speed dial macros that dial
a pager, then send a DTMF page as the message to be displayed on the
dialed digital pager.

4-5

7K • Chapter 4

CW Messages
Control Character
When building a CW Message, the control character 9900 should be entered
before the actual CW characters. If a message does not begin with a control
character, the message handler will assume that the message should be sent
in CW. Therefore, a CW-only message would not require the 9900. A message
could be made up of mixed types, such as a series of beeps followed by CW
characters. In that case, the control character 9900 is needed before the CW
portion of the message.

Format
The format for CW messages is as follows:
•
•
•

Enter the control character 9900.
Enter the various CW character codes described in the CW Character Set
Tables which begin on page A-2 to create the desired message.
You may end the CW message with the (*) character, or enter another
control character (99xx) and continue with another message type.

Pre-Message Delay Character
A special Pre-Message Delay Character, 54, can be programmed after the
control character 9900, but before the CW characters. The delay character (54)
causes the message handler to pause for 1 second before sending the CW
message. Any additional 54s found after the first one will be ignored. If the CW
message was preceded by any other message, the 54 will be ignored.

Wordspace Character
The Wordspace Character, 40, should be placed between the words in a CW
message. The message handler will automatically place a wordspace at the
end of a CW message, so you won't have to remember to do so. This feature
prevents two adjacent CW messages from being run together. Wordspace
characters can be used as pauses during a CW message. However, the length
of the pause will depend upon the current sending speed of the CW (wordsper-minute).

Frequency Change
The CW frequency (pitch) may be changed before—or during—a CW
message. This feature allows you to draw attention to a certain message (or
part of a message).
•
•
•

A 6-digit character, 59xxxx, should be entered ahead of the CW characters
that are to be sent at the new frequency.
The four digits following the 59, shown as “xxxx,” represent the new
frequency and are taken from the Tone Code Table on page A-20.
The frequency may be changed as often as desired within a CW message
(even between each character).

The temporary frequency will stay in effect until either changed by other control
codes, or until the message buffer empties. Thus, if you will be using the

4-6

Messages
Frequency Change feature, it is a good practice to specify the frequency for
each CW message
If you wish to change the CW frequency for all CW messages, see the Select
Frequency of CW command on page 4-11.

Speed Change
The CW sending speed in WPM (words per minute) may be changed before,
or during, a CW message. The speed may be varied from 5 to 40 WPM in ten
steps. This feature allows you to draw attention to a certain CW message, or
make it more easily copied by those with modest CW skills.
•
•

To temporarily change the sending speed of a CW message, enter a 2-digit
character from 60 to 69 ahead of the CW characters that are to be sent at
the new speed.
The speed may be changed as often as desired within a CW message
(even between each character).

The temporary sending speed will stay in effect until either changed by other
control codes, or until the message buffer empties. Thus, if you will be using
the Speed Change feature, it is a good practice to specify the frequency for
each CW Message.
If you wish to change the sending speed for all CW messages, see the Select
Normal CW Speed and Select Slow CW Speed commands on pages 4-13 and
4-14 respectively.
If you wish to allow users to slow down CW messages, see the Send Next
Message Slowly command on page 4-12.

4-7

7K • Chapter 4

CW Alphanumeric Characters
The controller features a library of 54 alphanumeric CW characters, which are
comprised of numerals 0–9, letters A–Z, punctuation, and standard Morse
abbreviations.
•
•
•

Each character is represented by a 2-digit code from 00 to 53.
When building a CW message, be sure to use both digits of the code.
Do not omit leading zeroes.

The following table shows CW Alphanumeric Characters and their related
control characters (codes).

CW Alphanumeric Characters
Control Character 9900

4-8

Character

Code

Character

Code

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

Messages

CW Punctuation and Related Characters
The following table shows CW Punctuation and Related Characters and the
proper control characters (codes).

CW Punctuation and Related Characters
Control Character 9900

Character/Parameter

Symbol

Code

period
comma
fraction
question
word space
end-of-message
wait
break
double dash
end-of-work
hyphen
colon
semicolon
parenthesis
apostrophe
exclamation
quotation
understood
1.0 second pre-message delay

.
,
/
?
space
(AR)
(AS)
(BK)
(BT)
(SK)
:
;
()
’
!
”
(SN)

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54

4-9

7K • Chapter 4

CW Frequency Change and Speed Change Characters
The following table shows CW Frequency and Speed Change Characters and
their codes.

CW Frequency and Speed Changes
Control Character 9900

4-10

Change

Code

frequency
speed to 5 WPM
speed to 7 WPM
speed to 10 WPM
speed to 13 WPM
speed to 15 WPM
speed to 17 WPM
speed to 20 WPM
speed to 24 WPM
speed to 30 WPM
speed to 40 WPM

59xxxx (xxxx = tone code)
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

Messages

Enable/Disable CW
Enables or disables the CW sending function.
•

Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable CW

(PW) 63 01 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends nothing if disabled; OK if enabled
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered (disable only)
illegal digit entered (disable only)

Default Condition: CW is ON (enabled)

4-11

7K • Chapter 4

Select Frequency of CW
Changes the frequency (pitch) of the CW.
•
•
•
•

Enter the password, followed by the 4-digit root number shown, followed by
the 4-digit tone code for your desired frequency.
The tone code is taken from the Tone Code Table on page A-20. Do not
omit leading zeroes. Tone codes may also be calculated, if desired.
The frequency range is 100Hz to 5KHz, although most radio systems have
an audio response of 300Hz to 3KHz.
To select frequencies for the Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps and CTCSS,
see the applicable commands on pages 4-18 and 10-3.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Select Frequency of CW

(PW) 06 00 xxxx *

Tone Code Table

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal code entered

Default Condition: CW Frequency is 1500 Hz; Tone Code is 0667
Examples:
Let's change the frequency of the CW to 1200Hz. The tone code for 1200Hz is
0833. The command is:
(PW) 06 00 0833 *

4-12

Messages

Send Next Message Slowly
Entering this command before entering a command with a CW
message causes the CW message to be sent slowly.
•
•
•

The actual speed is set by the Select Slow CW Speed command on page
4-13.
This command is most useful when placed into a macro for users.
CW speed returns to normal after the CW memory empties.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Send Next Message Slowly

(PW) 11 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default Condition: CW is sent at the normal rate
Examples:
Assume that a macro, 3*, exists which sends the 12-hour time. Assume also
that a macro, 2*, exists which contains the Send Next Message Slowly
command. Then a user could enter:
2 *

3 *

This will cause the time-of-day to be sent at a slower rate than normal.
Note: The repeater courtesy message is also a CW message. If a user enters
2* and then releases the mike, the courtesy message will be sent slowly. Since
the speed then changes back to normal, entering a 3* will cause the time to be
sent at normal. Therefore, the user must enter the 2* and 3* in the same
transmission.

4-13

7K • Chapter 4

Select CW Speed
Select Normal CW Speed changes the speed at which CW
messages are normally sent.
Select Slow CW Speed changes the speed at which CW
messages are sent when preceded by the Send Next Message
Slowly command.
A single digit from 0–9 programs the desired speed.
•

See the CW Speed Table below.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Normal CW Speed
Select Slow CW Speed

(PW) 12 x *
(PW) 13 x *

CW Speed Table
CW Speed Table

Data Digit

CW Speed

Data Digit

CW Speed

0
1
2
3
4

5 WPM
7 WPM
10 WPM
13 WPM
15 WPM

5
6
7
8
9

17 WPM
20 WPM
24 WPM
30 WPM
40 WPM

Note: The above CW Speed Table is based on the number of milliseconds
duration of an element of CW (a dit = 1 element, a dah = 3 elements). Five
WPM corresponds to 240 mS/element, 7 WPM corresponds to 170
mS/element, 10 WPM corresponds to 120 mS/ element, and so on.
Acknowledgment: Sends OK

4-14

Messages
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition:
Command

Default Condition

Select Normal CW Speed
Select Slow CW Speed

20 WPM
15 WPM

Examples:
To change the normal CW sending speed to 17 words per minute, enter:
(PW) 12 5 *

To change the slow CW sending speed to 10 words per minute, enter:
(PW) 13 2 *

Note: There are two ways to change the speed of a CW message. One way is
to use the commands shown above; this is usually done upon installation. The
other method is to insert a speed change character into the message. The
latter is a temporary method, since the speed returns to normal after the
message is sent.

4-15

7K • Chapter 4

Beep Messages
Control Character
The control character 9910 must be entered before the actual beep characters
when building a beep message.
Note: Any message that does not have a control character will be interpreted
as a CW message.

Format
The format for beep messages is as follows:
•
•
•

Enter the control character 9910.
Then enter the various beep character codes described in the Beep
Character Set Tables beginning on page A-5 to create the desired
message.
You may end the beep message with the (*) character, or enter another
control character (99xx) and continue with another message type.

Beep Parameters (General)
The following table shows the general parameters related to beep messages.
These parameters will be discussed in more detail in the sections which follow:

Beep Parameters (General)
Control Character 9910

Parameter

Code

custom beep
custom beep delay
1 second pre-message delay
automatic beep gap OFF
automatic beep gap ON

57xxxxyy
58xx
54
55
56

Pre-Message Delay Character
A special pre-message delay character, 54, can be programmed—after the
control character 9910 but before the beep characters. The delay character
(54) causes the message handler to pause for 1 second before sending the
beep message. Any additional 54s found after the first one will be ignored. If
the beep message was preceded by any other message, the 54 will be ignored.

4-16

Messages

Factory-Fixed-Frequency Beeps
Forty-eight (48) beeps have been defined in frequency but have variable
duration. These beeps are programmed with the character codes 00–47 and
cover almost four octaves from 262Hz to 3951Hz. It is best to avoid beeps
below 300Hz and above 3000Hz, since most radio systems are designed for
300–3000Hz response.
The following table shows the Factory-Fixed Frequency Beeps:
This table includes associated note values for each frequency. However, these
note values are simply intended as a guide to the pitch of each beep and
should not be construed as musical in nature.

Factory-Fixed Frequency Beeps
Control Character 9910

Freq

Note

Beep

Freq

Note

Beep

Freq

Note

Beep

262Hz
277Hz

C3
C#3

00
01

659Hz
698Hz

E4
F4

16
17

1661Hz
1760Hz

G#5
A5

32
33

294Hz
311Hz
330Hz
349Hz
370Hz
392Hz
415Hz
440Hz
466Hz
494Hz
523Hz
554Hz
587Hz
622Hz

D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4

02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

740Hz
784Hz
831Hz
880Hz
932Hz
988Hz
1046Hz
1109Hz
1175Hz
1244Hz
1319Hz
1397Hz
1480Hz
1568Hz

F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

1865Hz
1976Hz
2093Hz
2217Hz
2349Hz
2489Hz
2637Hz
2794Hz
2960Hz
3136Hz
3322Hz
3520Hz
3729Hz
3951Hz

A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
F6
F#6
G6
G#6
A6
A#6
B6

34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

4-17

7K • Chapter 4

Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps
Six (6) beeps are definable in frequency by the owner, and have variable
duration. The beeps default to factory-selected frequencies upon a cold start.
The frequencies may be changed, and the new frequencies will be retained
upon a warm start. These beeps are programmed with the character
codes 48-53.
The following table shows the Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps:

Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps
Control Character 9910

Beep

48
49
50
51
52
53

4-18

Owner-Fixed Frequency (Fill-In) Default Condition

500Hz
750Hz
1000Hz
1250Hz
1500Hz
1750Hz

Messages

Select Frequency of Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps
Changes the frequency (pitch) of the CW.
•
•
•
•

Enter the password, followed by the 4-digit root number shown, followed by
the 4-digit tone code for your desired frequency.
The tone code is taken from the Tone Code Table on page A-20. Do not
omit leading zeroes. Tone codes may also be calculated, if desired.
The frequency range is 100Hz to 5KHz, although most radio systems have
an audio response of 300Hz to 3KHz.
To select frequencies for CW and CTCSS, see the appropriate commands
on pages 4-11 and 10-3 respectively.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Select Frequency of Beep 48
Select Frequency of Beep 49
Select Frequency of Beep 50
Select Frequency of Beep 51
Select Frequency of Beep 52
Select Frequency of Beep 53

(PW) 06 01 xxxx *
(PW) 06 02 xxxx *
(PW) 06 03 xxxx *
(PW) 06 04 xxxx *
(PW) 06 05 xxxx *
(PW) 06 06 xxxx *

Tone Code Table
Tone Code Table
Tone Code Table
Tone Code Table
Tone Code Table
Tone Code Table

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal code entered

Default Condition:
Command

Default Condition

Tone Code

Select Frequency of Beep 48
Select Frequency of Beep 49
Select Frequency of Beep 50
Select Frequency of Beep 51
Select Frequency of Beep 52
Select Frequency of Beep 53

500Hz
750Hz
1000Hz
1250Hz
1500Hz
1750Hz

2000
1333
1000
0800
0667
0571

4-19

7K • Chapter 4
Examples:
Let's change the frequency of beep 48 to 600Hz. The tone code for 600Hz is
1667. The command is:
(PW) 06 01 1667 *

4-20

Messages

Custom Beeps
Custom Beeps are defined on-the-fly in both frequency and duration.
•
•
•

An 8-digit character, 57xxxxyy, defines the custom beep.
The four digits following the 57, shown as xxxx, represent the frequency
and are taken from the Tone Code Table on page A-20.
The next two digits, shown as yy, represent the duration in tens of
milliseconds.

Custom beeps allow you to create a unique message with any frequency and
any duration to 990mS. As an example, let's define a custom beep of 1275Hz
for 70mS. The custom beep code would be 57078407.

Custom Beep Delay
Duration for Custom Beep Delays is defined on-the-fly.
•
•

A 4-digit character, 58xx, defines the custom delay.
The two digits following the 58, shown as xx, represent the duration of the
delay in tens of milliseconds.

Although custom delays can be placed anywhere in a beep message, they go
well with custom beeps if you need to create a truly unique or specialized
signalling burst. For example, a string of custom beeps and custom delays
could be used to generate a string of ASCII characters of the proper tones for
use with modems.

Beep Gap Change Characters
Beep Gap Change Characters are used to introduce a silent period between
beeps. Ten (10) such characters have been defined from 10mS to 320mS
using the codes 60-69. Beep gap change characters may be used alone to
separate groups of beeps, or can be automatically placed after every beep by
using the Automatic Beep Gap ON Character (described on page 4-22). This
parameter is not changed at the end of the beep message.
The following table shows Beep Gap Change control characters:

Beep Gap Change Characters
Control Character 9910

Beep Gap Change

Code

10mS
20mS
30mS
40mS
60mS
80mS
120mS
160mS
240mS
320mS

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

4-21

7K • Chapter 4
Note: Any time a beep gap change character is entered, its duration is
remembered by the message handler. When the automatic beep gap ON
character is encountered, the message handler will use the duration that it
remembered from the previous beep gap change character. This is also true of
the custom beep delay character.

Beep Duration Change Characters
Beep Duration Change characters are used to set the duration of the beep
characters that follow. Ten (10) beep duration change characters have been
defined from 10mS to 320mS using the codes 70–79. The beep duration may
be changed as often as desired within a beep message (even between each
beep). This parameter is not changed at the end of the beep message.
The following table shows Beep Duration Change Characters:

Beep Duration Change Characters
Control Character 9910

Beep Duration Change

Code

10mS
20mS
30mS
40mS
60mS
80mS
120mS
160mS
240mS
320mS

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79

Note: Any time a beep duration change is made (including a custom beep), the
duration will be remembered by the message handler. When any succeeding
beep is encountered, the message handler will use the duration that it
remembered from the previous beep duration change.

Automatic Beep Gap ON Character
The Automatic Beep Gap ON Character, 56, causes the message handler to
place a gap between each beep. The duration of the gap depends on that last
gap that was encountered. It defaults to 10mS upon a cold start.

4-22

Messages

Automatic Beep Gap OFF Character
The Automatic Beep Gap OFF Character, 55, causes the message handler to
send the beeps that follow in a series without any gaps between them.

Defaults
Upon a cold start, the following defaults will be forced:
•
•
•

Beep duration = 60mS
Beep gap duration = 10mS
Automatic beep gap = OFF

Single Tone Page Messages
Control Character
The control character 9920 must be entered before the actual page code when
building a Single-Tone Page Message. If several single-tone pages are to be
sent, control character 9920 must exist before each page code.

Format
The format for single-tone page message is as follows:
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the control character 9920.
Enter four digits representing the frequency of the page tone, taken from
the Tone Code Table on page A-20.
Enter two digits representing the duration of the page tone in tenths of
seconds.
The range of duration is 0.1 to 9.9 seconds.
You may end the message with the (*) character, or enter another control
character (99xx) and continue with another message type.

For example, the format of a single-tone page of 1050Hz of 8.0 seconds
(National Weather Service standard page) is 9920095280.

Delays
A 1-second Pre-Page Delay is created by the message handler for the first page
in a group. If additional pages follow, the pre-page delay is eliminated in
succeeding pages. A 3- second Post-Page Delay is created by the message
handler for all single-tone pages.

4-23

7K • Chapter 4

Two-Tone Sequential Page Messages
Control Character
the control character 9930 must be entered before the actual page code when
building a Two-Tone Sequential Page Message. If several two-tone pages are
to be sent, the control character 9930 must exist before each two-tone page
code.

Format
The format for two-tone sequential page messages is as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the control character 9930.
Enter four digits representing the frequency of the first tone, taken from the
Tone Code Table on page A-20.
Enter two digits representing the duration of the first tone in tenths of
seconds. The range of duration is 0.1 to 9.9 seconds.
Enter four digits representing the frequency of the second tone, taken from
the Tone Code Table.
Enter two digits representing the duration of the second tone in tenths of
seconds.
The range of duration is 0.1 to 9.9 seconds.
You may end the message with the (*) character, or enter another control
character (99xx) and continue with another message type.

For example, the format of a two-tone sequential page of 349.0Hz for 1.0
seconds followed by 433.7Hz for 3.0 seconds is 9930286510230630.

Delays
A 1-second pre-page delay is created by the message handler for the first page
in a group. If additional pages follow, the pre-page delay is eliminated in
succeeding pages. A 1.3- second post-page delay is created by the message
handler for all two-tone sequential pages.

4-24

Messages

Five/Six-Tone Page Messages
Control Character
The control character 9940 must be entered before the actual page code when
building a 5/6-Tone Page Message. If several 5/6-tone pages are to be sent,
control character 9940 must exist before each 5/6-tone page code.

Format
The format for five/six-tone page messages is as follows:
•
•
•
•

Enter the control character, 9940.
Enter the preamble digit (0–9), followed by the five digits (0–9), followed by
1 if you wish to send the X (dual address) tone, or 0 if you do not wish to
send the X tone.
You may end the message with the (*) character.
If you wish to enter another control character (99xx) and continue with
another message type, you must add another digit to the end of the 5/6tone page. This is required because the normal format results in an odd
number of characters (11), and the message handler requires even
numbers of characters in each message.

For example, the format of the 5/6-tone page 1-13657X is 99401136571. If no
X tone is desired, the format is 99401136570. If this page were to be sent twice
in the same message, a bogus digit would be added at the end of the first page
to restore evenness to the command. The format would be 99401136571 0
99401136571. (Once again, the space is shown for clarity.)
Note: The message handler always requires a preamble digit. It will
automatically substitute the R tone for a repeated digit.

Delays
A 1-second Pre-Page Delay is created by the message handler for the first
page in a group. If additional pages follow, the pre-page delay is eliminated in
succeeding page. A 1- second Post-Page Delay is created by the message
handler for all 5/6-tone pages.

4-25

7K • Chapter 4

DTMF Page Messages
Control Character
The control character 9950 should be entered before the actual DTMF
character codes when building a DTMF Page Message. (Remember, if a
Message does not begin with a control character, the message handler will
assume the message should be sent in CW!)

Format
The format for DTMF page message is as follows:
•
•
•

Enter the control character 9950.
Then enter the various DTMF character codes described in the DTMF
Character Set Tables beginning on page A-8 to create the desired
message/page.
You may end the DTMF message with the (*) character, or enter another
control character (99xx) and continue with another page type.

Delays
A 1-second Pre-Page Delay is created by the message handler for the first
page in a group. if additional pages follow, the pre-page delay is eliminated in
succeeding pages. A 1- second Post-Page Delay is created by the message
handler for all DTMF pages. If desired, a DTMF page can consist of several
DTMF digits, a pause, more DTMF digits, and so on. This feature allows you to
place a series of DTMF pages within one message.

Defaults
Until changed by the codes which follow, the DTMF tone duration is 100mS
and the gap between DTMF characters is 100mS.

4-26

Messages

DTMF Characters
There are 16 DTMF Characters: numerals 0 through 9, letters A through D, and
the symbols (*) and (#). Each character has a two-digit code, shown in the
DTMF Characters Table which follows (reprinted on page A-8). Enter the
appropriate two-digit code for each DTMF character that you wish to send.
The following table shows DTMF Characters and their related control
characters (codes):

DTMF Characters
Control Character 9950

DTMF Character

Code

DTMF Character

Code

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

8
9
A
B
C
D
*
#

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

DTMF Duration Change Characters
DTMF Duration Change Characters are used to set the duration of the DTMF
characters that follow. Ten (10) DTMF duration change characters have been
defined from 30mS to 200mS using the codes 20–29. The DTMF Duration may
be changed as often as desired within a DTMF message. This parameter is not
changed at the end of the DTMF message.
The following table shows DTMF Duration Change Characters:

DTMF Duration Change Characters
Control Character 9950

DTMF Duration Change

Code

30mS
40mS
50mS
60mS
70mS
80mS
90mS
100mS
150mS
200mS

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

4-27

7K • Chapter 4

DTMF Custom Duration Change Characters
The easiest way to change the duration of the DTMF characters is to use the 2digit codes mentioned above. However, you may require other durations, so the
controller allows you to choose a Custom DTMF Duration Change. This
parameter may be set from 10mS to 9900mS (9.9seconds).
•
•

Use the code “50xx,” where xx is a number from 01 to 99, to get durations
from 10mS to 990mS.
Use the code “51xx,” where xx is a number from 01 to 99 to get durations
from 100mS to 9900mS.

Once you change the duration, it will stay at the new value indefinitely, or until
changed again by another code.

DTMF Gap Change Characters
Every DTMF character sent by the controller is followed by a DTMF Gap, or
silent period. You may wish to change the duration of the DTMF characters
from the default duration of 100mS. Ten of the most common durations are
shown in the DTMF Gap Change Characters Table. If you wish to change the
gap to one of the values shown, enter the two-digit code corresponding to your
choice. If the gap you want is not in the table, go to the custom DTMF gap
change description immediately below. Once you change the duration, it will
stay at the new value indefinitely, or until changed again by another code.
The following table shows DTMF Gap Change Characters:

DTMF Gap Change Characters
Control Character 9950

DTMF Gap Change

Code

20mS
30mS
40mS
50mS
60mS
70mS
80mS
90mS
100mS
150mS

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

DTMF Custom Gap Change Characters
The easiest way to change the duration of the gap is to use the 2-digit codes
mentioned above. However, you may require other gap durations, so the
controller allows you to choose a Custom DTMF Gap Change. Duration of the
gap may be set from 10mS to 9900mS (9.9seconds).
•

4-28

Use the code “52xx,” where xx is a number from 01 to 99, to get durations
from 10mS to 990mS.

Messages
•

Use the code “53xx,” where xx is a number from 01 to 99 to get durations
from 100mS to 9900mS.

Once you change the DTMF gap, it will stay at the new value indefinitely, or
until changed again by another code.
Note: If you intend to program a large number of DTMF pages with varying
tone durations and, it would be a good idea to set up the proper duration
values at the beginning of each individual page. Otherwise, the old values from
the previous page will be used for the new page.

DTMF Pause Characters
Unlike a DTMF gap, which is automatically sent after each DTMF character, a
DTMF Pause Character may be inserted anywhere in a DTMF page. These
pauses are typically used to separate individual pages within a multi-page
message. Ten common pause durations are shown in the DTMF Pause
Characters Table. If you wish to insert a pause into a page, enter the two-digit
code corresponding to your choice.
If the DTMF Pause you want is not in the table, go to the custom DTMF pause
description below.
The following table shows DTMF Pause Characters:

DTMF Pause Characters
Control Character 9950

DTMF Pause

Code

100mS
200mS
300mS
400mS
500mS
600mS
700mS
800mS
900mS
1000mS

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49

DTMF Custom Pause Characters
The easiest way to insert a pause is to use the 2-digit codes mentioned above.
However, you may require other pauses, so the controller allows you to choose
a Custom DTMF Pause. Duration may be set from 10mS to 9900mS
(9.9seconds).
•

Use the code “54xx,” where xx is a number from 01 to 99, to get durations
from 10mS to 990mS.

4-29

7K • Chapter 4
•

Use the code “55xx,” where xx is a number from 01 to 99 to get durations
from 100mS to 9900mS.

Note: Since each DTMF character is followed by a DTMF gap, be sure to add
the DTMF gap duration to the DTMF pause duration if you want an accurate
idea of the time between two DTMF pages.
Pauses are additive. A long pause may be created by placing a series of
pauses together within the DTMF page.

DTMF Custom Changes (Duration • Gap • Pause)
The following table shows DTMF Custom Changes affecting duration, gap, and
pause. it is generally related to preceding sections.

DTMF Custom Changes (Duration Gap
Pause)
Control Character 9950

DTMF Custom Change

Code

Data Digit

custom DTMF duration change (10990mS)
custom DTMF duration change (1009900mS)
custom DTMF gap change (10990mS)
custom DTMF gap change (1009900mS)
custom DTMF pause (10990mS)
custom DTMF pause (1009900mS)
to ignore each custom DTMF change code

50xx
51xx
52xx
53xx
54xx
55xx

0199 x 10mS
0199 x 100mS
0199 x 10mS
0199 x 100mS
0199 x 10mS
0199 x 100mS
enter 00 for xx in any of
above codes

DTMF-Related Notes
The DTMF decoder is turned OFF during DTMF pages to prevent the page
from being acted on by the controller. Since the DTMF encoder is shared
between the DTMF paging function and the DTMF autopatch function, there
may be a delay in paging while a number is dialed (or vice versa).

4-30

Messages

DTMF Character Set Tables Explained
The preceding section is somewhat complicated. Therefore, in an effort to
clarify some of the main points, the following explanation is given.
Format. The page begins with a 1.0-second delay, unless it was preceded with
a page. Then the delay is 50mS. When the page is finished, a 1.0-second post
delay occurs. If desired, a DTMF page can consist of several DTMF digits, a
pause, some more digits, a pause, and so on. This allows a series of pages all
contained in one message.
Defaults. Until changed by one of the above codes, the DTMF digit duration is
100mS and the gap between digits is 100mS. Once a DTMF duration change
or a DTMF gap change is made, it remains in effect indefinitely, until changed
by another code. If the user expects to require DTMF pages of varying
durations and gaps, it would be wise to set up the proper DTMF duration
change and DTMF gap change codes at the beginning of each page.
DTMF Custom Changes. DTMF Custom Changes allow the user to choose
durations, gaps, and pauses which are not listed in the various tables above.
These DTMF Custom Changes are found in their own table labeled “DTMF
Custom Changes (Duration • Gap • Pause)” on page 4-30 and are reprinted on
page A-10. The advantages in using codes from the regular tables (not the
DTMF Custom Changes Table) is that such codes require only two keystrokes.
DTMF Custom changes are more flexible, but require four keystrokes. If 00 is
entered for xx, the DTMF custom change will be ignored.
DTMF Pauses. Pauses are additive. Therefore, a series of DTMF Pause
Characters adds to the total DTMF pause. Since the DTMF encoder is shared
with the autopatch, there may be a short delay in either the DTMF page or the
autopatch dialing if both are asked to generate DTMF digits at the same time.
Each DTMF digit is always followed by a DTMF Gap. Therefore, the duration
of a DTMF Gap Change Character adds to the duration of a DTMF Pause
Character when calculating the delay between the last digit of one page and
the first digit of the next page.

Examples
To generate a simple page of the DTMF characters “1, 2, 3, A, B, C” at the
default durations of 100mS and the default DTMF gap of 100mS, you would
enter this:
(PW) 15 9950 01 02 03 10 11 12 *

To send the same characters, but with a duration of 50mS and a gap width of
50mS, you would enter this:
(PW) 15 9950 22 33 01 02 03 10 11 12 *

4-31

7K • Chapter 4
You can change the durations and gaps anywhere in the message. Here is a
page with 1, 2, 3 sent at 50mS/50mS and A, B, C sent at 150mS/100mS with a
1-second pause between the two pages:
(PW) 15 9950 22 33 01 02 03 49 28 38 10 11 12 *

Note: The digit duration will now be at 150mS, and the gap will now be at
100mS, since those are the last parameters which were used.
You can use DTMF custom duration change characters and DTMF custom gap
characters if you have special requirements. In this example, we will generate
two pages. The first will be “1, 2, 3” at 160mS/110mS. Then we’ll have a 5second pause, followed by “A, B, C” at 300mS/120mS
(PW) 15 9950 5016 5211 01 02 03 5550 5030 5212 10 11 12 *

Here’s the explanation: 9950 = control character to generate a DTMF Page;
5016 = DTMF custom duration change, 16 x 10mS = 160mS; 5211 = DTMF
custom gap change, 11 x 10mS = 110mS; 5550 = DTMFcustom pause change,
10 x 100 mS = 5 seconds; 5030 = DTMF custom duration change, 30 x 10mS
= 300mS; and 5212 = DTMF custom gap change, 12 x 10mS = 120mS.

4-32

Messages

Synthesized Speech Messages
Control Character
The control character 9960 must be entered before the actual speech word
codes when building a synthesized speech message.

Format
The format for Synthesized Speech Messages is as follows:
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the control character 9960.
Then enter the various speech word codes described in the Synthesized
Speech Vocabulary Tables beginning on page A-11 to create the desired
message.
Each word is represented by a four-digit code.
When building a synthesized speech message, be sure to use all four digits
of the code (do not omit leading zeroes).
You may end the synthesized speech message with the (*) character, or
enter another control character (99xx) and continue with another message
type.

Delay Character
A special Pre-Message Delay Character, 0000, can be programmed after the
control character 9960 but before the word characters. The 0000 causes the
message handler to pause for 1 second before sending the synthesized
speech message. Any additional 0000s found after the first one will be ignored.
If the synthesized speech message was preceded by any other message, the
0000 will be ignored.

Pause Character
The Pause Character should be used to separate word groups in a synthesized
speech message. This character is shown in the vocabulary as (pause).

Timeout Timer
When a synthesized speech message is encountered by the message handler,
the message handler attempts to communicate with the speech synthesis
module and starts a 5-second Timeout Timer. If the module is disconnected or
inoperative, the message handler will disregard the message after the timer
expires.

Synthesized Speech Vocabulary
Synthesized speech messages utilize the Synthesized Speech Vocabulary
Tables beginning on page A-11. There are tables for male and female voice, as
well as sound effects.

Tone Codes
When entering tone frequencies for CW, beep, or paging messages, a Tone
Code is required. Tone Codes are 4-digit numbers representing the period of

4-33

7K • Chapter 4
the tone sine wave in microseconds. Tone codes may be either taken from the
Tone Code Table or calculated.

Tone Code Table Explained
The Tone Code Table was created to simplify your programming efforts by
listing frequencies from 100Hz to 3KHz (in 5Hz increments), and the
appropriate tone code for each frequency. The complete Tone Code Table
begins on page A-20 and look similar to this:

Tone Code Table (continued)
All Frequencies in Hz

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

100
105
110
115
120

9999
9523
9090
8695
8333

225
230
235
240
245

4444
4347
4255
4166
4081

350
355
360
365
370

2857
2816
2777
2739
2702

475
480
485
490
495

2105
2083
2061
2040
2020

600
605
610
615
620

1666
1652
1639
1626
1612

Note: Most radio systems have a response of 300Hz to 3KHz, and will not pass
tone frequencies outside this range.

Calculating Tone Codes
If you wish to program a tone frequency that is not listed in the Tone Code
Table, you will need to calculate its tone code. (This is particularly true of
paging tones, which are specified to tenths of Hertz.) To assist you in
calculating your tone codes, the following explanation is offered.
To determine your tone code, simply take the reciprocal of the tone frequency.
It is easily done on a calculator:
•
•
•

Enter 1,000,000, then divide this number by the tone frequency in Hertz.
The quotient, rounded off to a 4-digit whole number, is the tone code.
If the result is 999 or less, you must insert a leading zero.

Here are some examples:
•
•
•

4-34

The tone frequency is 1200Hz. What is the tone code? Dividing 1,000,000
by 1200 yields 833.3, so the tone code is 0833.
The tone frequency of a single-tone page is 1050Hz.What is the tone code?
Dividing 1,000,000 by 1050 yields 952.4, so the tone code is 0952.
The tone frequency is 398.1Hz. What is the tone code? Dividing 1,000,000
by 398.1 yields 2511.9, so the tone code is 2512.

Messages

Run-Time Variables
Run-Time Variables (RTV) are small code groups which you place into a
message to be expanded at “run time” (the instant the message is actually
transmitted by the controller). The message handler recognizes run-time
variables because they always begin with 98.
When the message handler encounters an RTV, it forms the appropriate
message and transmits it in place of the RTV code. You could, for example,
announce the time or date as part of an ID, autopatch termination, or other
occasion. You may precede and/or follow the RTV with other messages,
routing codes, and so on. RTVs may be placed in succession to form a single
expression.

Run-Time Variables
Run-Time Variable

Meaning

9810
9811
9812
9813
9814
9815
9816
9820
9821
9822
9823
9824

hour & minute, 12-hr format, CW
AM/PM, CW
hour & minute, 24-hr format, CW
day of week, CW
month, CW
day of Month, CW
Seconds, CW
hour & minute, 12-hr format, male
AM/PM, male voice
hour & minute, 12-hr format, female
AM/PM, female voice
hour & minute, 24-hr format, male

9825
9826
9827
9828
9829
9830
9831
9832
9896
9897
9898
9899

Example

2 45
PM
14 45
WED
JAN
1
27 in CW
two forty-five (male)
PM (male)
two forty-five (female)
PM (female)
14 hours, 45 minutes
(male)
same as 9824 without “hours” & “minutes”
fourteen forty-five (male)
day of week, male voice
Wednesday (male)
cardinal day-of-month, male voice
one (male)
ordinal day-of-month, male voice
first (male)
month, male voice
January (male)
“good morning/good afternoon/good evening” good afternoon (female)
(female voice)
“morning/afternoon/evening”
afternoon (male)
Seconds, male voice
Twenty-seven (male)
Call Count, CW
105
Call Count, male voice
One zero five (male)
Software Version, CW
203
Software Version, male voice
Two point zero three
(male)

4-35

7K • Chapter 4
A feature of the clock and calendar RTVs is that the current time and date are
read and stored at the first RTV encountered in a message. If the time or date
“rolls over” during the message transmission, it will not affect the time or date
being sent.
RTV Notes
• 9820 and 9822, which are spoken 12-hour time RTVs, will say “o’clock” on
the hour (xx:00). Midnight to 11:59 = A.M.
• 9827 is used with the month outside the U.S., as in this example: “One
January.” 9828 is used with the month inside the U.S., as in this example:
“January First.”
• 9830 and 9831 switch from “afternoon” to “evening” at 6:00 PM
• The real-time clock and calendar features leap-year correction.
• 9816 and 9832, seconds in CW or speech, can be used to accurately set
the clock. (See Chapter 8, Clock and Calendar.)
Note: The voiced run-time variables require that your controller be fitted with a
speech synthesis module.
Here are some ideas: To send the time and AM or PM in voice, enter
(PW) 15 9820 9821 *

You would hear “two forty-five PM” or something similar.
To say “the time is ( ),” enter
(PW) 15 9960 0500 0514 0253 9820 9821 *

9960 is the control character for synthesized speech.
To say the software version, enter:
(PW) 15 9899 *

You can create similar commands to send “today is ( ),” “the date is ( ),” and so
on. Dumping the autopatch could announce “call complete at ( ).” The ID could
include “it is (Monday) (morning) on W0XYZ repeater.”
Note: It is not necessary to place the control code 9900 in front of CW run-time
variables or the control code 9960 in front of voiced run-time variables. The
RTV automatically inserts these control codes into the message. However, you
must enter control codes after the RTV if you have a different type of message
to follow

4-36

Messages

Select Programmable Messages
Selects or changes the various messages sent by the controller.
•
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the password, followed by the 4-digit root number shown, followed by
the desired message.
Any message may have any combination of message types, including CW,
beeps, page tones, etc.
The maximum size of any message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes).
You must count the control character. Therefore, any message could have
46 CW characters, 23 synthesized speech words, and so on.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*) (do not enter any message).
See the Select Initial and Normal ID Tail Message commands on page 12-8
for other programmable messages.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Courtesy Message
Select Dropout Message
Select Pre-Timeout Message
Select Post-Timeout Message
Select Initial ID Message for TX1
Select Initial ID Message for TX2
Select Normal ID Message for TX1
Select Normal ID Message for TX2
Select Autopatch Dialing Message
Select Autopatch Timeout Warning Message
Select Phone Line Answer Message
Select Reverse Patch Ringout Message

(PW) 31 10 (message) *
(PW) 31 13 (message) *
(PW) 31 16 (message) *
(PW) 31 19 (message) *
(PW) 31 30 (message) *
(PW) 31 33 (message) *
(PW) 31 31 (message) *
(PW) 31 34 (message) *
(PW) 31 40 (message) *
(PW) 31 41 (message) *
(PW) 31 50 (message) *
(PW) 31 51 (message) *

Note: Since the default routing is to transmitter #1, no routing character is
needed for either TX1 ID. However, you must enter a routing character when
programming IDs for TX2, or the message will go to TX1 instead.
Acknowledgment: Sends OK

4-37

7K • Chapter 4

Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

too many digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition:
Command

Default Condition

60mS 440Hz beep (9910 74 09)
(deleted)
TO (CW)
TO (CW)
ID (CW)
9983 ID (CW letters with TX2 routing)
ID (CW)
9983 ID (CW letters with TX2 routing)
AS (CW wait)
AR (CW end-of-message)
3 beeps (9910 585076 09 2133)
55 (CW)

Examples:
Let's change the normal ID message to W0XYZ/R in CW. It is a good idea to
preface any CW message with the CW control character, 9900. Now, looking
up W0XYZ/R in the CW Character Set Tables beginning on page A-2, we find:
32 00 33 34 35 38 27.

The entire command to change the normal ID message looks like this:
(PW) 31 31 9900 32 00 33 34 35 38 27 *

may be entered in a continuous string of digits as follows:
(PW) 3131990032003334353827 *

Let's program a longer callsign into the initial ID message, using DE W9XYZ/R
CGO (Chicago) in CW as the message. The command looks like this:
(PW) 31 30 9900 13 14 40 32 09 33 34 35 38 27 40 12 16 24 *

Note: Wordspace character, 40, has been used twice. This separates the DE
from the W9XYZ/R, and separates the W9XYZ/R from CGO.

4-38

Messages
Let's now change the courtesy message to a burst of 2 beeps. We want the
two beeps to be 25 and 21, we want them each to be 40mS in duration, and we
want no gap between them.
Looking up this information in the Beep Character Set Tables beginning on
page A-5, we find: 55 turns the automatic beep gap OFF; 73 changes the beep
duration to 40mS; the control character for a beep message is 9910.
Therefore, the complete command to change the courtesy message looks like:
(PW) 31 10 9910 55 73 25 21 *

4-39

7K • Chapter 4

Review Programmable Messages
Plays back the various messages that have been programmed into
the controller.
•
•
•

Enter the password, followed by the 4-digit root number shown.
The controller will send the appropriate message for your examination.
If you wish to change the message, see the Select Programmable
Messages command on page 4-35.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Review Courtesy Message
Review Dropout Message
Review Pre-Timeout Message
Review Post-Timeout Message
Review Initial ID Message for TX1
Review Initial ID Message for TX2
Review Normal ID Message for TX1
Review Normal ID Message for TX2
Review Autopatch Dialing Message
Review Autopatch Timeout Warning Message
Review Phone Line Answer Message
Review Reverse Patch Ringout Message

(PW) 34 10 *
(PW) 34 13 *
(PW) 34 16 *
(PW) 34 19 *
(PW) 34 30 *
(PW) 34 33 *
(PW) 34 31 *
(PW) 34 34 *
(PW) 34 40 *
(PW) 34 41 *
(PW) 34 50 *
(PW) 34 51 *

Acknowledgment: Sends the appropriate message
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default: None

4-40

Messages

Select/Review/Play User Messages
Selects, changes, or reviews general purpose user-defined
messages.
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the password, followed by the 4-digit root number shown, followed by
the desired message.
Any message may have any combination of message types, including CW,
beeps, page tones, speech, etc.
The maximum size of any message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes).
You must count the control character. Therefore, any message could have
46 CW characters, 23 synthesized speech words, etc.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*) (do not enter any message).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select User Message #1

(PW) 31 70 (message) *

Select User Message #2

(PW) 31 71 (message) *

Select User Message #3

(PW) 31 72 (message) *

Select User Message #4

(PW) 31 73 (message) *

Review/Play User Message #1

(PW) 34 70 *

Review/Play User Message #2

(PW) 34 71 *

Review/Play User Message #3

(PW) 34 72 *

Review/Play User Message #4

(PW) 34 73 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No message.

4-41

7K • Chapter 4

Send Message
Sends a message when commanded.
Unlike the various Select Programmable Messages commands on page 4-35,
this command does not store the message in memory. It has two purposes:
•
•

You can experiment with different messages types by entering this
command and listening for the results.
You can place this command into a macro so that a message is sent when
the macro is executed.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Send Message

(PW) 15 (message) *

Acknowledgment: Sends the message
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

too many digits entered

Default: None
Examples:
Let's send some CW characters, some beep characters, then some CW
characters again. The CW characters will be A, B, and C; the beeps will be 25
through 30 at 80mS durations with 20mS gaps between them; and the final CW
characters will be 1, 2, and 30 WPM and 1000Hz frequency.
Looking up the CW Alphanumeric Characters Table beginning on page A-2, we
see that the control character is 9900; A, B, and C are 10 11 12 respectively.
Looking up the Beep Character Set Tablesbeginning on page A-5, we see that
the control character is 9910;
•

To get 80mS beep durations, we must enter 75 (from the Beep Duration
Change Characters Table)

•

To get 20mS gaps we must enter 56 to turn the automatic beep gaps ON
(from the Beep Parameters (General) Table), and 61 to get 20mS beep
gaps (from the Beep Gap Change Characters Table).

Going to the CW Frequency and Speed Changes Table on page A-4, we see
that the control character is 9900 again. To get 30 WPM we must enter:
68

4-42

Messages
To get 1000Hz frequency, we must enter:
591000; and 1, 2, 3 is 01 02 03.

Therefore, our complete command to send this message is:
(PW) 15990010111299107556612526272829309900659100 0010203*

You may never have a need for a message like this, but this example shows
the flexibility available in the controller.

4-43

7K • Chapter 4

Select/Review Command Response Messages
Selects, changes, or reviews command response messages that
are sent when command responses are enabled.
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the password, followed by the 4-digit root number shown, followed by
the desired message.
Any message may have any combination of message types, including CW,
beeps, page tones, speech, etc.
The maximum size of any message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes).
You must count the control character. Therefore, any message could have
46 CW characters, 23 synthesized speech words, etc.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*) (do not enter any message).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Select OK Command Response Message

(PW) 31 01 (message) *

OK in CW

Select Error 1 Command Response
Message

(PW) 31 02 (message) *

?ERR1 in CW

Select Error 2 Command Response
Message

(PW) 31 03 (message) *

?ERR2 in CW

Review OK Command Response Message

(PW) 34 01 *

none

Review Error 1 Command Response
Message

(PW) 34 02 *

none

Review Error 1 Command Response
Message

(PW) 34 03 *

none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: See default column of table.

4-44

Messages

Select/Review Programmable Messages
Selects, changes, or reviews programmable messages.
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the password, followed by the 4-digit root number shown, followed by
the desired message.
Any message may have any combination of message types, including CW,
beeps, page tones, speech, etc.
The maximum size of any message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes).
You must count the control character. Therefore, any message could have
46 CW characters, 23 synthesized speech words, etc.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*) (do not enter any message).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Select Warm Reset Message

(PW) 31 00 (message) *

?RES in CW

Review Warm Reset Message

(PW) 34 00 *

none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: See default column of table.

4-45

7K • Chapter 4

4-46

Security

Chapter 5

Security
One of the Security features used by the computer is a dual-password system.
There are two levels of command priviledges.
•
•

The operators holding the Master Password are the higher level group,
since the master password may be used with all control commands.
The operators holding the Control Operator Password are the lower level
group, since their password only works with certain owner-designated
control commands.

You may select the commands that are available to the control operators,
which range from none to all commands.
•
•

The master password and the control operator password may be 2, 4, or 6
digits long.
The passwords may contain the numbers 0-9, and the lettered keys A, B, C,
and D.

To enhance security at your site, you can disable the Front Panel Display.

5-1

7K • Chapter 5

Assign Control Operator Password
Assigns a new password for control operators.
•
•
•
•

The new Control Operator Password may be 2, 4, or 6 digits in length.
The new Control Operator Password may be any combination of the
numbers 0-9 and the letters A-D.
Autopatch passwords are explained in the Autopatch section on page 7-2.
Remote base passwords are explained in the Remote Base Interface
section on page 21-1.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Control Operator Password

(PW) 92 (new control operator password) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: No Control Operator Password is assigned
Examples:
Assume there there is no control operator password, the default condition. To
assign it to 95, enter this:
(PW) 92 95 *
"(PW)" must be the master password, since no control operator password
exists.
If the master password is 2A3B4C, enter this:
2A3B4C 92 95 *

5-2

Security

Assign Master Password
Assigns a new master password.
•
•
•
•

The new Master Password may be 2, 4, or 6 digits in length.
The new Master Password may be any combination of the numbers 0-9 and
the letters A-D.
Autopatch passwords are explained in the Autopatch section on page 7-2.
Remote base passwords are explained in the Remote Base Interface
section on page 21-1.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Master Password

(PW) 93 (new master password) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: Master Password defaults to 99
Examples:
Assume that the present master password is 99, the default password. To
change it to 1234, enter this:
99 93 1234 *
The new password is 1234 at this time. To change it to 2A3B4C, enter this:
1234 93 2A3B4C *

5-3

7K • Chapter 5

Assign Control Operator Privilege Level
Limits access of control operators to the repeater functions by
assigning privilege levels to control commands.
•
•
•

Enter the root number of the command for which a privilege level change is
desired, then enter a 0 or 1 for the privilege level.
0 = control command may be used by either the master or the control
operator password.
1 = control command may be used only by the master password.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Assign Control Operator Privilege Level

(PW) 94 (command
root number) x*

0 = used by either
password
1 = used by only
master password

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: All commands may be used by either password.
Example:
Assume the control operators have full priviledges, the default condition. To
prevent control operators from changing either the master password or the
control operator password, enter this:
(PW) 94 92 1 *
(PW) 94 93 1 *
Root 92 is the Assign Control Operator Password command on page 5-2.
Root 93 is the Assign Master Password command on page 5-3.

Note: If you want to prevent a control operator from accessing more than one
root code in a row, use the Assign Control Operator Privilege Level to a Range
of Commands command (see page 5-5.)

5-4

Security

Assign Control Operator Privilege Level to a
Range of Commands
Changes the Control Operator Privilege on a range of
commands.
•
•
•

Enter the first and last root number of the command for which a privilege
level change is desired, then enter a 0 or 1 for the privilege level.
0 = control command may be used by either the master or the control
operator password.
1 = control command may be used only by the master password.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Assign Control Operator Privilege Level to a
Range of Commands

(PW) 94 (first root
number) (last root
number) x*

0 = used by either
password
1 = used by only
master password

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: All commands may be used by either password.
Example:
Assume that you want to reset all privilege level entries for use by both
passwords, enter the following:
(PW) 94 00 99 0 *
Assume that you want to prevent control operators from changing passwords
or a privilege level enter the following:
(PW) 94 92 94 1 *

Note: If you want to prevent a control operator from accessing a single root
code use the Assign Control Operator Privilege Level command (see page
5-4.)

5-5

7K • Chapter 5

Enable/Disable Front Panel Display
Controls the Front Panel Display.
•
•
•
•

By default the Front Panel Display is enabled.
The Front Panel Display may be disabled to improve site security.
The Power LED is always on.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Front Panel Display

(PW) 63 99 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Front Panel Display is enabled.

5-6

Macros

Chapter 6

Macros
One of the most powerful features of your controller is its ability to store and
recall strings of commands in memory areas. These strings of commands are
called Macros. The names of the macros, and their contents, are fully
programmable. The default condition of the controller is empty; no macros exist
until you create them.
There are many advantages in using macros instead of the full programming
commands, including:
•
•

•
•

Time Savings. Often-used or long commands can be stored in macros,
then executed by entering just the Macro Names.
Fewer Errors. There is a much smaller likelihood of making an error when
entering a short macro name instead of a long series of digits. Mobile and
portable operators will appreciate the need to enter just a few digits to place
an autopatch call to an often- dialed number.
Better Security. Create a library of macros for your users and restrict the
actual programming passwords to yourself and a few control operators. If a
macro becomes abused, rename or delete it.
Better Control. Your controller can execute macros from Logic Inputs or
certain events, giving you more control over your system.

Quantity of Macros
Your controller supports a total of 280 macros. If you use, for example, 220
macros for autopatch autodial commands, you will still have 60 macros
available for your user library.

Size of Macros
Each macro may contain a maximum of 100 digits (keystrokes). Therefore, a
macro may contain a single command of 100 digits, or more commands of
fewer digits. The macro loses two digits each time you store (append) an
additional command, and it loses one more if the appended command has an
odd number of digits. Thus, a macro can’t contain a single command of 100

6-1

7K • Chapter 6
digits, or two commands totalling 98 digits, or three commands totalling 96, and
so forth.
If the amount of memory remaining in a macro is insufficient to store a desired
command, there may still be enough room to store the name of another macro.
“Chaining” another macro to the original macro expands the storage capacity
by another 100 digits.
Note: Commands must reside completely within a macro. You may not store
part of a command in a macro and continue it in another macro.

Names of Macros
You name the macro when you create it. Creating a macro causes the
controller to put the macro name in a directory so it can find the macro at
execution time. A macro can be renamed, since the controller can easily
replace the old macro name in the directory with a new one. A macro can be
deleted, since the controller can erase the name in the directory.
You can give a macro any name that is 1, 2, 3, or 4 characters in length and
does not contain a (*) or (#). Thus, you may use the characters 0 through 9 and
the lettered keys (A, B, C, and D). Names you could use included “7,” “123,”
“1234,” “3AC6,” and so on.
If the Macro Name has leading zeros, they will be ignored by the controller. For
example, the following macro names will all refer to the same macro: 5, 05,
005, 0005. You may execute the macro by entering any of these names. When
you chain a macro to another macro, you may enter the macro name into the
original macro by skipping the leading zeros.
Note: It is important to know that many of the programming commands in this
manual require a macro name to be entered in 4 digits, because the 4 digits act
as placeholders. You must use leading zeros if necessary, since skipping them
will cause the command to have the wrong format. Therefore, when creating a
new macro, or using any of the other commands that specify a 4-digit macro
name, enter leading zeros if the name has fewer than 4 digits.

Contents of Macros
You may store any sequence of digits into a macro except for the (*) and (#).
The (*) is entered last, to terminate the command and indicate the end of the
data to be stored. Since the (*) and (#) cannot occur in the data being stored,
you must store one command at a time. Store the first command in a macro
when you create it, and store any additional commands using the Append To
Macro command on page 6-7.
A macro, then, can store programming commands, other macro names, or
both. You can create Master Macros which contain the names of other macros,

6-2

Macros
and by simply entering the name of the master macro, you will cause all of
them to be executed.

Sequence of Execution
When a macro is executed, the commands (or other macro names) stored in
that macro are executed in the order they were stored. For example, assume
that a certain macro contains a programming command, then a macro name,
then another programming command. When this macro is executed, the first
programming command will be executed first. Then, the “imbedded” macro will
be fully executed. (This means that if the imbedded macro contains other
commands and other macros, they will all be executed before the remaining
items in the imbedded macro are executed.) Finally, the last programmming
command in the macro will be executed. Your controller has the ability to
queue up to 40 commands or macros at one time.

Cautions
Do not create a loop by creating a macro that calls its own name. Likewise, do
not create a series of macros that will eventually loop back and call the
originating macro. For example, don’t create a macro named 65, which calls
macro 66, which calls macro 67, which calls 65. The result will be a locked up
system that will require you enter 40 commands by hand to reinitialize itself, or
a trip to the site to do a warm start.
Note:The controller does not check the validity of the data stored in macros; it
simply stores whatever data you specify. If you create errors in the data you
store in macros, or if you change a command password after commands using
the password are stored in macros, the macros will not execute properly.

Applications of Macros
You can exucute a macro by entering its name, followed by the (*). You can
skip the (*) if you have turned ON the command execution on carrier drop
feature using the Enable/ Disable End-of-Transmission Command Execution
commands (page 16-6). You can instruct the controller to automatically execute
macros based on hardware or software. There are many of these EventTriggered Macros described throughout the manual. (Examples can be found
on pages 7-10, 16-2, and 16-4.)
If you create a macro that contains the autopatch sequence, the macro
becomes an Autodial Code. you can personalize the autodial by having it
identify the call with a message. here’s how its done.
•
•

Create a macro, using the desired macro name, the autopatch access
password, and the telephone number.
Append a command to the macro, using the same macro name, that sends
the message: (PW) 15 (your message) *

6-3

7K • Chapter 6
Whenever the macro name is entered, the controller will dial the telephone
number and announce the call as you programmed it. Autodials are great for
club members who often call family or friends.
Emergency autodials can also be created.
•
•

Start the macro with commands to Reset The Autopatch Timeout Timer
(page 7-16), and perhaps enable the CTCSS encoder (for remote tape
recorders). (See page 10-2.)
Reverse these commands using the Select Autopatch Dump-Triggered
Macro command on page 7-10.

Some groups use the autopatch only for emergency calls. In that case,
publicize the macros that dial emergency services. Keep the autopatch access
password concealed so that only macros can be used to access the autopatch.
Since macros can store any commands, not just autopatch commands, you
can create macros which change the personality of the repeater. An
Emergency Status Macro might change the ID and tail messages, and the
autopatch timeout timer; a Normal Status Macro could change these
parameters back to the usual settings.
A macro can be created to announce the beginning of a net by sending a tone
page and a speech synthesized message. Enter another macro to announce
the club meeting as part of the ID message a week before the meeting occurs.
(Long strings of digits are unnecessary each time if you program the macros
beforehand.)
A library of macros can be created to serve your club members. Some quick
examples might include:
•
•
•
•
•

6-4

Send the time or date.
Generate DTMF pages to activate selective call decoders (and the new
handhelds that have built-in DTMF decoders).
Redial the autopatch or extend its timeout timer.
Reset the repeater timeout timer.
Pulse a tape cartridge machine that plays the latest club announcements.

Macros

Create New Macro
Places the name of the new macro in a directory, then places the
digits following the macro name into a storage area in memory.
•
•
•

A new macro is a macro with a name that has not been used before.
The digits that are stored in memory are shown below as Command, in the
command form section. Command may be either a control command, or the
name of another macro.
If you are storing a control command, do not forget to include the control
command's password. In other words, the command stored into a macro
must be a complete, executable command or macro.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Create New Macro

(PW) 20 (macro name, command) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? name used
? dir full

too few digits entered
macro name already exists in the directory
directory is filled with the maximum number of
macros
the command being entered for storage
exceeds the storage area allowed for a macro

? too big

Default Condition: No Macros exist
Examples:
Assume we wish to create a macro that turns ON Logic Output #1. The control
command would be:
(PW) 70 1 *
Since we do not wish to disclose the password to our users, we can simply
place this command into a macro. Let’s call the macro 6A (assume our users
have 16-button DTMF keyboards). Enter the following:

6-5

7K • Chapter 6
(PW) 20 006A (PW) 70 1 *
•

If additional commands are to be executed by entering 6A, they can be
appended. See the Append to Macro command on page 6-7.

Note: The macro name is entered with leading zeroes, since the name chosen
is less that 4 digits long. Also, the command following the macro name is a
complete command, including password.
The acknowledgment message OK simply indicates that the Create New Macro
command was entered correctly, and that the controller created a new directory
entry with some digits stored in memory. It does not guarantee that the digits it
stored represented an executable command. It is possible to store garbage
digits in a macro just as easily as legitimate commands.

6-6

Macros

Append To Macro
This command is used to attach additional commands to a macro.
•
•

The macro name (to be appended) must already exist in the directory.
The stored information, shown below as Command, in the command form
section, may be a control command or another macro name (if you wish to
chain together several macros).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Append to Macro

(PW) 29 (macro name, command)*

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? not found
? too big

too few digits entered
macro name does not exist in directory
command being entered exceeds the storage
area remaining for this macro

Default: None
Examples:
Assume that a macro has been created to turn ON Logic Output #1, and that
its name is 6A. We wish to append a command that dials a telephone number
(i.e. accesses the autopatch). This way, entering 6A will result in the controller
both dialing the number and turning on the output.
Assuming the autopatch password is 10 (the default), and the number we wish
to dial is 663-6000, the command to dial is:
(PW) 29 006A 10 6636000 *
Note: The macro 6A must already exist before this additional command may
be appended. See the Create New Macro command on page 6-5.

6-7

7K • Chapter 6
Additional commands may be appended to a macro until the storage space for
that macro is used up.
•
•
•
•

If more commands are needed than can fit into a single macro, simply
append the name of another macro to the original macro.
This new macro is created and appended similarly to the original macro.
If the new macro is filled, append another.
This process can continue until the limit of 40 chained commands is
reached.

Note: The acknowledgment message OK simply indicates that the Append To
Macro command was entered correctly, and that the controller appended
whatever digits were given after the macro name. It does not guarantee that
the digits it stored represented an executable command. It is possible to store
“garbage” digits in a macro just as easily as legitimate commands.

6-8

Macros

List Macro
Examines the contents of a macro and sends it in either CW or
speech.
•
•
•

Entering one of these commands causes the controller to send all stored
digits in CW or speech. In CW the (*) character is sent as a fraction bar (/);
in speech, the (*) character is sent as the word “enter”.
The macro name must be entered using 4 digits.
If the macro you wish to list has a shorter name, enter leading zeros.

Command Form:
Command

Form

List Macro in CW

(PW) 33 (macro name) *

List Macro in Speech

(PW) 35 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends the contents of the macro in CW or speech.
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? not found

wrong number of digits entered
macro name does not exist in the directory

Default Condition: None.
Example:
Assume that a macro exists with the name 6A. It contains two commands as
discussed in the Create New Macro and Append To Macro commands (see
pages 6-5 and 6-7). To make the example clearer, assume that the password
is 99.
When the commands were originally placed into the macro, they looked like
this:
(PW) 70 1 * and 10 663 6000 *
To examine this macro in CW, we would enter:
(PW) 33 006A *
The controller would then send:
9 9 7 0 1 / 1 0 6 6 3 6 0 0 0 /

6-9

7K • Chapter 6
To examine this macro in speech, we would enter:
(PW) 35 006A *
The controller would then speak:
“Nine nine seven zero one enter one zero six six three six zero zero zero
enter”

6-10

Macros

Erase Macro
Erases an existing macro.
•
•
•

The macro name must be entered as 4 digits.
If the name of the macro you are erasing has a shorter name, enter leading
zeroes.
If you wish to erase all macros, see the Erase All Macros command on
page 6-11.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Erase Macro

(PW) 21 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
macro name does not exist in the directory

Default: None
Examples:
Assume that a macro exists under the macro name 6A, and that it contains
several commands. To erase this macro, enter:
(PW) 21 006A *
After the above command is entered, macro 6A will no longer exist. The
storage area used by this macro will be released, and another macro can be
created to take its place. Macro name 6A, since it is now erased from the
directory, can be used as the name of a new macro.

6-11

7K • Chapter 6

Erase All Macros
Erases all existing macros. ••• USE WITH CARE •••
•
•
•

If accidentally entered all macros will be lost.
The zeroes in the command must be entered as a precaution to avoid
accidents.
If you wish to erase one or more selected macros, see the Erase Macro
command on page 6-10.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Erase All Macros

(PW) 22 00 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
zeroes were not entered

Default: None

6-12

Macros

Rename Macro
Changes the name of an existing macro.
•
•
•

The digits (contents) stored under the macro’s name are not affected.
The macro names (old and new) must be entered using 4 digits.
If either (or both) is shorter than 4 digits, enter leading zeroes.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Rename Macro

(PW) 27 (old name, new name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? not found
? name used

wrong number of digits entered
old name does not exist in the directory
new name already exists in the directory

Default: None
Examples:
Assume that a macro exists under the name 6A, and that we wish to change its
name to 1000. Enter the following command:
(PW) 27 006A 1000 *
Note: A macro name of 1000 would cause a conflict if the autopatch password
were left at its default value of 10. Be sure to select your macro names and
passwords carefully.

6-13

7K • Chapter 6
Assume that we now wish to change its name to 789. Enter the following
command:
(PW) 27 1000 0789 *
Finally, let's change its name once more to simply D. Enter the following
command:
(PW) 27 0789 000D *
Here is a wrap-up of what we have done.
•
•
•
•

Before its name was changed, the macro was executed by entering 6A.
After the first name change, it was executed by entering 1000*.
After the second name change, it was executed by entering 789*.
After the third name change, it was executed by entering D.

You can see that a macro can have a short or long name, and its name can be
made up of numerals or letters (A, B, C, or D).

6-14

Macros

Pause
Causes the controller to stop the execution of the commands that
follow for the programmed amount of time.
•
•

This results in a delay occurring between commands.
Enter 3 digits corresponding to the number of seconds of pause desired.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Pause

(PW) 98 xxx *

(001–255)
= (1–255) seconds

Acknowledgment: None
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No Pause
Examples:
To delay command execution 2 seconds, enter:
(PW) 98 2 *
To delay command execution 10 seconds, enter:
(PW) 98 10 *
Note: Very long delays are not recommended, as the controller will not store
commands which are input via DTMF during this time. However , macro
execution will not be affected, and Pause commands may be stored as desired
in strings of macros.

6-15

7K • Chapter 6

Select Power ON-Triggered Macro
Assigns a macro to be executed when the controller goes through a
warm startup.
•
•

Enter a 4-digit macro name, using leading zeros if the macro is less than 4
digits long.
To delete the assignment, enter no macro name.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Power ON-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 00 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default: None
Examples:
This command is useful for initializing hardware at the repeater site following a
power interuption. A macro can be created that momentarily switches ON one
of the logic outputs; this macro is then triggered by a restart. By the way, this
command has no effect after a cold start since all macros are deleted anyway.
As an example of how this command may be used, assume that macro 3456*
has been created. This command changes the CW frequency to a high pitch.
To trigger this macro from a restart enter:
(PW) 26 00 3456 *
If power at the repeater site should fail and return later, the controller will notify
you since the CW pitch is now higher. You may enter a macro or a control
command that changes the CW pitch back to normal, awaiting the next power
glitch.

6-16

Telephone Interface Functions

Chapter 7

Telephone
Interface
Functions
This section of the manual describes the autopatch, phone line control mode,
and reverse patch features of your controller. We use the term Autopatch to
describe a telephone call originated by the repeater user. Reverse Patch calls
are originated by a telephone user.

7-1

7K • Chapter 7

Autopatch
Your controller has many features that allow you to customize the operation of
the autopatch. The following discussion is simply an overview of autopatch
operation. Details begin on page 7-3.

Accessing the Autopatch
The Autopatch can be accessed in several ways:
•

•

You can manually enter the required DTMF digits via you radio’s DTMF
keyboard. You can program the controller to require an Autopatch Access
Password ahead of the telephone number, or you can program the
controller to require only the telephone number.
You can manually enter a macro name via your radio’s DTMF
keyboard.This previously-programmed macro would contain an autopatch
access password and telephone number as described above. The macro
feature requires far fewer digits to be entered to dial the autopatch, but
requires you store the numbers you wish to dial into macros before you can
use the macros.
You can program the COR Pulse-Triggered Macro feature to execute one
of the macros mentioned above. (See page 16-4.) Then, a user would only
need to key his/her microphone PTT button several times to access the
autopatch and dial an emergency number. Only one number can be dialed
this way. Likewise, any of the Event-Triggered Macros can be used to dial
the autopatch by creating an “autodial” type of macro, then loading that
macro name into the proper event command.

Store-and-Forward Operation.
The autopatch dialer software uses Store-and-Forward Operation. This means
that the controller takes no action until the entire telephone number has been
entered. It then checks the number to see if it is acceptable. If acceptable, the
number is dialed using pulse (rotary) format or regenerated DTMF format. This
method is far superior to the older star (*) up patch, in which phone line access
is granted with just a DTMF (*).
The advantages of store-and-forward operation are:
•
•
•
•

7-2

There is never a prolonged dial tone that results from a user entering the
(*), then not placing the call.
Since the controller regenerates all DTMF digits going to the telephone line,
noisy or inaccurate tones from the receiver cannot cause misdials.
The controller is never stuck in a mode where it must wait for a specific
command type to be entered before it can continue operation.
In the store-and-forward scheme, every access command is completely
self-contained. Therefore, any other command can be entered before and

Telephone Interface Functions

•

after an Access Autopatch command. (The Access Autopatch commands
begin on page 7-28.)
Other commands you might want to use during an autopatch include: Dump
Autopatch Using a Code (page 7-15), Redial Last Number (page 7-44),
Reset Autopatch Timeout Timer (page 7-26), or even access the patch to
place a new call (entering a new call while already in an autopatch will
cause the original call to be dumped and a new call to be dialed).

Dumping the Autopatch
The autopatch can be dumped in three ways:
•
•
•

You can enter the Dump Autopatch Using a Code command on page 7-15.
This is not recommended, since the control code contains a programing
password which should be kept secure.
You can enter a macro name. This previously-programmed macro would
contain the autopatch dump control code. This is the recommended
method.
You can enter the (#) digit. This method works if you wish to have a simple,
one-character dump code which has little security. The Enable/Disable
Pound (# Dump) command is switchable ON or OFF (See page 7-12).

Autopatch Setup and Configuration
Autopatch Dialer
The Autopatch Dialer software looks for the lettered characters B, C, and D in a
phone number. The purposes of these three characters is as follows:
•
•
•

B = pause in dialing (see page 7-11).
C = dial the digits that follow in pulse (rotary) mode.
D= dial the digits that follow in DTMF mode.

You will need a 16-button DTMF keyboard to enter these characters. (If you
program a phone number with the B, C, and D characters into a macro, and if
this macro name does not have any lettered characters, then a standard 12button keyboard can be used to enter the macro name.)
As you can see, the lettered characters are useful in instructing the controller
how to dial a special number. The lettered characters themselves are not
dialed. The call screening process—Autopatch Call Types Table (page 7-35),
Accepted Number Table (page 7-38), and Rejected Number Table (page
7-38)—ignores the lettered characters. You may freely place Bs, Cs and Ds in
a phone number and still have the number accurately screened for restrictions.
When a telephone number contains both rotary and DTMF dialing modes, it
requires that the Enable/Disable Autopatch Dialing Mixed-Mode command be
enabled. (See page 7-10.)
7-3

7K • Chapter 7
The lettered characters have only a temporary effect. Once the phone number
is dialed, the dialer will assume the next call will be dialed using the Standard
Mode. (By the way, the Select Autopatch Dialing Mode command (on page 7-6)
is used to select the standard mode.)

Examples
Let’s use some examples to illustrate this feature. Assume the standard mode
of dialing is rotary. Assume you must dial a local 7-digit number such as 9876543, pause for a second dial tone, then dial another number in DTMF, such
as 234 567 890. Enter your telephone number like this:
987 6543 B D 234 567 890
You will have to make an entry into the Accepted Number Table (page 7-38) so
that the controller will allow this 16-digit number. You can allow
“9876543234567890” or you can allow sixteen “A”s (which would allow any 16digit number to be dialed). In the above example, the controller would dial
9876543 in rotary (pulse) format, pause 5-seconds, then dial 234567890 in
DTMF.

Autopatch Conversation Control
During a standard half-duplex autopatch, the mobile operator always has
control of the conversation. When the mobile is transmitting, audio from the
receiver is fed to the phone line. Audio from the phone line is not allowed to
feed the transmitter. If Enable/Disable Autopatch Privacy is turned OFF
(disabled), the mobile audio is allowed to repeat. If Enable/Disable Autopatch
Privacy is turned ON (enabled), the mobile audio is not allowed to repeat. (See
page 7-18 for discussion of this command.)
When the mobile is listening, audio from the receiver is not allowed to feed the
phone line. Audio from the phone line is fed to the transmitter.
With this scheme, the mobile operator can cut off the telephone party by simply
pushing the PTT button.
During a full-duplex autopatch, audio feeds both ways for the duration of the
conversation. Operators do not have the ability to cut off the telephone party
with PTT, but must control the call with only the Dump Autopatch Using a Code
command on page 7-15.

7-4

Telephone Interface Functions

Autopatch Dialing Mode
The autopatch is capable of dialing the telephone number in three ways:
•
•
•

Ten pulses per second (PPS), rotary.
Twenty pulses per second (PPS), rotary.
DTMF (Touch Tone™).

Ten PPS is the standard method. Twenty PPS works with some exchanges.
Use Touch Tone if you have the service in your area and have a Touch Tone
line at the repeater site.

7-5

7K • Chapter 7

Select Autopatch Dialing Mode
Programs the type of autopatch dialing.
•

Enter one digit representing the dialing mode from the table below.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Autopatch Dialing Mode

(PW) 61 x *

1 = 10 PPS
2 = 20 PPS
3 = DTMF

Data Digit

Explanation

1
2
3

10 pulses per second, rotary dialing
20 pulses per second, rotary dialing
DTMF (Touch Tone™) dialing
(5 digits per second)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Autopatch Dialing Mode is 10 PPS rotary
Examples:
To change the dialing mode to 20 pulses per second, enter the following:
(PW) 61 2 *
To change the dialing mode to DTMF (Touch Tone™), enter the following:
(PW) 61 3 *

7-6

Telephone Interface Functions

Select (Review) Autopatch Dialing Message
This message is sent over the repeater transmitter when the
controller starts to dial the autopatch telephone number.
•

Lets a user know the autopatch command was entered correctly.
Otherwise, a delay before ringing (especially when rotary dialing) may
convince the user that a call was rejected.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Autopatch Dialing Message
Review Autopatch Dialing Message

(PW) 31 40 (message) *
(PW) 34 40 (message) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Sends AS (wait) in CW

7-7

7K • Chapter 7

Select (Review) Autopatch Error Messages
One of these messages is sent over the repeater transmitter when
a telephone number cannot be dialed.
•
•
•
•
•
•

The Off Message is sent when the Autopatch is off.
The Busy Message is sent when the Busy Logic Input is active.
The Reject Message is sent when the phone number entered by the user
or programmed in a macro matches an entry in the Reject Table.
The Error Message is sent when a phone number entered by the user or
programmed in a macro does not match one of the enabled Call Types or
Accept Table entries.
The No-Redial-Number Message is sent when a redial command has
been entered and there is no phone number in the redial buffer.
If an autopatch message is not programmed, the default CW message will
be sent only when Command Responses are enabled.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Select Autopatch Off Message
Select Autopatch Busy Message
Select Autopatch Reject Message
Select Autopatch Error Message
Select Autopatch No-Redial-Number
Message
Review Autopatch Off Message
Review Autopatch Busy Message
Review Autopatch Reject Message
Review Autopatch Error Message
Review Autopatch No-Redial-Number
Message

(PW) 31 44 (message) *
(PW) 31 42 (message) *
(PW) 31 46 (message) *
(PW) 31 45 (message) *
(PW) 31 47 (message) *

OFF in CW
BZ in CW
?REJ in CW
?ERR in CW
CLR in CW

(PW) 34 44 *
(PW) 34 42 *
(PW) 34 46 *
(PW) 34 45 *
(PW) 34 47 *

none
none
none
none
none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The default CW message is sent only if Command
Responses are enabled.

7-8

Telephone Interface Functions

Select (Review) Autopatch Dump Message
This message is sent over the repeater transmitter when an
autopatch or reverse patch is terminated.
•
•

Lets the user know that an autopatch or reverse patch was successfully
terminated.
This message is not sent when Phone Line Control Mode call is terminated.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Select Autopatch Dump Message
Review Autopatch Dump Message

(PW) 31 43 (message) *
(PW) 34 43 *

none
none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No message.
Example:
To program the dump message to say “Call complete at (time) on (day) (date)”,
e.g. “Call complete at 12:23 PM on Monday July 21st”, enter the following:
(PW) 31 43 9960 0067 0088 0039 9820
9821 0358 9826 9829 9828 *

7-9

7K • Chapter 7

Enable/Disable Autopatch Dialing Mixed-Mode
Controls whether mixed-mode dialing is allowed on the autopatch.
•
•
•
•
•

Mixed-Mode dialing means both rotary and DTMF dialing are allowed.
The dialer will dial only in the way allowed by the Select Autopatch Dialing
Mode command on page 7-6.
If mixed-mode dialing is turned OFF (disabled), the controller will ignore any
C and D characters in the phone number. (C means dial in rotary, D means
dial in DTMF.)
If mixed-mode dialing is turned ON (enabled), the dialer will switch back and
forth between rotary and DTMF dialing, according to C and D characters
found in the telephone number.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Autopatch Dialing MixedMode

(PW) 63 04 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Autopatch Dialing Mixed-Mode Is OFF (disabled)

7-10

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Pause (“B”) Digit Time
Programs the amount the Pause Digit in a phone number delays.
•
•
•

When the user dials a telephone number or a macro is programmed to dial
a telephone number, a pause digit (the DTMF character “B”) provides a
programmable delay (see page 7-3 for use).
Enter 1, 2, or 3 digits representing the desired time of the pause in tenths of
seconds.
The range of the time is 0.1 second to 10.0 seconds.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Pause (“B”) Digit Time

(PW) 49 96 xxx *

(001-100 in sst –
seconds and tenths)
= (00.1-10.0) seconds

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: 5 seconds.
Example:
To set the pause digit to 2 seconds, enter the following:
(PW) 49 96 20 *

Note: See Page 7-3, for instructions on using the pause digit when dialing.

7-11

7K • Chapter 7

Enable/Disable Pound Down (# Dump)
Allows the autopatch to be terminated with either the pound (#) key
or the longer control command.
•
•
•
•

Some users want the ability to dump (hang up) the autopatch by entering
only the (#) key.
When turned ON (enabled), the autopatch can be dumped with either the
(#) key or the longer control command.
When turned OFF (disabled), the autopatch must be dumped with the
control command (or a macro containing the control command).
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Pound Down (# Dump)

(PW) 63 05 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Pound Down is OFF (disabled)
Note: The (#) key still retains its other meaning (clear the command buffer)
whether or not the pound down feature is enabled. That is, if the (#) key is
pressed when a partial command is in the buffer, the controller will only clear
the command buffer. If there is an autopatch or reverse patch in progress at
that time, it will not be dumped. However, if there are no characters in the
command buffer when the (#) key is pressed, the autopatch or reverse patch in
progress will be dumped.
Since the (#) key needs to be pressed for only a short time, it is easy for
troublemakers to dump a call in progress. This is the reason for allowing the
pound-down feature to be enabled and disabled.)

7-12

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Dialing Prefix
Defines a dialing sequence that will precede any outgoing call.
•
•
•
•

A dialing prefix is automatically dialed by the autopatch when an outgoing
call is made.
The prefix can contain up to 16 codes that represent DTMF/rotary digits,
pauses, or commands to switch from DTMF to rotary dialing and back.
The prefix is not dialed when the Go Off-Hook command is entered.
Delete the dialing prefix by entering the command with no prefix codes.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Select Dialing Prefix
Delete Dialing Prefix

(PW) 83 10 (prefix) *
(PW) 83 10 *

see table below
none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Code

Function

Code

Function

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

DTMF or rotary digit 0
DTMF or rotary digit 1
DTMF or rotary digit 2
DTMF or rotary digit 3
DTMF or rotary digit 4
DTMF or rotary digit 5
DTMF or rotary digit 6
DTMF or rotary digit 7
DTMF or rotary digit 8
DTMF or rotary digit 9
DTMF digit A

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

DTMF digit B
DTMF digit C
DTMF digit D
DTMF digit *
DTMF digit #
1-second pause
2-second pause
5-second pause
10-second pause
dial the following digits in rotary mode
dial the following digits in DTMF
mode

Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No dialing prefix is defined.

7-13

7K • Chapter 7

Example 1:
If you have your autopatch plugged into an extension on a PBX and need to
dial 9 to get an outside line, enter the following:
(PW) 83 10 09 16 *

; dial 9, 1-second pause

Example 2:
If you want outgoing calls from your autopatch to block your phone number
from a Caller ID display unit, enter the following:
(PW) 83 10 14 06 07 16 * ; dial *67, 1-second pause
Example 3:
If you want to set up your autopatch to dial an outside line on a PBX by default,
but still want to be able to dial other extensions on the PBX, you can set the
default prefix in your Autopatch Dump-Triggered Macro (see page 7-16) by
entering:
(PW) 83 10 09 16 *

; dial 9, 1-second pause

This way your default Dialing Prefix is always reset after every call.
Then, create a macro that you dial before making a call to an extension on the
PBX. Create a macro by entering:
(PW) 20 0001 (PW) 83 10 *

; clear prefix

To make a call to an extension, enter:
1 * (APW) (extension number) *
For this example, assume your Autopatch Password is 10 and you are dialing
an extension of 123, then you would enter:
1 * 10 123 *
When you dump the call, the Autopatch Dump-Triggered Macro will reset the
Dialing Prefix to the default.

7-14

Telephone Interface Functions

Dump Autopatch Using a Code
Terminates (hangs up) either an autopatch or a reverse patch call.
•

Since you will not want to divulge the password system to the autopatch
users, we suggest that this command be placed into the macro of your
choice. The macro would be used to dump all calls.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Dump Autopatch Using a Code

(PW) 83 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default Condition: None
Note: The controller also supports pound down dumping, described in the
Enable/Disable Pound Down (# Dump) command section on page 7-12.

7-15

7K • Chapter 7

Select Autopatch Access- and Dump-Triggered Macro
Assigns macros to be executed upon accessing or dumping the
autopatch.
•
•
•

Enter the 4 digit macro name, using leading zeroes if the macro name is
less than 4 digits.
To delete the assignment, enter the command with no macro name
specified.
Also see the Select Autopatch Receiver-Specific Access-Triggered Macros
on page 7-67.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Autopatch Access-Triggered Macro
Select Autopatch Dump-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 12 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 13 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No Macros Exist
Note: The Autopatch Dump-Triggered Macro will be executed if the autopatch
“times out.” If a series of calls are made without dumping the autopatch
between calls, the autopatch dump-triggered macro will be executed at the end
of the last call.

Examples:
These commands make the autopatch much more flexible. For example, a
tape recorder can be turned ON and OFF by connecting it to a logic output. It
could then be either activated or de-activated by the autopatch accesstriggered and dump-triggered macros. The tape recorder can be located at a
remote site connected to a CTCSS decoder and receiver on the repeater’s
output frequency. The autopatch access-triggered and dump-triggered macros
can turn the controller’s CTCSS Encoder ON and OFF—and change its
frequency.

7-16

Telephone Interface Functions

Enable/Disable Full-Duplex Mode
Places the autopatch in or out of full-duplex mode.
Full-Duplex operation means that audio is gated both ways at the same time,
allowing the mobile to talk and listen simultaneously (assuming the mobile is
equipped with full-duplex RF gear). A disadvantage of full-duplex operation is
that the mobile cannot simply press the PTT button to quiet the voice of the
phoned party.
Normal operation of the autopatch is Half-Duplex, meaning that audio is gated
from the phone line to the transmitter when the mobile is listening, and gated
from the receiver to the phone line when the mobile is talking.
• Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).
• Full-Duplex Mode will automatically be disabled when the call is dumped.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Full-Duplex Mode

(PW) 63 07 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Full-Duplex Mode is OFF (disabled)

7-17

7K • Chapter 7

Enable/Disable Autopatch Privacy
Turns the Autopatch Privacy feature ON or OFF.
•
•
•

When ON (enabled), the audio from the repeater receiver is not transmitted
(repeated) during an autopatch.
When OFF (disabled), the audio is transmitted (repeated) similarly to the
normal operation of the repeater.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Autopatch Privacy

(PW) 63 06 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Autopatch Privacy is OFF (disabled)
Examples:
This feature is temporary and remains in effect for the duration of only one
autopatch call. At the end of the call it is automatically turned OFF. This
command can be placed in a macro with the Access Autopatch commands
(beginning on page 7-28), thus making that macro a “privacy speed dial.”
It is important for control operators to ensure that amateur autopatches do not
involve business calls. This should be considered when allowing the use of the
Enable/Disable Autopatch Privacy, as the content of the conversation is not
easily determined by control operators.

7-18

Telephone Interface Functions

Enable/Disable Repeater-to-Phone DTMF Mute
Allows—or disallows—DTMF digits feeding the phone line from the
repeater.
This command does not affect the dialing of telephone numbers, since this
feature is in effect after the dialing is finished. The purpose of the command is
to prevent troublemakers from dialing a second phone number after a called
party hangs up. (Some exchanges return a “second dial tone” under those
conditions.)
•
•
•

DTMF digits are detected and muted from the phone line when this feature
is ON (enabled).
This feature would have to be turned OFF (disabled), however, when a
mobile station wishes to call a number and remotely control a device via
DTMF digits.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Repeater-to-Phone DTMF
Mute

(PW) 63 08 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default: Repeater-to-Phone DTMF Mute if OFF (disabled).

7-19

7K • Chapter 7

Enable/Disable ID Messages During Autopatch
Allows the Identifier to operate during an autopatch and reverse
patch.
•
•
•
•

Enter this command to allow the identifier to operate during an autopatch.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).
By default, the identifier is disabled during an autopatch.
This command has no effect if executed during an autopatch. This
command will take effect on the next autopatch.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Enable/Disable ID During Autopatch

(PW) 63 09 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Disabled.
Example:
To enable the identifier during a patch, enter the following:
(PW) 63 09 1 *
To disable the identifier during a patch, enter the following:
(PW) 63 09 0 *

7-20

Telephone Interface Functions

Require Dump Before Next Call
Requires that a phone call in progress be dumped before another
call can be made.
•
•
•
•

Enter this command to prevent another call from being made before the
current call is dumped by the user or timeout timer.
By default, another call can be made while one is in progress. The current
call will automatically be dumped.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).
This inhibits a user from dumping the patch with any command except the
patch dump command.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Require Dump Before Next Call

(PW) 63 10 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Disabled, dump is not require before a new call.
Example:
To require that a current call is dumped before another call is made, enter the
following:
(PW) 63 10 1 *
To allow another call to be made while a call is in progress, enter the following:
(PW) 63 10 0 *

7-21

7K • Chapter 7

Select Receiver-to-Autopatch-Triggered Macros
Allows the programmer to execute macros based on receiver-toautopatch activity.
•
•
•
•

Macros can be executed based on receiver-to-autopatch activity.
Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the 4-digit name of the
macro you wish to have executed at the transition, and the (*).
If the macro name has fewer than 4 digits, enter leading zeros.
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Macro to Any-Receiver-Active to
Autopatch
Assign Macro to All-Receivers-Inactive to
Autopatch

(PW) 26 06 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 07 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned.

7-22

Telephone Interface Functions

Landline Hookflash
Causes a Hookflash to occur on the phone line.
•
•
•

A hookflash (also called a flash) is an indication to a phone system to
perform an action, for example to pick up another call that is waiting or to
conference another party during an outgoing call.
Enter this command to cause a hookflash.
This command has no effect when no autopatch or reverse patch has been
made.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Landline Hookflash

(PW) 83 1 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

? err 2

illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None
Example:
Cause a hookflash on the phone line during an autopatch:
(PW) 83 1 *

Note: This command will have either no effect or will disconnect your call if
your phone line is not equipped to respond to a hookflash.

7-23

7K • Chapter 7

Autopatch Timeout Timer
The Autopatch Timeout Timer controls the duration of the call. If the call
exceeds the time limit, it will be terminated by the controller.
When the time is within 30 seconds of “timing out,” the autopatch timeout timer
will start sending short Autopatch Timeout Warning Messages in CW. These
messages are sent every 5 seconds, and are programmable. A user may
extend the duration of his/her call by entering the Reset Autopatch Timeout
Timer command on page 7-26.
If the repeater owner does not want to make the Reset Autopatch Timeout
Timer command available to users, he/she should simply not create a macro
containing it. The command will remain a control command, protected by its
password.

7-24

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Autopatch Timeout Timer
Programs the maximum duration of an autopatch call.
•
•
•
•

After the root number, enter 1, 2, or 3 digits representing the desired time in
tenths of minutes.
The range of the timer is 0.1 minutes to 54.6 minutes. For example, 1 = 0.1
minutes (6 seconds); 30 = 3.0 minutes; 546 = 54.6 minutes.
Leading zeroes are not required, so entering 030 for 3.0 minutes is the
same as entering 30.
Enter 000 for infinity (timer disabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Autopatch Timeout Timer

(PW) 65 xxx *

000 = infinity
(001–546) =
(0.1–54.6) minutes

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit, or out of limit

Default Condition: Autopatch Timeout Timer is 3.0 minutes
Examples:
To set the timeout timer to 4.5 minutes, enter:
(PW) 65 45 *
To set the timeout timer to infinity, enter:
(PW) 65 000 *
To set the timer to 54.6 minutes (the maximum allowed without disabling the
autopatch timeout timer), enter
(PW) 65 546 *

7-25

7K • Chapter 7

Reset Autopatch Timeout Timer
Resets the Autopatch Timeout Timer.
•

Allows call to proceed for another period of time as set by the Select
Autopatch Timeout Timer command on page 7-25.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Reset Autopatch Timeout Timer

(PW) 81 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default Condition: None

7-26

Telephone Interface Functions

Select (Review) Autopatch Timeout Warning Message
Programs (and reviews) the message that is sent during the last 30
seconds—before timeout—of the autopatch call.
•
•
•

The Autopatch Timeout Warning Message is sent by the controller every 5
seconds for the last 30 seconds of an autopatch call.
If the mobile station unkeys for a few seconds during the last 30 seconds of
the timer, the operator will recognize that the call is about to be terminated.
Maximum message length is 25 characters.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Autopatch Timeout Warning Message (PW) 31 41 (message) *
Review Autopatch Timeout Warning Message (PW) 34 41 *

Acknowledgment: Sends the Autopatch Timeout Warning Message (or OK, if
none)
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

too many digits entered
illegal CW Character entered

Default Condition: Autopatch Timeout Warning Message is AR in CW
Examples:
We suggest the autopatch timeout warning messages be noticeable enough
that the mobile takes immediate action to either terminate the call or reset the
autopatch timer. A sequence of beeps or DTMF digits might be a good
attention-getting message in this application.

7-27

7K • Chapter 7

Autopatch Access and Passwords
If security of the autopatch is important, you can require users to enter an
Autopatch Access Password immediately before the phone number to be
dialed.
If security is not a concern, the autopatch can be accessed by simply entering
the phone number itself. The pages which follow list the commands involved in
choosing the access you want.
For special applications, you can just pickup the phone the way you would at
home (see page 7-34).

7-28

Telephone Interface Functions

Access Autopatch (With Password)
Accesses the autopatch using the password method.
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the Autopatch Access Password, followed by the telephone number,
and the star (*), if required. All digits are entered in a continuous string.
Entering only the autopatch access password will not result in a dial tone.
The autopatch access password may be any 2,4 or 6 digits.
The phone number may be up to 35 digits in length, and may contain
special command digits (A, B, C, D).
See the Change Autopatch Access Password on page 7-32 if you wish to
change the password.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Access Autopatch (With Password)

(autopatch access password) (phone number)
*

Acknowledgment: Sends the Autopatch Dialing Message
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? REJ
? ERR
BZ

autopatch is OFF (disabled)
rejected (number in Rejected Number Table)
rejected (number not allowed by AP Call Type)
phone line is busy (Model 7K controller only)

Default Condition: Autopatch Access Password is set to 10.
Examples:
Assume that the autopatch access password is 10, and that the number you
wish to dial is 456-7890. To access the autopatch, enter:
10 4567890

When the above number is entered the controller will screen the telephone
number. (See the Autopatch Call Types and Autopatch Restrictions sections on
page 7-35 and 7-38 respectively.) If the number is acceptable, the controller
will send the autopatch dialing message and dial the number. If the number is
not acceptable, the controller will send one of the error messages listed above.

7-29

7K • Chapter 7

Access Autopatch (Without Password)
Accesses the autopatch without using the password method.
•
•
•

Enter the telephone number, and the star (*), if required. All digits are
entered in a continuous string.
The phone number may be up to 35 digits in length, and may contain
special command digits (A, B, C, D).
See the Enable/Disable Autopatch Access Without Password command on
page 7-33.

Command Form:
Command

Access Autopatch (Without Password)

Form

(phone number) *

Acknowledgment: Sends the Autopatch Dialing Message
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? REJ
? ERR
BZ

autopatch is full OFF (disabled)
rejected (number in Rejected Number Table)
rejected (number not allowed by AP Call Type)
phone line is busy (Model 7K controller only)

Default Condition: Access Autopatch (Without Password) is OFF (disabled)
Examples:
Assume that a number you wish to call is 456-7890. Enter the following:
4567890 *
When the above command is entered, the controller will screen the telephone
number 456-7890 according to the following tables you may have programmed:
•
•
•

Autopatch Call Types Table (page 7-35).
Accepted Number Table (page 7-38).
Rejected Number Table (page 7-38).

and dial the number.
If the number is not acceptable, the controller will send one of the error
messages cited above.

7-30

Telephone Interface Functions
Note: The controller will examine the command after it has searched the Macro
Name Table. If a macro named “911” is found, it will be executed. If there is no
macro named “911,” the autopatch will dial 911 (if enabled).
The controller has no problem with telephone numbers that begin with the
same digits as macros if their lengths are different. In other words, the
controller will properly execute a macro named “6636,” and it will properly dial
“663-6000,” even though the first four digits are the same.
Remember, commands are not executed until the terminator is received.
Therefore, “6636” and “6636000” are entirely different commands to the
controller.
(By the way, the Macro Name Table exists only in the controller’s memory. As
such, it does not appear in print anywhere in this manual.)

7-31

7K • Chapter 7

Change Autopatch Access Password
Replaces the old Autopatch Access Password with a new one.
•

•

The password refered to in this commandis the Autopatch Access
Password. It is different from both the Master and Control Operator
Passwords. It is only used to access the autopatch and not to modify
control functions.
New autopatch access password is a 2, 4 or 6 digit number of any
combination of
0–9 and A–D.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Change Autopatch Access Password

(PW) 23 (new Autopatch Access Password) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: Autopatch Access Password is set to 10.
Examples:
Assume that the autopatch access password is 10, and that you wish it
changed to A5. Enter the following command:
(PW) 23 A5 *

Note: This will prevent users without 16-button DTMF pads from accessing the
autopatch.
Now assume that the autopatch access password is to be changed again, this
time to 6146. Enter the following command:
(PW) 23 6146 *

7-32

Telephone Interface Functions

Enable/Disable Autopatch Access Without Password
Allows the autopatch to be accessed without using the Autopatch
Access Password.
•
•
•

The autopatch can be accessed in two ways—with—or without an
autopatch access password.
To access the autopatch without using the autopatch access password, this
command must be ON (enabled).
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Autopatch Access Without
Password

(PW) 63 11 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Defaults to OFF (cold start); Retained (warm start)
Examples:
Assume that the Enable/Disable Autopatch Access Without Password feature
is OFF (disabled), and you wish to turn it ON (enabled). Enter the following:
(PW) 63 11 1 *
If you wish to turn the feature OFF, enter the following:
(PW) 63 11 0 *

7-33

7K • Chapter 7

Go Off-Hook
Causes the phone line to go off-hook.
•
•
•

Enter this command to cause the phone line to go off-hook without dialing a
phone number. This is like picking up a phone and getting dial tone.
A second version of the command ignores the Busy Logic Input. This is like
picking up an extension telephone while the telephone line is already in use.
This command has no effect if an autopatch or reverse patch is in progress.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Go Off-Hook

(PW) 83 2 *

Go Off-Hook, Ignore Busy Logic Input

(PW) 83 3 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK

Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

? err 2

illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None

Example:
To go off-hook on the patch, enter the following:
(PW) 83 2 *
To go off-hook on the patch even if the Busy Logic Input signals that the line is
busy, enter the following:
(PW) 83 3 *

7-34

Telephone Interface Functions

Autopatch Call Types
There are eight categories of telephone numbers recognized by the controller.
They are Autopatch Call Types. The Select Autopatch Call Types command
(on page 7-36) allows you to program the types of telephone calls that can be
made through the autopatch.

Autopatch Call Types
Numbers

Call Types

0
xxx-xxxx
xxx-xxx-xxxx
0-xxx-xxxx
1-xxx-xxxx
0-xxx-xxx-xxxx
1-xxx-xxx-xxxx
1-800-xxx-xxxx/1-888-xxx-xxxx

operator
7-digit local call
10-digit local call
operator-assisted 7-digit call
7-digit long distance call
operator assisted 10-digit call
10-digit call long distance call
toll free call

The controller may be programmed to allow any or all of the above autopatch
call types. In addition, it may be turned OFF (disabled) completely.
As you can see, this is a somewhat general way of screening calls. It has the
advantage of being programmed via a standard 12-button DTMF pad.
To screen call types more closely, see the Autopatch Restrictions section on
page 7-38. Autopatch restrictions allow screening by the individual digits,
shown as “x”s in the table above. A 16-button DTMF pad is required to screen
by blocks of numbers.

7-35

7K • Chapter 7

Select Autopatch Call Types
Selects the types of calls permitted by the autopatch.
•
•
•
•
•

Entering this command will dump any autopatch call in progress.
If the call type being selected is different from the one currently selected,
the autopatch redialer memory is cleared.
Enter up to 8 digits from the Autopatch Call Types Table below.
Entering no digits turns off the autopatch.
Entering any digit from 0-8 will permit accepted numbers.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Select Autopatch Call Types

(PW) 60 x *

(0-8) Autopatch Call
Types Table below

Data Digit

Autopatch Call Types

Explanation

none
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

no calls permitted
accepted numbers only
0
xxx-xxxx
0-xxx-xxxx
1-xxx-xxxx
0-xxx-xxx-xxxx
1-xxx-xxx-xxxx
1-800-xxx-xxxx
1-888-xxx-xxxx
xxx-xxx-xxxx

autopatch OFF (disabled)
accepted numbers only (see page 7-38)
operator
7-digit local call
7-digit operator-assisted/credit card call
7-digit long distance call
10-digit operator-assisted/credit card call
10-digit long distance call
toll free call

10-digit local call

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Autopatch is OFF (disabled), no calls permitted.

7-36

Telephone Interface Functions
Examples:
To turn the autopatch OFF (disabled), enter the following:
(PW) 60 *
To permit only accepted numbers, operator calls, and 7-digit local calls, enter
the following:
(PW) 60 0 1 2 *
In the above example, the 0 would not have to be entered, since the 1 or 2
already permits accepted numbers. To permit all 9 types of calls, enter the
following:
(PW) 60 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 *

7-37

7K • Chapter 7

Autopatch Restrictions
A feature of the autopatch is the ability to restrict calls to certain groups of
telephone numbers. This is done by building two tables in the controller’s
memory:
• An Accepted Number Table.
• A Rejected Number Table.

Note: Since these tables are only resident in memory, neither appear in this
manual. Programmers of the repeater may wish to keep a notebook of
accepted and rejected numbers.
Each time an autopatch call is placed, the telephone number is compared to
both tables. A decision is then made to allow—or not allow—the call to go
through.
Both the Accepted and Rejected Number Tables may contain specific
telephone numbers, or telephone numbers with “wild card” characters. This
feature allows groups of accepted or rejected numbers to be compared to the
number being dialed.

Uses of Autopatch Restrictions
There are many uses for autopatch restrictions:
•
•
•

•

7-38

Certain troublesome numbers can be placed in the Rejected Number Table
using the command on page 7-42, and will not be dialed by either entering
the number via command or via macros.
Commercial phone numbers could be restricted and “hints” could be made
to unpaid members.
In major cities, it is possible to place a long-distance call to another
exchange by dialing a simple 7-digit number. To prevent the repeater phone
line from accumulating monthly long-distance charges, simply place the
local exchange numbers in the Accepted Number Table. Program the
Select Autopatch Call Types for only accepted numbers. (See page 7-36.)
In some areas, important numbers (such as police or ambulance) require a
long-distance call. Since the owner may not want to open the repeater to all
long-distance calls, he may simply program those few important numbers
into the Accepted Number Table. Other long-distance calls will not be
permitted if the Autopatch Call Types Table does not include them. (See
Autopatch Call Types section on page 7-35 and the Select Autopatch Call
Types command on page 7-36.)
Since the Autopatch Call Types Table does not include all types of calls
which might exist, the autopatch restrictions feature may be used again. For
example, some areas of the county have 911 emergency service. The

Telephone Interface Functions
Select Autopatch Call Types command does not have a category for threedigit numbers, so 911 may be placed into the Accepted Number Table using
the command on page 7-40.

7-39

7K • Chapter 7

Clear (or Enter) Accepted Number Table
Clears ALL accepted numbers from the Accepted Number Table—
or—enters an accepted number into same.
•
•
•
•
•
•

The Accepted Number Table exists only in the controller’s memory. As
such, there is no printing of it in this manual.
Up to 40 entries are permitted.
One phone number up to 18 digits long may be entered in each command.
The phone number may be a specific number or it may contain the “A”
character as a wild card.
To clear the Accepted Number Table, enter nothing after the 68 root
number.
To insert the phone number into the Accepted Number Table, enter the
phone number after the 68.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Clear All Accepted Numbers From Table
Enter Accepted Number Into Table

(PW) 68 *
(PW) 68 (phone number) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2
? full

too many digits entered (more than 18)
illegal character entered (B, C, or D)
table is full

Default Condition: Accepted Number Table is empty
Examples
Two telephone numbers, 911 and 234-5678, are to be accepted numbers. To
add them to the Accepted Number Table, enter the following:
(PW) 68 911 *
(PW) 68 234 5678 *

7-40

Telephone Interface Functions
Note: Only the phone number goes into the table, not the autopatch access
password plus the phone number. Two commands are needed, since only one
phone number may be entered at a time. These numbers will not be permitted
if the autopatch is completely OFF (disabled). At least one of the autopatch call
types must be selected if accepted numbers are to be permitted.
Now assume that all numbers in are code 414 are to be accepted. To
accomplish this enter the following:
(PW) 68 1 414 AAA AAAA *
The autopatch will now accept 1-(414)-000-0000 through 1-(414)-999-9999.
The “A” in the above example is used as a wild card to specify any number 0–9
is accepted.

7-41

7K • Chapter 7

Clear (or Enter) Rejected Number Table
Clears ALL rejected numbers from the Rejected Number Table—
or— enters a rejected number into same.
•
•
•
•
•
•

The Rejected Number Table exists only in the controller’s memory. As such,
there is no printing of it in this manual.
Up to 40 entries are permitted.
One phone number up to 18 digits long may be entered in each command.
The phone number may be a specific number or it may contain the A
character as a wild card.
To clear the Rejected Number Table, enter nothing after the 67 root
number.
To insert the phone number into the Rejected Number Table, enter the
phone number after the 67.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Clear All Rejected Numbers From Table
Enter Rejected Number Into Table

(PW) 67 *
(PW) 67 (phone number) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2
? full

too many digits entered (more than 18)
illegal character entered (B, C, or D)
table is full

Default Condition: Rejected Number Table is empty
Examples:
Two telephone numbers, 345-6789 and 987-6543, are not permitted to be
dialed. To place them into the Rejected Number Table, enter the following:
(PW) 67 345 6789 *
(PW) 67 987 6543 *

7-42

Telephone Interface Functions
Note: Only the phone number goes into the table, not the autopatch access
password plus the phone number. Two command entries are needed, since
only one phone number may be entered at a time.
Now assume that all numbers in the 246 exchange are to be rejected. To
accomplish this, enter the following:
(PW) 67 246 AAAA *
The “A” is used as a wild card to specify any number 0–9 is rejected. After this
command is entered, the autopatch will reject any call to a 7-digit number with
246 exchange (246-0000) through (246-9999).

7-43

7K • Chapter 7

Autopatch Redialer
The Autopatch Redialer feature uses the Redial Last Number command (on
page 7-45) and allows you to redial an autopatch call without entering the
entire command over again. This is particularly useful if the number you called
was busy, or a no-answer, or if you forgot to mention something to the called
party.
The Redial Last Number command works up to 30 minutes from the time the
last call was placed. If more than 30 minutes have elapsed, the controller will
send CLR (dialer cleared). The 30 minute autopatch redialer timer will be reset
at each redial attempt.

Note: It is recommended that users do not use the Redial Last Number
command if they have not been monitoring the repeater for a while, since
another call may have been placed since their call.
The Clear Autopatch Redialer command (page 7-46) may be used after the
autopatch call is made to clear the dialer memory. This ensures that no user
can redial the last number, and protects the original caller (and called party)
from potential troublemakers.
Dialer memory is also cleared during either a warm or cold start, and when the
Select Autopatch Call Types command (page 7-36) changes the selected call
type.
Macros which have been created for autopatch “express dialing” also leave a
number in the dialer memory. Therefore, entering a Redial Last Number
command following one of these macros will result in a call to the express
dialed party.
An attempt to access the autopatch that is not successful—such as dialing a
long-distance number which is rejected—will not clear the autopatch redialer. It
also will not affect the autopatch redialer timer.

7-44

Telephone Interface Functions

Redial Last Number
Redials the last valid number entered into the autopatch.
•
•
•
•

The Redial Last Number command works up to 30 minutes from the time
the last call was placed.
If more than 30 minutes have elapsed, the controller will send CLR (dialer
cleared) at each redial attempt.
The 30 minute autopatch redialer timer will be reset at each redial.
Do not use the Redial Last Number command if you have not been
monitoring the repeater for a while, since another call may have been
placed since your last call.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Redial Last Number

(PW) 84 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default Condition: Autopatch Redialer memory is cleared

7-45

7K • Chapter 7

Clear Autopatch Redialer
Clears the Autopatch Redialer memory after an autopatch call.
•

After this command is executed, entering the Redial Last Number command
on page 7-45 causes the controller to send CLR. The number will not be
dialed.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Clear Autopatch Redialer

(PW) 85 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default Condition: Autopatch Redialer memory is cleared

7-46

Telephone Interface Functions

Autopatch Call Counter
The Autopatch Call Counter keeps track of the number of autopatch calls
attempted. A call is attempted if the controller accepts the phone number as
being valid and begins to dial.
•
•
•
•

The call counter starts at 000 and increments by one for each call. After
reaching 999 calls, the counter will start over at 000.
The counter may be read in CW by entering the Send Autopatch Call Count
command on page 7-49. The counter may be cleared (forced to 000) by
entering the Clear Autopatch Call Counter command on page 7-48.
The counter value may also be included in a CW or speech message. (See
page 4-35.)
Uses for the call counter include monitoring autopatch activity, and reducing
the activity in cases where there are monthly limits on the number of calls
allowed.

7-47

7K • Chapter 7

Clear Autopatch Call Counter
Clears the Autopatch Call Counter.
•

Enter the command in the form below.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Clear Autopatch Call Counter

(PW) 69 *

Acknowledgment: Sends “CALLS 000” in CW
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: Autopatch Call Counter is set to 000.

7-48

Telephone Interface Functions

Send Autopatch Call Count
Sends the Autopatch Call Count in CW
•
•

Enter the command in the form below.
The Autopatch Call Count can also be included in a message and sent in
either CW or Speech. (See page 4-35.)

Command Form:
Command

Form

Send Autopatch Call Count

(PW) 86 *

Acknowledgment: Sends “CALLS xxx” in CW
Errors: None
Default Condition: Autopatch Call Counter is set to 000.
Example:
Assume that fifteen autopatch calls have been made to date. Enter the
following command:
(PW) 86 *
The following CW message will be sent in response:
CALLS 015

7-49

7K • Chapter 7

Phone Line Control Mode
Phone Line Busy Input
The Phone Line Busy Input is used to inform the controller that the phone line
is being used by another device, and that it should not access the line. This
input is normally held high by a pullup resistor. When this input is pulled down
to ground by an external device, it is asserted active.
If a “line relay” is connected to a standard telephone, its contacts can “busyout” the controller when the telephone is picked up.
The controller will ignore ringing on the phone line when the phone line busy
input is active. This feature is necessary, since the controller may be sharing
the phone line with a rotary phone. The rotary phone, when dialed, creates
interruptions in the phone line voltage which appear as ringing signals to the
controller. Such activity could cause the controller to go off-hook.

Phone Line Busy Output
The controller activates the Phone Line Busy Output during autopatches and
phone line control sessions to inform other devices at the repeater site that the
phone line is in use.
The Phone Line Busy Output is an open-drain power MOSFET device and may
be used the same way as logic outputs.
If several controllers are sharing the same phone line, connect all of the Phone
Line Busy Inputs and Phone Line Busy Outputs together. The first controller to
access the phone line will “busy-out” the remaining controllers.

Phone Line Answer Modes
Mode programs the controller for the way you want it to operate when it
receives incoming ringing signals from the phone company. Mode is single digit
0 to 4.
Mode 0
This is the Do Not Answer Mode.
Mode 1
After a delay of 00–99 incoming rings, begin ringout for reverse patch at a rate

7-50

Telephone Interface Functions
of 1 ringout message for each incoming ring. If answered by a mobile, connect.
If unanswered by the ringout limit of 00–99 rings, ignore further incoming
ringing.
In Mode 1, the controller does not connect the calling party to the mobile until
the mobile answers the call. The calling party hears only the ringback until
actually connected to a mobile. Setting the ring-in delay to zero means that the
ringout begins on the first incoming ring; a delay of 1 means that the ringout
begins after delaying one ring, or at the beginning of the second incoming ring.
Setting the ringout limit to zero is the same as putting the controller into Mode
0; it can’t ring out with a zero limit, so it will appear to ignore incoming ringing.
Mode 2
After a delay of 00–99 incoming rings, begin ringout for reverse patch at a rate
of 1 ringout message for each incoming ring. If answered by a mobile, connect.
If unanswered by the ringout limit of 00–99 rings, connect and go into phone
line control mode. Commands may be entered for 40 seconds. The line will
then disconnect unless the Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer command (on
page 7-57) is used to extend the timer.
This mode behaves the same as Mode 1, except that the controller will allow
access to the phone line when the ringout limit is reached. While in phone line
control mode, another reverse patch command could be entered if desired.
Setting the ringout limit to zero is the same as putting the controller in Mode 3;
it can’t ring out with a zero limit, so it will go into phone line control mode after
the delay is finished.
Mode 3
After a delay of 00–99 incoming rings, connect and go into phone line control
mode. Commands may be entered for 40 seconds. The phone line will
disconnect unless the Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer command (page
7-57) is used to extend the timer.
Setting the ring-in delay to zero means the controller will answer on the first
incoming ring; a delay of 1 means the controller will answer after delaying one
ring, or on the second ring. The ringout limit serves to set the number of
ringouts if the Trigger Reverse Patch command (page 7-60) is entered. If the
ringout limit is set to zero, the line will disconnect when a Trigger Reverse
Patch command is entered.
Mode 4
After a delay of 00–99 incoming rings, connect and go into phone line control
mode. The controller will look for DTMF digits; if no digits are received in 40
seconds, begin ringout for reverse patch at the rate of one ringout message
every 6 seconds. If answered by a mobile, connect. If unanswered by the
ringout limit of 00–99 rings, disconnect. If DTMF digits are received in the first
10 seconds, go into phone line control mode. The controller will not ring out for
the reverse patch. Commands may be entered for 10 seconds. The phone line
will then disconnect unless the Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer command is
used to extend the timer.

7-51

7K • Chapter 7
Note: When the phone line is in a phone line control mode, you have 40
seconds to either enter your command(s) or “buy” more time. A short
command can easily be entered in the 40 seconds allowed. However, if you
have several programming jobs to do, be sure to enter the Select Phone Line
Off-Hook Timer command (page 7-57) to prevent the controller from hanging
up during programming. The Phone line timer can be reloaded at any time. If
you ask for a lot of time, be sure to dump the call when you have finished
programming. If you simply hang up, the controller will keep the phone off-hook
until the timer expires. No autopatch, reverse patch, or control by phone line
operations can occur while the phone line timer runs.

Ring-In Delay
Ring-In Delay is a two-digit number representing the number of rings the
controller ignores before performing operations. One of the benefits of having
ring-in delay is that it allows someone to pick up the phone if there is a phone
in parallel with the controller. If, for example, a maintenance phone line at a
radio or TV transmitter site can be used for repeater control purposes, you
want to be sure that the site owner can pick up the phone before the controller
goes off-hook. If no one picks up the phone after, say, 8 rings, the controller
can assume that the call is for it. Ring-in delay can be programmed from 00 to
99 rings.

Ringout Limit
Ringout Limit is a two-digit number representing the number of times the
controller may send the Reverse Patch Ringout Message (See the Reverse
Patch section on page 7-59.) Placing a limit on reverse patch ringout messages
prevents the annoyance of too many messages on a busy repeater. The
ringout limit can be programmed from 00 to 99 rings. If a control operator is
programming the controller, for example, and then triggers the reverse patch by
command, the number of ringouts will be set by the ringout limit value
previously commanded.

7-52

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Phone Line Answer Mode
Selects one of the Phone Line Answer Modes (and associated
Ring-In Delay and Ringout Limit).
•
•
•
•

Mode 0 is for “do not answer.”
Modes 1–4 are fully discussed in the Phone Line Answer Modes section on
page 7-50.
Ring-in delay is 00 to 99 rings.
Ringout limit is 00 to 99 rings.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Phone Line Answer Mode (Do Not
Answer Only)
Select Phone Line Answer Mode

(PW) 64 x *

x = 0 (do not answer)

(PW) 64 x yy zz *

x = mode 1–4
see page 7-50
y = ring-in delay
(00–99)
= (00–99) rings
z = ringout limit
(00–99)
= (00–99) rings

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Mode = 3, Ring-In Delay = 2, Ringout Limit = 10

7-53

7K • Chapter 7

Select (Review) Phone Line Answer Message
Allows selection (or review) of the message that the controller
sends when it answers the phone line.
•

The message is sent to the caller.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Phone Line Answer Message
Review Phone Line Answer Message

(PW) 31 50 (message) *
(PW) 34 50 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Sends 3 Beeps

7-54

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Phone Line Answer Macro
Assigns macro to be triggered when the controller answers the
phone line (Phone Line Answer Modes 2, 3, and 4).
•
•
•

Enter the 4-digit macro name desired.
Use leading zeros if needed.
To delete the Phone Line Answer Macro, enter the command with no macro
name [i.e., (PW) 26 16 *].

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Phone Line Answer Macro

(PW) 26 16 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

too many digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macro is assigned to this function
Example:
If macro 1234 is to be executed when the controller answers the phone line
(modes 2, 3, or 4), the command is:
(PW) 26 16 1234 *

7-55

7K • Chapter 7

Select Control Mode Dump-Triggered Macro
Assigns a macro to be executed upon dumping the patch in Phone
Line Control Mode.
•
•

Enter the 4-digit macro name using leading zeroes if the macro name is
less than 4 digits.
To delete the assignment, enter the command with no macro name.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Control Mode Dump-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 81 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macro assigned.
Note: The Phone Line Control Mode Dump-Triggered Macro will be executed if
the patch “times out” while in Phone Line Control Mode.
Example:
This command makes the patch much more flexible. The dump macro can be
used to change messages, logic outputs, or to send a message.
To assign macro 9001 to execute when the patch is dumped from Phone Line
Control Mode, enter the following:
(PW) 26 81 9001 *

7-56

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer
Reloads the phone line off-hook timer.
If you will be programming the controller and will need about ten minutes to do
the work, you may reload the timer for the required ten minutes. The timer may
be reloaded at any time after that, as well. Do not load the timer for very long
times unless you need them. If the phone line should become disconnected,
the controller will remain off-hook for the duration of the timer.
•
•
•
•
•

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer

(PW) 79 xxx *

000 = infinity
(001–546) =
(0.1–54.6) minutes

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: 40 seconds

7-57

7K • Chapter 7

Monitor/Talk Out Via Phone
Allows the control operator to monitor or join the repeater
conversation.
•
•
•
•
•

These features are accessible from the phone line when in Phone Line
Control Mode.
Multiple receivers can be selected simultaneously. Audio will be routed by
priority. Select the priority using the Select Audio Routing Priority command
described on page 13-3.
Both transmitters can be selected simultaneously. Audio will be routed to
both transmitters.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).
When the autopatch is dumped, all Monitor/Talk Out paths are disabled.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Monitor Receiver #1 (Rx1)

(PW) 63 23 x *

Monitor Receiver #2 (Rx2)

(PW) 63 24 x *

Monitor Receiver #3 (Rx3)

(PW) 63 25 x *

Talk Out Transmitter #1 (Tx1)

(PW) 63 26 x *

Talk Out Transmitter #2 (Tx2)

(PW) 63 27 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: All paths are disabled.
Examples:
The telephone caller (control operator) retains the DTMF decoder when
monitoring or talking out. The Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer command
controls the length of the session (see page 7-57). You may monitor one or
more receivers then enable and disable talk out on one or both transmitters
during a conversation on the repeater.

7-58

Telephone Interface Functions

Reverse Patch
The Reverse Patch feature allows users to dial a number for the repeater site,
and be connected to a repeater user. The reverse patch can be used in two
ways. The controller can signal via a CW message that a user has dialed the
site, or the controller can wait for a command from the telephone party before
signalling via CW.
In the first mode, the telephone party never has access to the DTMF decoder.
The only function that a call to the site number possesses is to trigger a
reverse patch signal.
In the second mode, the telephone party is similar to a control operator. He/she
will be able to enter any command. To trigger a reverse patch, the proper
command will have to be entered from a Touch Tone™ telephone.
The first mode may be necessary in several situations. For example, in areas
without Touch Tone™ service, the controller will have to be configured to
trigger a reverse patch without requiring a command. Other exchanges reverse
the polarity of the telephone line loop voltage going to the telephone set after
the dialing process; this disables the DTMF encoder in the telephone. These
situations can be fixed by using a separate DTMF encoder in the first case, and
using a bridge rectifier to feed unipolar DC to the DTMF encoder in the second
case. However, it will still be difficult to trigger the Reverse Patch from a pay
phone, or a phone not equipped with DTMF capability, in rotary exchanges.

7-59

7K • Chapter 7

Trigger Reverse Patch
Causes the reverse patch sequence to start when entered from the
phone line.
•

The DTMF decoder is switched from the phone line back to the repeater
receiver.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Trigger Reverse Patch

(PW) 87 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default: Reverse Patch is OFF (disabled)

7-60

Telephone Interface Functions

Answer Reverse Patch
Connects the telephone party to the repeater when entered from
the repeater receiver.
•

The call progresses the same way as a standard autopatch.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Answer Reverse Patch

(PW) 88 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default: Reverse Patch is OFF (disabled)

7-61

7K • Chapter 7

Select (Review) Reverse Patch Ringout Message
This message is sent over the repeater transmitter when the Trigger
Reverse Patch command is invoked.
•
•

The message is repeated at each ring, or at timed intervals, by the reverse
patch program.
Do not make the message too long, to prevent messages from becoming
stacked up in the message handler.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Reverse Patch Ringout Message
Review Reverse Patch Ringout Message

(PW) 31 51 (message) *
(PW) 34 51 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Reverse Patch Ringout Message Is “55” In CW

7-62

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Reverse Patch Ring-Triggered Macro
Assigns a macro to be executed at the end of each ring on the
phone line.
•
•
•

This macro is repeated at each ring by the reverse patch program.
Enter the 4-digit macro name using leading zeroes if the macro name is
less than 4 digits.
To delete the assignment, enter the command with no macro name.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Ring-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 80 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macro assigned.
Example:
To assign macro 9001 to execute at each ring, enter the following:
(PW) 26 80 9001 *

7-63

7K • Chapter 7

Multiple Port Access
The Autopatch can be configured for access by multiple controller ports.
These ports can be linked or operating separately. Because of the highly
flexible nature of the S-COM command set, a number of commands must be
entered to configure the Autopatch for access by multiple ports. If dynamic
reconfiguration is required, several macros must be created that properly
reconfigure the autopatch as paths are changed.
The default configuration of the Autopatch is the same as it was in firmware
versions before V2.03:
•
•
•
•

Autopatch commands can be entered from any port.
Autopatch command response messages, eg. Access, Dump, Busy,
Error, go only to transmitter #1.
Audio to the phone line comes only from receiver #1.
Audio from the phone line goes only to transmitter #1.

If this is your intended configuration, you don’t need to make any of the
configuration changes described in this section. Proceed to configure access
for multiple ports.
In order to properly accept commands from multiple receivers and to route
autopatch audio and response messages to both transmitters, several new
commands have been defined:
•
•
•

7-64

Additional link paths have been defined for all receivers and both
transmitters. See the Enable/Disable Path command on page 13-2.
Autopatch response messages, eg. Access, Dump, Busy, Error, are
now routable to either or both transmitters. See Select Autopatch
Command Response Message Routing on page 7-68.
Autopatch access-triggered macros are now specific to each receiver.
The original access-triggered macro is executed when a receiverspecific macro has not been defined. See Select Autopatch AccessTriggered Macro on page 7-67.

Telephone Interface Functions

Autopatch Audio Routing
By default, the path from receiver #1 to the autopatch and the path from the
autopatch to transmitter #1 are enabled. To change the audio paths, use the
Enable/Disable Path command (see page 13-2).
For example, to allow audio from receivers #1 and #2 to be heard on the phone
line, enable paths 8 and 9 by entering the following commands:
(PW)63 87 1 *
(PW)63 88 1 *

; Rx1 to AP Enabled
; Rx2 to AP Enabled

To allow phone line audio to be heard on transmitters #1 and #2, enable
paths 10 and 11 by entering the following commands:
(PW)63 90 1 *
(PW)63 91 1 *

; AP to Tx1 Enabled
; AP to Tx2 Enabled

To allow audio from only receiver #2 to be heard on the phone line, disable
path 8 and enable path 9 by entering the following commands:
(PW)63 87 0 *
(PW)63 88 1 *

; Rx1 to AP Disabled
; Rx2 to AP Enabled

To allow phone line audio to be heard only on transmitter #2, disable path 10
and enable path 11 by entering the following commands:
(PW)63 90 0 *
(PW)63 91 1 *

; AP to Tx1 Disabled
; AP to Tx2 Enabled

If your configuration never changes, you may enter the commands once to set
up the routing that you require. If your configuration will change, you should
create macros to enable and disable the appropriate paths (see examples later
in this section).

Autopatch Command Response Message Routing
By default, when the autopatch is accessed, the Autopatch Dialing Message
(see page 7-7) is routed to transmitter #1. When the autopatch is dumped, the
Autopatch Dump Message (see page 7-9) is routed to transmitter #1. In a
system that is configured to operate ports Rx1/Tx1 and Rx2/Tx2 separately,
the autopatch message should go back to the port that originated the
command. Otherwise, the users on the other port could become confused by
an autopatch that appears to come up by itself. If ports Rx1/Tx1 and Rx2/Tx2
are linked, the autopatch messages should go out both ports. The Select
Autopatch Command Response Message Routing command (see page 7-68)
selects the routing of these messages.
For example, to route command responses to both transmitters, enter the
following commands:
(PW) 91 00 12 * ; Rx1 AP Resp Msgs to Tx1 and Tx2
(PW) 91 01 12 * ; Rx2 AP Resp Msgs to Tx1 and Tx2

7-65

7K • Chapter 7
To route receiver #1 command responses to transmitter #1 and receiver #2
command responses to transmitter #2, enter the following commands:
(PW) 91 00 1 * ; Rx1 AP Resp Msgs to Tx1
(PW) 91 01 2 * ; Rx2 AP Resp Msgs to Tx2

Receiver-Specific Autopatch Access
In order to be able to set up the audio routing properly, receiver-specific
access-triggered macros have been defined (see page 7-69). These macros
are executed when the autopatch is accessed from a specific receiver. If a
receiver-specific access-triggered macro is not defined, the original accesstriggered macro, now the default, is executed (see page 7-16).
When the Rx1/Tx1 and Rx2/Tx2 ports are linked together and you don’t intend
to have the users be able to link and delink the ports, you can just configure
the paths as defined in the section above.
When the ports are not linked, you need to define separate macros for
receiver #1 and receiver #2. These macros will configure the audio routing for
autopatch access from each port. To setup the routing for receiver #1, enter
the following commands:
(PW)
(PW)
(PW)
(PW)
(PW)

20
29
29
29
26

9000 (PW)
9000 (PW)
9000 (PW)
9000 (PW)
75 9000 *

63
63
63
63

87
90
88
91

1
1
0
0

*
*
*
*

; Rx1 to AP
; AP to Tx1
; Rx2 to AP
; AP to Tx2
; Assign Rx1

Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Macro

To setup the routing for receiver #2, enter the following commands:
(PW)
(PW)
(PW)
(PW)
(PW)

20
29
29
29
26

9001 (PW)
9001 (PW)
9001 (PW)
9001 (PW)
76 9001 *

63
63
63
63

88
91
87
90

1
1
0
0

*
*
*
*

; Rx2 to AP
; AP to Tx2
; Rx1 to AP
; AP to Tx1
; Assign Rx2

Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Macro

Preventing Multiple Accesses
When Rx1/Tx1 and Rx2/Tx2 are not linked, it is important to prevent an
autopatch in progress on one port from being interrupted by an access on the
other port. The Require Dump Before Next Call command configures this
option (see page 7-21). To prevent this access, enter the following command:
(PW) 63 10 1 * ;Require Dump Before Next Call

7-66

Telephone Interface Functions

Select Autopatch Receiver-Specific Access-Triggered
Macros
Assigns macros to be executed upon accessing the autopatch from
a specific receiver.
•
•
•
•
•

Each receiver can be assigned its own access-triggered macro.
If a macro is not assigned for a specific receiver, the default
access-triggered macro is executed (see page 7-10).
Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the 4-digit name of the
macro you wish to have executed at the transition, and the (*).
If the macro name has fewer than 4 digits, enter leading zeros.
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Rx1 Autopatch Access-Triggered
Macro
Assign Rx2 Autopatch Access-Triggered
Macro
Assign Rx3 Autopatch Access-Triggered
Macro

(PW) 26 75 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 76 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 77 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned.

7-67

7K • Chapter 7

Select Autopatch Command Response Message
Routing
Allows programmer to specify where to route autopatch command
response messages by receiver.
•
•
•

Each receiver can be assigned its command response message routing
when accessing the autopatch.
This command affects the Dialing, Dump, Off, Busy, Reject, Error, and
No-Redial-Number messages. (See pages 7-6, 7-51, and 7-52.)
Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and 1 or 2 digits representing
the transmitters to play command responses messages, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Rx1 Autopatch Command Response
Message Routing
Select Rx2 Autopatch Command Response
Message Routing
Select Rx3 Autopatch Command Response
Message Routing

(PW) 91 00 x x *

1 = Tx1
2 = Tx2
1 = Tx1
2 = Tx2
1 = Tx1
2 = Tx2

(PW) 91 01 x x *
(PW) 91 02 x x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned.

7-68

Clock and Calendar

Chapter 8

Clock and
Calendar
The Controller features a year 2000-compliant hardware real-time clock and
calendar circuit with a lithium power source. Accurate time keeping is
maintained during loss of main power.
To announce the time or date, you place special codes called Message RunTime Variables into messages. See page 4-35 for more information.
The clock and calendar circuit is accurate to ±1 minute per month. For
improved accuracy, commands are provided to manually or automatically
adjust the clock to compensate for drift.

8-1

7K • Chapter 8

Set Clock and Calendar
Sets the clock and calendar.
•
•
•
•
•

Enter all parameters shown below each time that you set the Clock and
Calendar.
All parameters consist of two digits except the day-of-week, which is one
digit.
The year parameter is needed for leap year correction.
The clock and calendar is set when you release the (*) button.
Seconds are automatically set to 00.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Set Clock and Calendar

(PW) 25 (year,
month, day-of-month,
day-of-week, hour,
minute)*

from table below

Data Digit

Explanation

00-99
01-12 (January is 01)
01-31
0-6 (Sunday is 0)
00-23 (24-hour format)
00-59

year
month
day-of-month
day-of-week
hour
minute

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal parameter:
any lettered key;
month = 00 or greater than 12;
day-of-month = 0 or greater than 31;
day-of-week greater than 6;
hour greater than 23;
minute greater than 59.

Default Condition: 00:00:00 on Wednesday, January 1, 1993.

8-2

Clock and Calendar
Example:
Let’s set the clock to 6:02 PM on Saturday, March 21, 1992.
The year is 92, the month is 03, the day-of-month is 21, the day-of-week is 6,
the hour is 18, and the minute is 02. The entire command is:
(PW) 25 92 03 21 6 18 02 *

8-3

7K • Chapter 8

Adjust Daylight Savings Time
Forces the clock to add, or subtract, 1-hour.
•
•
•
•

This command simplifies the semiannual job of resetting the clock for
customers affected by Daylight Savings Time. Instead of resetting the
entire clock and calendar, use this command to add or subtract one hour.
Don’t use the “fall back” command between midnight and 00:59 AM.
Otherwise, the hour will change to 23 (11:xx PM), but the day won’t roll
back. You will gain another day at midnight.
Don’t use the “spring ahead” command between 11:00 PM and midnight.
Otherwise, the hour will change to 00, but the day won’t roll forward. You
will lose a day.
If you are using the Scheduler to automatically “fall back”, use the version of
the “fall back” command with the inhibit. This prevents the scheduler from
executing the command more than once.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Adjust Daylight Savings Time

(PW) 48 x *

0 = “fall back”
(subtract 1 from
hours)
1 = “spring ahead”
(add 1 to hours)
2 = “fall back”
prevented from
being executed a
second time for 61
minutes.

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None

8-4

Clock and Calendar
Example:
To manually set the clock 1-hour ahead, enter the command:
(PW) 48 1 *
To automatically set the clock 1-hour ahead on March 30, 1997, at 2 AM using
the Scheduler, create a macro (9000 for this example) and a Scheduler
setpoint (00 for this example):
(PW) 20 9000 MPW 48 1 *
(PW) 28 00 9000 03 30 02 00 *
To manually set the clock 1-hour behind, enter the command:
(PW) 48 0 *
To automatically set the clock 1-hour behind on October 26, 1997, at 2 AM
using the Scheduler, create a macro (9001 for this example) and a Scheduler
setpoint (01 for this example):
(PW) 20 9001 MPW 48 2 *
(PW) 28 01 9001 10 26 02 00 *

Note: See Chapter 9, Scheduler, for more information on setting a Scheduler
setpoint.

8-5

7K • Chapter 8

Reset Clock Seconds
Forces the clock to set the seconds to zero.
•
•
•
•

This command simplifies the periodic synchronization of the clock to a time
reference, either manually or automatically.
If the seconds of the clock are ahead of the time reference by 1 to 29
seconds, the seconds will be reset to zero.
If the seconds of the clock are behind the time reference by 1 to 30
seconds, the seconds will be reset to zero and the minute and hour will be
incremented, if required.
Don’t use this command between 11:59 PM and 00:01 AM. Otherwise, the
time will be adjusted, but the day will be wrong.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Reset Clock Seconds

(PW) 48 3 *

Data Digit

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: None
Example:
To manually reset the seconds of the clock, enter the command:
(PW) 48 3 *
When entering the command, press and hold the star (*) at the end of the command.
Release the star when your time reference signals its zero mark. This will zero the
seconds of the clock in synchronization with your time reference.
To automatically reset the seconds of the clock from external hardware, connect the
hardware to a Logic Input. Create a macro (9000 in this example) and assign it to a
Logic Input (the Hi-To-Low transition of #1 in this example):
(PW) 20 9000 (PW) 48 3 *
(PW) 26 20 9000 *

Note: See Chapter 14, Logic Inputs, for more information on using Logic
Inputs.

8-6

Clock and Calendar

Adjust Clock Seconds
Forces the clock to add or subtract seconds.
•
•
•
•
•

This command simplifies the periodic synchronization of the clock without a
time reference.
This command is usually used with the Scheduler to allow the controller to
adjust its own time.
Don’t use this command between 11:59 PM and 00:01 AM. Otherwise, the
time will be adjusted, but the day will be wrong.
Use the Message Run-Time Variable 9816, “Seconds, CW”, or 9832
“Seconds, male voice” to check the amount of correction required.
If you are using the Scheduler to automatically subtract seconds from the
clock, use the version of the Subtract Clock Seconds command with the
inhibit. This prevents the scheduler from executing the command more
than once.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Add Clock Seconds

(PW) 48 4 (seconds)
*
(PW) 48 5 (seconds)
(PW) 48 6 (seconds)

Subtract Clock Seconds
Subtract Clock Seconds, Inhibited For 2
Minutes

Data Digit

01-30 seconds
01-30 seconds
01-30 seconds

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None
Example:
Using the Scheduler, the accuracy of the clock over long periods of time can be
improved. To know how much adjustment will be required, use the Reset
Clock Seconds command to manually synchronize the clock to a time
reference. A week later, enter the command to speak the seconds, for
example:
(PW) 15 9832 *

8-7

7K • Chapter 8
When entering the command, press and hold the star (*) at the end of the
command. Release the star when your time reference signals its zero mark.
This will cause the controller to speak the seconds reading on the clock at that
time.
Note the amount that the clock is off from the reference. This is the amount of
drift in the clock over a week. Take these readings each week at
approximately the same time to understand the amount of drift.
Since the adjustment commands will only adjust the clock up to 29 seconds
ahead or 30 seconds behind, you will need to set a Scheduler setpoint that
occurs when the drift is less than that. Once-a-week or once-a-month may be
appropriate depending on your situation.
To automatically adjust the seconds of the clock (subtract 7 seconds for this
example) on the first Monday of every month at 2:00 AM using the Scheduler,
create a macro (9000 for this example) and a Scheduler setpoint (00 for this
example):
(PW) 20 9000 MPW 48 6 07 *
(PW) 28 00 9000 99 42 02 00 *
Note that the ambient temperature that the controller is subjected to may
change the amount, and direction, of the clock drift. You may need to change
the adjustment at different times of the year.

Note: See Chapter 9, Scheduler, for more information on setting a Scheduler
setpoint.

8-8

Scheduler

Chapter 9

Scheduler
The 7K Controller features a powerful Scheduler program which accepts up to
100 time/date Setpoints. Each setpoint can be programmed to execute a
macro based on the month, day-of-month, day-of-week, hour, and minute of
the real-time clock and calendar, eg. midnight, December 31st. Wildcards can
be used to program recurring setpoints, eg. 9:00 AM on the first Saturday of
each month.
The setpoints are compared to the real-time clock/calendar at the start of each
new minute. If a match is found, the setpoint’s accompanying Macro command
is executed.
Since the real-time clock has a lithium power source, time-keeping is not
affected by loss of main power.
Leap years are automatically adjusted. The real-time clock and Scheduler are
Year-2000 compliant.

9-1

7K • Chapter 9

Create a Setpoint
Loads a setpoint into the Scheduler program.
•
•

•

You must enter all parameters required by this command. You may force
the scheduler to ignore the month, day, hour, or minute by entering the
wildcard code, 99, for that particular parameter.
The Scheduler supports 100 setpoints numbered 00 through 99. You may
create up to 10 setpoints which execute at the same minute. If more than
one setpoint executes at the same minute, the setpoints will be executed
with the lowest numbered setpoint first, the next higher setpoint second,
and so on.
If the controller loses main power, time-keeping will continue, however,
setpoints will not be executed, since the microprocessor will be down.
Setpoints missed during the power failure will not be executed when power
returns.

Command Form:

9-2

Command

Form

Data Digit

Create setpoint

(PW) 28 (setpoint
number, macro,
month, day, hour,
minute) *

from table below.
(Use Day Code Table
for day parameter.)

Data Digits

Explanation

00-99
xxxx
01-12 or 99
01-68 or 99
00-23 or 99
00-59 or 99

setpoint number, two digits
macro, 4 digits
month, 2 digits or wildcard
day, 2 digits (see Day Code Table, page 9-3.)
hour, 2 digits or wildcard
minute, 2 digits or wildcard

Scheduler

Scheduler Day Code Table
Day Code

Explanation

Day Code

Explanation

01-31

calendar day-of-month

2nd Saturday of month

weekdays (Mon-Fri)

3rd Sunday of month

weekends (Sat-Sun)

3rd Monday of month

Sundays

3rd Tuesday of month

Mondays

3rd Wednesday of month

Tuesdays

3rd Thursday of month

Wednesdays

3rd Friday of month

Thursdays

3rd Saturday of month

Fridays

4th Sunday of month

Saturdays

4th Monday of month

1st Sunday of month

4th Tuesday of month

1st Monday of month

4th Wednesday of month

1st Tuesday of month

4th Thursday of month

1st Wednesday of month

4th Friday of month

1st Thursday of month

4th Saturday of month

1st Friday of month

5th Sunday of month

1st Saturday of month

5th Monday of month

2nd Sunday of month

5th Tuesday of month

2nd Monday of month

5th Wednesday of month

2nd Tuesday of month

5th Thursday of month

2nd Wednesday of month

5th Friday of month

2nd Thursday of month

5th Saturday of month

2nd Friday of month

every day (wild card)

9-3

7K • Chapter 9
Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No setpoints exist.
Example:
To execute macro 1234 every hour, on the hour, every day, every month, enter
the following:
(PW) 28 00 1234 99 99 99 00 *

(Setpoint 00)

To execute macro 1234 every day at 6:15 AM, every month, enter the
following:
(PW) 28 01 1234 99 99 06 15 *

(Setpoint 01)

To execute macro 1234 at 10:30 AM on the weekend (Saturday and Sunday),
every month, enter the following:
(PW) 28 02 1234 99 33 10 30 *

(Setpoint 02)

To execute macro 1234 at midnight every Saturday in June, enter the
following:
(PW) 28 03 1234 06 40 00 00 *

(Setpoint 03)

To execute macro 1234 at noon on April 15th, enter the following:
(PW) 28 04 1234 04 15 12 00 *

(Setpoint 04)

To execute macro 1234 at 5:00 PM (17:00) on the first Thursday of every
month, enter the following:
(PW) 28 05 1234 99 45 17 00 *

(Setpoint 05)

It is not necessary to fill in each setpoint starting from 00. Unprogrammed
setpoints that cause gaps in the sequence will be ignored by the Scheduler.
You can minimize the number of programmed setpoints with creative
programming. For example, you may wish to execute a macro at 10:00 PM
each day of the week except Sundays. Instead of creating six setpoints for
Monday through Saturday, create just two: one for Saturday, and one for
weekdays.

9-4

Scheduler
Note: When using wildcards, be sure of their function. For example, if you
create a setpoint where Month = 01, Day = 01, Hour = 00, and Minute = 00, the
macro will execute at midnight, January 1st. If you accidentally set Month = 01,
Day = 01, Hour = 99, and Minute = 99, assuming the macro will execute at the
start of January 1st, the unexpected will happen: the macro will execute every
minute of every hour for as long as it is January 1st (that is, from 00:00 January
1st until and including 12:59 PM (23:59) January 1st).
Suggested uses for the Scheduler include:
•

Change the phone number dialed by a macro.

•

Enable and disable a feature based on time of day (weekends could be
different from weekdays).

9-5

7K • Chapter 9

Delete One or More Setpoints
Deletes a single setpoint or a range of setpoints from the Scheduler
program.
•
•
•

To delete a single setpoint, enter just the setpoint number.
To delete a range of setpoints, enter the first and last setpoint number to be
deleted.
Enter the 2-digit setpoints 00-99. Use a leading zero, if required.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Delete One Setpoint

(PW) 28 (setpoint) *

Delete Range of Setpoints

(PW) 28 (first
setpoint) (last
setpoint) *

00-99, setpoint
number
00-99, setpoint
number

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No setpoints exist.
Example:
To delete setpoints 4 through 26, enter the following:
(PW) 28 04 26 *
To delete a single setpoint, 14, enter the following:
(PW) 28 14 *

9-6

Scheduler

Enable/Disable Scheduler
Allows the Scheduler to process scheduled events (setpoints).
•
•

Enter this command to control if the Scheduler is allowed to process the
programmed scheduled events (setpoints).
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Enable/Disable Scheduler

(PW) 63 15 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Enabled.
Example:
To disable the scheduler, enter the following:
(PW) 63 15 0 *
To enable the scheduler, enter the following:
(PW) 63 15 1 *

9-7

7K • Chapter 9
Notes:

9-8

CTCSS Functions

Chapter 10

CTCSS
Functions
The 7K Controller can control an outboard CTCSS encoder/decoder module
such as the Communications Specialists TS-32.
If the CTCSS encoder is connected to the 7K, the controller can turn the tone
ON and OFF through a dedicated audio gate on the main board.
If the CTCSS decoder frequency is controlled by DIP switches, the 7K can
change the frequency if connections are made between the DIP switches and
the 7K’s PLF1 through PLF6 outputs.

10-1

7K • Chapter 10

Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder
Turns ON and OFF a customer-supplied CTCSS encoder.
•
•
•

•
•

Feed the encoder audio output into the 7K at J2-23 (PL Encode In), and
drive the transmitter PL input from the 7K at J2-24 (PL Encode Out).
You may place the encoder into one of three modes: OFF (disabled),
continuously ON (continuously enabled), and timed ON (timed enabled).
When continuously enabled, the encoder will be enabled when Transmitter
1 is keyed and disabled just before the Tx1 Minimum Unkey Delay. You
can adjust the Tx1 Minimum Unkey Delay (see page 17-15) for proper
squelching of user radios.
The Timed ON mode means the encoder is turned ON for an adjustable
amount of time at the beginning of each repeater key-up. This time is
adjustable from 2 seconds to 9 seconds.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for continuously ON (enabled), and
2 through 9 for 2 to 9 seconds of timed ON operation.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder

(PW) 02 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = continuous ON
(2-9) = (2-9) seconds
timed ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: CTCSS Encoder is OFF (disabled).
Example:
To put the CTCSS encoder into timed ON mode for 7 seconds, enter the
following:
(PW) 02 7 *
If monitoring stations have CTCSS decoders, they can hear the beginnings of
QSOs and find out who’s on the air, but do not have to listen to the rest of the
conversation.

10-2

CTCSS Functions

Select Frequency of CTCSS
Allows control of frequency of an external CTCSS encode/
decode module.
•

•

•
•

Six outputs, labeled CTCSS Frequency #1 through CTCSS Frequency #6
are provided on the J2 connector of the 7K. If interfacing with a TS-32
encode/decode module, connect wires from CTCSS Frequency #1 through
CTCSS Frequency #5 to the 5 DIP switches on the TS-32. Open all 5
switches.
In the TS-32 Programming Table which follows, the decimal numbers 0–63
represent the 64 possible combinations of the six outputs, with CTCSS
Frequency #1 being the least significant bit. Only 32 combinations affect the
TS-32, even though 64 combinations are available to the controller.
Entering a 0 in the command forces all six outputs to the low state, which
corresponds to the lowest frequency (67.0Hz) of the TS-32.
The six outputs are latched at the time a new command is given. The
customer may wish to control a device that is not a CTCSS module, and
should be aware that the outputs are lightly buffered by a 74C906 IC (+15V
OFF/10mA ON).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Frequency of CTCSS

(PW) 03 xx *

see TS-32
Programming Table

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default: All six outputs are OFF (open)
Note: Using this command to change the CTCSS frequency does not turn ON
or OFF the encoder/decoder, but simply changes the frequency. It is a way of
remotely “throwing” the switches on the module.
Another command exists which uses the same six outputs to control a different
device, the MX-315 CTCSS encoder IC made by MX-COM, Inc. The command
is (PW) 05 (0– 63) *. This command controls the latched outputs similarly to
the (PW) 03 (0–63) * command, but uses a lookup table to provide the proper
bit pattern for the MX-315. This command does not have a command page in
this manual. Contact the factory for details.

10-3

7K • Chapter 10

TS-32 Programming
Switch Number, 0 = Closed (ON) / 1 = Open (OFF)

10-4

Freq

Code

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

67.0
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
85.4
88.5
91.5
94.8
97.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
162.2
167.9
173.8
179.9
186.2
192.8
203.5

XZ
XA
WA
XB
SP
YZ
YA
YB
ZZ
ZA
ZB
1Z
1A
1B
2Z
2A
2B
3Z
3A
3B
4Z
4A
4B
5Z
5A
5B
6Z
6A
6B
7Z
7A
M1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1

DTMF Decoder

Chapter 11

DTMF Decoder
The 7K’s DTMF Decoder may be driven by the three receiver ports and the phone line.
The priorities of these devices and many other parameters regarding the decoder are
programmable.

11-1

7K • Chapter 11

Enable/Disable Command Response Messages
Turns ON or OFF the command responses (i.e. error and
acknowledgment messages) returned to the programmer.
Command Response Messages are the CW messages which are sent to assist
the programmer. Most commands send OK when properly entered, although
some send back the actual message that was entered. Other responses
include the various error messages that indicate bad data or incorrect number
of keystrokes.
•

Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Command Response
Messages

(PW) 63 02 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Command Response Messages are ON (enabled)
Examples:
When commands are placed into macros, command response messages may
be undesirable. To turn them OFF, enter:
(PW) 63 02 0 *
To turn them back ON, enter:
(PW) 63 02 1 *

11-2

DTMF Decoder

Select DTMF Priority/Scan
Selects the priority of the three devices feeding the DTMF decoder,
including placing one or more devices into the scan list.
•
•

Enter four digits from the table indicating Priority Level or Scan for each of
the four devices.
You may not enter all zeroes, implying that no device has access to the
decoder. You may not assign the same priority to more than one device,
except for “scan” (5). You may assign priority “0” (no access) to up to 3
devices.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select DTMF Priority/Scan

(PW) 89 (RX1, RX2,
RX3, PH) *

0 = no access to
DTMF decoder
1 = Priority 1 (highest
priority)
2 = Priority 2
3 = Priority 3
4 = Priority 4
5 = Scan this device

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
all zeroes, or digit greater than 5, or multiple
devices with same priority

Default Condition:

11-3

Device

Default

RX1
RX2
RX3
PH (“PH” refers to the phone line)

Priority 3
Priority 4
Priority 1
Priority 2

7K • Chapter 11

Examples:
You may re-arrange the priorities of the three receivers and phone line from the
default condition, which assumes that RX3 is a control receiver with the highest
priority. It assumes that the phone line control feature is second, followed by
the repeater receiver (RX1) and then the link receiver (RX2).
In addition to assigning priorities, you may cause the DTMF decoder to
sequentially scan certain (or all) devices. Scanned devices are checked for
DTMF only if no priority devices are active. If DTMF is detected on a scanned
device, the decoder will remain connected to the device until either the device
goes inactive, the DTMF Interdigit Timer expires, or a priority device goes
active.
The more devices you scan, the slower the response to DTMF will be. (Users
may have to hold the first DTMF digit slightly longer to “capture” the decoder.)
There are no priorities within the scan list; whichever device has DTMF first will
capture the DTMF decoder.
If you wish to give the phone line top priority, RX1 next priority, and scan RX2
and RX3, enter this:
(PW) 89 2 5 5 1 *

11-4

DTMF Decoder

Select DTMF Decoder Access Mode
Selects one of six possible DTMF Decoder Access Modes for each
receiver.
•

Enter one digit, 0 through 5, from the table below.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Rx1-to-DTMF Decoder Access Mode

(PW) 57 06 x *

Select Rx2-to-DTMF Decoder Access Mode

(PW) 57 07 x *

Select Rx3-to-DTMF Decoder Access Mode

(PW) 57 08 x *

DTMF Decoder
Access Mode Table
(below)
DTMF Decoder
Access Mode Table
(below)
DTMF Decoder
Access Mode Table
(below)

Mode

DTMF Access

Explanation

No Access

Activity on the COR and PL inputs is ignored.

Carrier Access

Activity on the COR input will allow access to the DTMF
decoder. Activity on the PL input is ignored.

PL Access

Activity on the PL input will allow access to the DTMF
decoder. Activity on the COR input is ignored.

And-PL Access

Activity on both the COR and PL inputs simultaneously
will allow access to the DTMF decoder.

Or-PL Access

Activity on either the COR or PL inputs will allow access
to the DTMF decoder.

Anti-PL Access

Activity on the COR input simultaneously with no activity
on the PL input will allow access to the DTMF decoder.

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: DTMF Decoder Access is Mode 1 (Carrier Access) on all
receivers.

11-5

7K • Chapter 11

Note: These commands only affect the DTMF Decoder access mode. They
may be different from receiver access modes, if desired.

Warning: If you set the DTMF Decoder Access Mode on all receivers to
Mode 0 (No Access) you will only be able to control the controller via the phone
line!
Example:
To prevent DTMF commands from being decoded from Receiver 2, enter the
following command to change the mode to Mode 0 (No Access):
(PW) 57 07 0 *
Assume that the DTMF decoder for Receiver 1 is in Mode 1 (Carrier Access),
and that Mode 2 (PL Access) is desired. Enter the following command to
change the mode on Receiver 1:
(PW) 57 06 2 *
A better mode for many repeater installations is Mode 3 (And-PL Access). This
mode has better rejection of adjacent-channel interference than Mode 2 (PL
Access), since noise falsing from unsquelched audio is eliminated. Enter the
following command to change the mode on Receiver 1:
(PW) 57 06 3 *
Mode 4 (Or-PL Access) allows both Carrier Access and PL Access operation.
Since PL is more easily detected, PL users will find increased range. Carrier
Access users are unaffected. The squelch may be tightened to suppress band
opening problems.
Mode 5 (Anti-PL) is used when the repeater is on the same channel with a
PL-accessed repeater. Users of the second system are kept out of the Anti-PL
system.

11-6

DTMF Decoder

Select DTMF Decoder Interdigit Timer
Programs the maximum amount of time allowed between DTMF
digits received by the controller.
•
•

If a delay occurs that is greater than the value specified in the command,
the command buffer in the controller will be cleared.
Enter two digits in the range 01 to 99, representing 0.1 to 9.9 seconds.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select DTMF Decoder Interdigit Timer

(PW) 82 xx *

(01–99) =
(0.1–9.9) seconds

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: DTMF Decoder Interdigit Time is 5.0 seconds

11-7

7K • Chapter 11

Select DTMF Decoder Mute Delay
Sets the amount of muting that occurs after a DTMF digit is
received by the controller.
•

Enter one digit representing the delay duration; 0.0 through 0.9 seconds.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select DTMF Decoder Mute Delay

(PW) 96 x *

(0–9) =
(0.0–0.9) seconds

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: DTMF Decoder Mute Delay is 0.5 seconds
Examples:
When a DTMF digit is recognized by the controller, it mutes the audio so that
the digit is not re-transmitted. Since some time is required by the controller to
decode the digit, a short burst of tone is re-transmitted. A timer is started for
the purpose of delaying the muting. This allows a string of DTMF digits to be
entered, with all but the first one fully muted. The Select DTMF Decoder Mute
Delay command shown above controls this timer.
•
•

If set to zero, the muting will end when the DTMF digit is released.
If set to 9, the muting will last 0.9 seconds beyond the release of the DTMF
digit.

Since a voice will occasionally trip the DTMF decoder, a long mute delay may
not be desired.
If a DTMF digit is held down for a continuous period of time, the controller will
stop muting after 10 seconds.
To change the mute delay to 0.3 seconds, for example, enter the following
command:
(PW) 96 3 *

11-8

DTMF Decoder

Enable/Disable DTMF Decoder Mute
Turns ON or OFF DTMF muting between any receiver and
transmitter pair.
•

Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable RX1-TX1 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 50 x *

Enable/Disable RX2-TX1 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 51 x *

Enable/Disable RX3-TX1 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 52 x *

Enable/Disable RX1-TX2 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 53 x *

Enable/Disable RX2-TX2 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 54 x *

Enable/Disable RX3-TX2 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 55 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: All DTMF Decoder Mutes are ON (enabled)
Examples:
DTMF Muting is usually left ON (enabled) to prevent annoying DTMF digits
from being repeated, and to prevent listeners from learning command codes.
If it becomes necessary to signal some device that is monitoring Transmitter 1
or 2, you may turn OFF the muting associated with the desired receiver(s) and
transmitter(s).

11-9

7K • Chapter 11

Enable/Disable DTMF Long Tones
Turns ON or OFF the controller’s ability to execute macros based
on reception of long DTMF characters.
•

Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable DTMF Long Tones

(PW) 63 68 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: DTMF Long Tone feature is OFF (disabled)
Examples:
A Long Tone is a DTMF digit sent by a user that lasts continuously for 3.0
seconds or longer. The controller can execute a different macro for each of the
16 possible long DTMF characters. This system is compatible with the ARRL’s
nationwide “LiTZ” (Long- Tone Zero) program, which asks amateurs to monitor
for a 3-second DTMF “0” sent by a user who is in an emergency situation.
The macro is executed on the trailing edge of the DTMF character. Since the
long tone is treated similar to a logic input by the controller, it becomes a standalone signal instead of a character for the command buffer. There must not be
any other characters in the command buffer when the long tone is received.
The long tone character itself will not be stored into the command buffer.
After you have enabled this feature, see the Select DTMF Long Tone Macros
command on page 11-11 for information on assigning the appropriate macros
to the long DTMF characters.

11-10

DTMF Decoder

Select DTMF Long Tone Macros
Assigns a macro to be executed by the Long Tone shown.
•
•
•

Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, the macro you wish to have
executed by the long tone, and the (*).
If the macro has fewer than 4 digits, enter leading zeroes
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Macro to Long Tone Zero
Assign Macro to Long Tone One
Assign Macro to Long Tone Two
Assign Macro to Long Tone Three
Assign Macro to Long Tone Four
Assign Macro to Long Tone Five
Assign Macro to Long Tone Six
Assign Macro to Long Tone Seven
Assign Macro to Long Tone Eight
Assign Macro to Long Tone Nine
Assign Macro to Long Tone A
Assign Macro to Long Tone B
Assign Macro to Long Tone C
Assign Macro to Long Tone D
Assign Macro to Long Tone Star (*)
Assign Macro to Long Tone Pound (#)

(PW) 26 50 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 51 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 52 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 53 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 54 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 55 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 56 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 57 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 58 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 59 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 60 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 61 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 62 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 63 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 64 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 65 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned

11-11

7K • Chapter 11

Select DTMF Digit-Decoded Macro
Assigns a macro to be triggered when a DTMF digit is decoded.
•
•
•

Can be used to implement a DTMF cover tone.
Enter the 4-digit macro name desired. Use leading zeros if needed.
To delete a macro, enter the command with no macro name.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select DTMF Digit-Decoded Macro

(PW) 26 49 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None assigned.

11-12

Identifier

Chapter 12

Identifier
The Controller supports separate Identifiers (ID) for Transmitter #1 (Tx1) and
Transmitter #2 (Tx2). These identifiers are triggered by incoming signals from
the users and identify the transmitters only while they are being used.

Note: Due to the separate identifiers feature, many of the commands and
messages are specific to a particular transmitter. In the following text, all
references to commands, messages, macros, and so forth, may not include
distinctions for each transmitter. For example, we might refer to an Initial ID
Message command, when in fact, there are two commands that are similar:
Select Initial ID Message for Tx1 and Select Initial ID message for Tx2.
Therefore, users should be careful to choose the proper command form from
the command pages.
The first signal to be received will start an ID Cycle. Since the identifier is
“polite”, it will attempt to wait for the signal to disappear before sending an
identifier message. If the initial signal is received continuously until the
identifier timer expires, the Initial ID Message will be sent and the Impolite ID
Macro will be executed. Normally, following the initial keyup, the Initial ID
Message is sent and the Initial ID Macro is executed for each transmitter that
was keyed
During a conversation, the controller looks for the input signal to drop during
the ID Pending Interval prior to the expiration of the ID Message Interval timer.
If the signal drops during this period, the Normal ID Message is sent and the
Polite ID Macro is executed. If the signal does not drop by the time the ID
Message Interval time expires, the Impolite ID Message is sent and the
Impolite ID Macro is executed.
Because the controller “looks ahead” up to the ID Pending Interval time for the
signal to drop (as required by the polite ID feature), the identification may not
happen at precisely the same interval each time. If the ID Message Interval is
set to 10 minutes and the ID Pending Interval is set to 30 seconds, for
example, the identification can take place from 9 minutes 30 seconds to 10
minutes after the initial signal is received. The Select ID Message Interval for

12-1

7K • Chapter 12
Tx1 and Tx2 command (see page 12-5) sets the maximum interval between
identifications. The Select ID Pending Interval for Tx1 and Tx2 command (see
page 12-6) sets the amount of time that the controller “looks ahead” to insert a
polite ID and Select ID Message Interval minus Select ID Pending Interval sets
the minimum time between IDs on an active system.
When the conversation is finished and the ID timer expires for the last time, the
Normal ID Message is sent and the Polite ID Macro is executed. The identifier
always has the “last word”. No additional identification will be sent until a new
ID cycle is begun by an incoming signal.
You may program messages into the identifier by using the Select Identifier
Messages commands on page 12-3.
•

The Initial ID Message may contain a greeting, club name, city, CTCSS
frequency, or other such information in addition to the callsign.

•

The Normal ID Message is usually short, containing only the callsign,
since it is sent occasionally throughout a conversation between user
transmissions.

•

The Impolite ID Message should be as short and inconspicuous as
possible since it is sent over a user’s transmission when a Normal ID
Message cannot be inserted between users’ transmissions.

The ID messages can be deleted and the ID macros used instead. For
example, the Initial ID Macro can pulse a logic output, starting a tape cartridge
machine or digital voice recorder on which the identification and greeting are
recorded.

12-2

Identifier

Select (Review) Identifier Messages
Define the Initial ID, Normal ID, and Impolite ID Messages for Tx1
and Tx2.
•
•
•
•

Any message may be a combination of message types including CW,
beeps, page tones, speech, etc.
The maximum size of any message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes). You
must count the control characters. Therefore, any message could have 46
CW characters, 23 synthesized speech words, etc.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*); do not enter any message.
If an Impolite ID Message is not programmed, the Normal ID message is
sent.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Select Initial ID Message for TX1
Select Normal ID Message for TX1
Select Impolite ID Message for TX1
Select Initial ID Message for TX2
Select Normal ID Message for TX2
Select Impolite ID Message for TX2
Review Initial ID Message for TX1
Review Normal ID Message for TX1
Review Impolite ID Message for TX1
Review Initial ID Message for TX2
Review Normal ID Message for TX2
Review Impolite ID Message for TX2

(PW) 31 30 (message) *
(PW) 31 31 (message) *
(PW) 31 32 (message) *
(PW) 31 33 (message) *
(PW) 31 34 (message) *
(PW) 31 35 (message) *
(PW) 34 30 *
(PW) 34 31 *
(PW) 34 32 *
(PW) 34 33 *
(PW) 34 34 *
(PW) 34 35 *

ID in CW
ID in CW
none
9983 ID in CW
9983 ID in CW
none
none
none
none
none
none
none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: TX1 is ID, TX2 is 9983 ID, both in CW.
Note: Be sure to enter a routing code for messages to TX2 or the message will
go to TX1 instead.

12-3

7K • Chapter 12

Select ID-Triggered Macros
Assigns macros to be triggered at the appropriate ID events.
•
•

Enter the 4-digit macro name desired. Use leading zeros if needed.
To delete a macro, enter the command with no macro name,
i.e. (PW) 26 05 *.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Impolite ID Macro for TX1
Select Impolite ID Macro for TX2
Select Initial ID Macro for TX1
Select Initial ID Macro for TX2
Select Polite ID Macro for TX1
Select Polite ID Macro for TX2

(PW) 26 05 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 48 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 03 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 46 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 04 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 47 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No ID-Triggered Macros are assigned
Examples:
An ID-Triggered Macro is useful when some device is to be energized at ID
time instead of the controller’s internal message generation. For example,
macro 1234 can be created to pulse a logic output. This output can be wired to
the start line of a tape cartridge machine. The macro name is programmed into
the initial ID macro for TX1, so that the taped message is played only on initial
identifications. The command is:
(PW) 26 03 1234 *

12-4

Identifier

Select ID Message Interval
Programs the maximum interval at which ID messages occur.
•
•
•

Because of the polite nature of the identifier, an ID may be earlier if there is
a recent carrier drop. (Select ID Pending Interval For Tx1 and Tx2 on page
12-6.)
Enter 3 digits, 005 to 300, representing 0.5 to 30.0 minutes.
Repeaters in US amateur service must identify at least every 10 minutes.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select ID Message Interval for TX1 and TX2

(PW) 51 xxx *

(005–300) =
(0.5–30.0) minutes

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: ID Message Interval is 3.0 minutes
Examples:
To change the ID message interval to 4.5 minutes, enter the following
command:
(PW) 51 45 *
To change the ID message interval to (9.9 minutes), enter the following
command:
(PW) 51 99 *

12-5

7K • Chapter 12

Select ID Pending Interval For Tx1 and Tx2
Programs the amount of time the controller “looks ahead” to send a
polite ID.
•
•
•

The Pending ID Interval is the amount of time before the end of the ID
Message Interval (see page 12-5) that the controller looks for the repeater’s
carrier to drop to insert a polite ID.
A longer interval allows more time for a polite ID to occur, but can cause an
ID to occur more often than required.
Enter 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits, leading zeroes are not required.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Select ID Pending Interval for Tx1 and Tx2

(PW) 49 97 xxxx *

(0300-1800) = 30.0180.0 seconds

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The ID Pending Interval is 30 seconds.
Example:
To select an ID Pending Interval of 2 minutes (120.0 seconds), enter the
following:
(PW) 49 97 1200 *

12-6

Identifier

Reset Initial ID Message To Normal
Causes the Initial Id Message to be the same as the Normal ID
Message.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Reset Initial ID Message to Normal for TX1

(PW) 54 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK Command Response Message.
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: Both Initial and Normal ID Messages are ID in CW.
Examples:
On occasion, you may want to change the initial ID message to something
special. For example, you could program W8ABC/R MRY XMAS, or W2XYZ/R
SWAPFEST SAT, etc. When the season or event is over simply enter:
(PW) 54 *

12-7

7K • Chapter 12

Send Initial ID Message
Forces the identifier to send the Initial ID Message for TX1, along
with any ID Tail Message that may be selected.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Send Initial ID Message for TX1

(PW) 55 *

Acknowledgment: Sends ID
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default: None

12-8

Identifier

Select (Review) Programmable
Tail Messages for Tx1
Defines the Initial and Normal ID Programmable Tail Messages for
Tx1.
•
•
•
•
•
•

A Tail Message is sent immediately after its associated ID Message.
Tail Messages provide a simple way to turn on and off a supplemental
message using the Select (Review) Initial and Normal ID Tail Messages
Command (see page 12-11).
Any Programmable Tail Message may be a combination of message types
including CW, beeps, page tones, speech, etc.
The maximum size of any message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes). You
must count the control characters. Therefore, any message could have 46
CW characters, 23 synthesized speech words, etc.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*); do not enter any message.
This command only establishes the contents of the programmable
message. Use the Select (Review) Initial and Normal ID Tail Messages
Command (see page 12-11) to enable the message.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Select Initial ID Programmable Tail Message
for TX1
Select Normal ID Programmable Tail
Message for TX1
Review Initial ID Programmable Tail
Message for TX1
Review Normal ID Programmable Tail
Message for TX1

(PW) 31 28 (message) *

none

(PW) 31 29 (message) *

none

(PW) 34 28 *

none

(PW) 34 29 *

none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No message is programmed.
Example:
To program the Initial ID Programmable Tail Message for TX1 to say “Net at 8 PM”,
enter the command:

(PW) 31 28 9960 0331 0039 0129 0369 0287 *

12-9

7K • Chapter 12

Select (Review) Initial and Normal ID
Tail Messages
Defines the Initial and Normal ID Tail Messages for Tx1.
•
•
•

Tail Messages are short CW or programmable messages that can be
appended to an ID message.
The Tail Number (Data Digit “x”) can be 1 or 2 digits selected from the
following table.
Enter the command with no Tail Number to disable the Tail Message.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Initial ID Tail Message for TX1

(PW) 50 0 xx *

Select Normal ID Tail Message for TX1

(PW) 50 1 xx *

Review Initial ID Tail Message for TX1
Review Normal ID Tail Message for TX1

(PW) 50 0 99 *
(PW) 50 1 99 *

Tail Message
Table (below)
Tail Message
Table (below)
none
none

Data Digit

Message

Data Digit

Message

Data Digit

Message

0
1
2
3
4
5

(no message)
FEST in CW
DUES in CW
MEET in CW
NET in CW
HI in CW

6
7
8
9
10
11

WX in CW
ALERT in CW
WATCH in CW
WARN in CW
RACES in CW
TGIF in CW

12
13
14
15
98
(none)

/R in CW
LINK in CW
RMT in CW
BAT in CW
(programmable)
(no message)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Both Initial and Normal ID Tail Messages default to none.
Example:
To select NET in CW as an Initial ID Tail Message for TX1, enter the
command:
(PW) 50 0 4 *

12-10

Identifier

Enable/Disable ID Messages During Autopatch
Allows the Identifier to operate during an autopatch and reverse
patch.
•
•
•
•

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digits

Enable/Disable ID During Autopatch

(PW) 63 09 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Disabled.
Example:
To enable the identifier during a patch, enter the following:
(PW) 63 09 1 *
To disable the identifier during a patch, enter the following:
(PW) 63 09 0 *

12-11

7K • Chapter 12

12-12

Links

Chapter 13

Links
The 7K controller supports a total of 3 receivers, 2 transmitters, and an
autopatch. Any receiver may feed any transmitter or the autopatch by turning
on or off the 11 possible paths. Paths are defined in the Enable/Disable Path
command on page 13-2. The priority of the audio routed from each receiver to
each transmitter or the autopatch can be selected (see page 13-3). The
Access Mode of each receiver enabled to each transmitter can be selected
(see page 13-4).

13-1

7K • Chapter 13

Enable/Disable Path
Enables or disables the various Paths 1 through 11.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Path 1 connects Receiver 1 to Transmitter 1.
Path 2 connects Receiver 2 to Transmitter 1.
Path 3 connects Receiver 3 to Transmitter 1.
Path 4 connects Receiver 1 to Transmitter 2.
Path 5 connects Receiver 2 to Transmitter 2.
Path 6 connects Receiver 3 to Transmitter 2.
Path 7 connects Receiver 1 to Autopatch/Reverse Patch.
Path 8 connects Receiver 2 to Autopatch/Reverse Patch.
Path 9 connects Receiver 3 to Autopatch/Reverse Patch.
Path 10 connects Autopatch/Reverse Patch to Transmitter 1.
Path 11 connects Autopatch/Reverse Patch to Transmitter 2.
Paths enabled during Phone Line Control Mode use the Monitor/Talk Out
Via Phone command described on page 7-45.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Enable/Disable Path 1 (Rx1 to Tx1)
Enable/Disable Path 2 (Rx2 to Tx1)
Enable/Disable Path 3 (Rx3 to Tx1)
Enable/Disable Path 4 (Rx1 to Tx2)
Enable/Disable Path 5 (Rx2 to Tx2)
Enable/Disable Path 6 (Rx3 to Tx2)
Enable/Disable Path 7 (Rx1 to AP)
Enable/Disable Path 8 (Rx2 to AP)
Enable/Disable Path 9 (Rx3 to AP)
Enable/Disable Path 10 (AP to Tx1)
Enable/Disable Path 11 (AP to Tx2)

(PW) 63 81 x *
(PW) 63 82 x *
(PW) 63 83 x *
(PW) 63 84 x *
(PW) 63 85 x *
(PW) 63 86 x *
(PW) 63 87 x *
(PW) 63 88 x *
(PW) 63 89 x *
(PW) 63 90 x *
(PW) 63 91 x *

ON (enabled)
ON (enabled)
ON (enabled)
ON (enabled)
ON (enabled)
ON (enabled)
ON (enabled)
OFF (disabled)
OFF (disabled)
ON (enabled)
OFF (disabled)

Data Digit:
Digit

Meaning

0
1

OFF (disabled)
ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:

13-2

Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Links

Select Audio Routing Priority
Selects the priority of audio routed to the transmitters or phone line.
•
•
•
•

For routing to transmitters, audio is only routed when the receiver-totransmitter path is enabled (see previous page).
In the table, below, AP is the Autopatch/Reverse Patch. Audio is only
routed when the receiver-to-autopatch path is enabled (see previous page)
and an autopatch is in progress.
In the table, below, LL is the landline operating in Phone Line Control Mode.
Audio is only routed when the receiver-to-landline monitor path is enabled
(see page 7-45) and phone line control mode is in progress.
Enter the command to select the audio routing priority to modify; replace
each ‘x’ with one digit, 1 through 3, representing receivers 1 through 3, in
the order of priority from highest to lowest. All 3 receivers must be
specified.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Rx-to-Tx1 Audio Routing Priority

(PW) 90 00 x x x *

Select Rx-to-Tx2 Audio Routing Priority

(PW) 90 01 x x x *

Select Rx-to-AP Audio Routing Priority

(PW) 90 02 x x x *

Select Rx-to-LL Audio Routing Priority

(PW) 90 03 x x x *

1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2,
3 = Rx3
1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2,
3 = Rx3
1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2,
3 = Rx3
1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2,
3 = Rx3

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Audio Routing Priority is Receiver 1, Receiver 2, then
Receiver 3.
Example:
To specify a priority of Receiver 2, Receiver 1, then Receiver 3 to
Transmitter 1, enter:
(PW) 90 00 2 1 3 *

13-3

7K • Chapter 13

Select Path Access Mode
Selects one of 7 possible Access Modes for each receiver-totransmitter path.
•

Enter the command to select the path to modify; replace the ‘x’ with one
digit, 0 through 6, from Patch Access Mode table below.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Rx1-to-Tx1 Access Mode

(PW) 57 00 x *

Select Rx2-to-Tx1 Access Mode

(PW) 57 01 x *

Select Rx3-to-Tx1 Access Mode

(PW) 57 02 x *

Select Rx1-to-Tx2 Access Mode

(PW) 57 03 x *

Select Rx2-to-Tx2 Access Mode

(PW) 57 04 x *

Select Rx3-to-Tx2 Access Mode

(PW) 57 05 x *

Path Access Mode
Table (below)
Path Access Mode
Table (below)
Path Access Mode
Table (below)
Path Access Mode
Table (below)
Path Access Mode
Table (below)
Path Access Mode
Table (below)

Path Access Modes:
Mode

Access

Explanation

No Access

Activity on the COR and PL inputs is ignored.

Carrier Access (COR)

Activity on the COR input will enable the path. Activity
on the PL input is ignored.

PL Access

Activity on the PL input will enable the path. Activity on
the COR input is ignored.

COR-And-PL Access

Activity on both the COR and PL inputs simultaneously
will enable the path.

COR-Or-PL Access

Activity on either the COR or PL inputs will enable the
path.

COR–And-Anti-PL
Access

Activity on the COR input simultaneously with no activity
on the PL input will enable the path.

Always Access

Activity on the COR and PL inputs is ignored. The path
is always enabled.

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:

13-4

Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Links
Default Condition: Path Access is Mode 1 (Carrier Access) on all receivers to
all transmitters.
Note: These commands only affect the path access modes. They may be
different from DTMF Decoder access modes, if desired.
Examples:
To prevent audio from Receiver 2 from being routed to Transmitter 1, enter the
following command to change the mode to Mode 0 (No Access):
(PW) 57 01 0 *
Assume that the path for Receiver 1 to Transmitter 1 is in Mode 1 (Carrier
Access), and that Mode 2 (PL Access) is desired. Enter the following
command to change the mode:
(PW) 57 00 2 *
A better mode for many repeater installations is Mode 3 (And-PL Access). This
mode has better rejection of adjacent-channel interference than Mode 2 (PL
Access), since noise falsing from unsquelched audio is eliminated. Enter the
following command to change the mode on the path from Receiver 1 to
Transmitter 1 to Mode 3 (And-PL Access):
(PW) 57 00 3 *
Mode 4 (Or-PL Access) allows either Carrier Access or PL Access operation.
Since PL is more easily detected, PL users will find increased range. Carrier
Access users are unaffected. The squelch may be tightened to suppress
band-opening problems.
Mode 5 (Anti-PL) is used when the repeater is on the same channel with a
PL-accessed repeater. Users of the second system are kept out of the Anti-PL
system.
Mode 6 (Always Access) can be used to troubleshoot a receiver that may be
generating a bad COR signal or to enable an audio source that does not
generate a COR. To enable the path from Receiver 3 to Transmitter 1 without
the presence of a COR or PL signal, enter the following:
(PW) 57 02 6 *
To disable this path, enter the following:
(PW) 57 02 0 *

13-5

7K • Chapter 13

13-6

Logic Inputs

Chapter 14

Logic Inputs
The 7K Controller supports six uncommitted Logic Inputs for detecting changes
in conditions from sensors at the repeater site. In addition, the three COR
inputs, the three PL inputs, and the Phone Line Busy input are capable of
acting as logic inputs in addition to their normal duties.
Logic inputs are scanned for a transition from the High state to the Low state,
and from the Low state to the High state. When one of these transitions is
detected, the appropriate macro is executed.
Logic inputs can be used for alarms or indicators of such conditions as
burglary, high water, high SWR, overtemperature, and so on. The inputs are
held high with pullup resistors, and must be pulled down by the sensor.

14-1

7K • Chapter 14

Assign Macro To Logic Input
Assigns a macro to be executed by the transition shown.
•
•
•

Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, the macro you wish to have
executed on the transition, and the (*).
If the macro name has fewer than four digits, enter leading zeroes.
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:

14-2

Command

Form

Assign Macro to Logic Input 1 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to Logic Input 1 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to Logic Input 2 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to Logic Input 2 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to Logic Input 3 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to Logic Input 3 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to Logic Input 4 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to Logic Input 4 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to Logic Input 5 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to Logic Input 5 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to Logic Input 6 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to Logic Input 6 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to Phone Line Busy Input
Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to Phone Line Busy Input
Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to COR Input 1 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to COR Input 1 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to COR Input 2 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to COR Input 2 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to COR Input 3 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to COR Input 3 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to PL Input 1 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to PL Input 1 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to PL Input 2 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to PL Input 2 Lo-to-Hi
Assign Macro to PL Input 3 Hi-to-Lo
Assign Macro to PL Input 3 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 20 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 21 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 22 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 23 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 24 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 25 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 26 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 27 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 28 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 29 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 30 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 31 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 32 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 33 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 34 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 35 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 36 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 37 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 38 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 39 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 40 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 41 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 42 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 43 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 44 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 45 (macro name) *

Logic Inputs
Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No Macros assigned
Examples:
Let’s assume that Logic Input 1 has been wired to an intrusion switch. The
opened switch contacts are in series between the logic input and ground.
When the switch is tripped, the logic input sees a high level. We want this
transition to cause the CW pitch to change. To accomplish this, you must
create a macro that changes the CW pitch to the desired value. Let’s assume
that a macro already exists to do this, and its name is 0050.
Now, you must enter the command to assign this macro to logic input 1’s lowto-high transition. The command is:
(PW) 26 21 0050 *
Note: This is now a latched condition. That is, once the switch is tripped and
the CW pitch is changed, the pitch will stay at the new value until commanded
back to normal. This may be desirable, since the switch could have been
tripped late at night. You would need to keep the CW pitch changed until
acknowledged, not changed back to normal when the switch goes back to its
original state.
Other applications require that the condition not be latched. For example: A
115V relay could be wired with its coil to the 115VAC line at the repeater site. If
it has a SPST contact available, the contact could be wired in series between a
logic input and ground. When the relay is energized and the contact is closed,
the repeater is operating from AC power. When the relay is de-energized and
the contact is open, the repeater is operating from battery power. The contact
provides this information to the controller, which could append BAT (or a similar
message) to the repeater tail message. Users would know that they should limit
transmissions when they hear the BAT message. When AC power is restored,
the controller would automatically turn OFF the BAT message.
To program the above scenario requires two macros: one to program BAT into
the dropout message, and one to program (nothing) into the dropout message.

14-3

7K • Chapter 14
Assume that two such macros already exist, and they are: 0700 programs BAT,
and 0701 removes BAT.
To assign these macros to logic input 2, enter the following commands:
(PW) 26 22 0701 * (removes message).
(PW) 26 23 0700 * (programs message).

14-4

Logic Outputs

Chapter 15

Logic Outputs
The controller has seven Logic Outputs that are available for your use in
operating auxiliary devices at the repeater site (the two transmitter PTT outputs
are not included in the 7 logic outputs). These outputs can be latched ON or
OFF, or can be momentarily pulsed ON or OFF.
“ON” refers to the state of an output when it is sinking current to ground; “OFF”
refers to the state of an output when it is open (floating).

15-1

7K • Chapter 15

Select Logic Outputs
Controls the seven Logic Outputs.
•

List the outputs to be controlled by entering any combination of digits 1–7.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Logic Outputs Latched OFF
Select Logic Outputs Latched ON
Select Logic Outputs Momentary OFF
Select Logic Outputs Momentary ON

(PW) 71 (list the outputs) *
(PW) 70 (list the outputs) *
(PW) 73 (list the outputs) *
(PW) 72 (list the outputs) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 2

illegal digit entered

Default Condition: All Logic Outputs are OFF (disabled)
Examples:
There are several examples for logic outputs. To turn ON logic output 1, enter:
(PW) 70 1 *
To turn ON logic output 2, enter:
(PW) 70 2 * (Logic output 1 is still ON.)
To turn OFF both logic outputs, enter:
(PW) 71 1 2 *
To momentarily turn ON logic output 1, enter:
(PW) 72 1 *
To momentarily turn ON both logic outputs, enter:
(PW) 72 1 2 *
If logic output 2 is ON, you may momentarily turn it OFF by entering:
(PW) 73 2 *

15-2

Receiver Functions

Chapter 16

Receiver
Functions
The commands in this chapter relate to the three receiver ports.
Each receiver has access to either or both transmitters, if enabled (see the
Links chapter on page 13-1). Each receiver has access to the DTMF decoder,
if enabled (see the DTMF Decoder chapter on page 11-1).
The usual configuration has Receiver 1 as the repeater receiver, and Receivers
2 and 3 as link receivers. Or, Receiver 3 might be a control receiver with priority
access to the DTMF decoder. The final configuration is up to the programmer.

16-1

7K • Chapter 16

Select Receiver Activity-Triggered Macros
Select Receiver Post-Activity Timers
Allows the programmer to execute macros based on activity
detected by the receivers.
Receiver Post-Activity Timers delay the macro execution for a
programmable length of time after last activity.
•
•

•
•

Each receiver has its own Start-of-Activity Macro, Post-Activity Macro, and
Post- Activity Timer.
The Receiver Post-Activity Timer starts each time receiver activity ends.
When the timer expires, the macro associated with the receiver is executed.
The timers require two data digits representing the delay. “00-99” equals
0.0-9.9 minute delay.
These macros execute based solely on receiver activity, and act
independently of the transmitter paths that the receivers drive.
Be sure to set the corresponding receiver access mode for Receiver 1, 2,
and 3 using the Select Path Access Mode commands for Rx1-to-Tx1, Rx2to-Tx1, and/or Rx3-to-Tx1 on page 13-4.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select RX1 Start-of-Activity Macro
Select RX1 Post-Activity Macro
Select RX2 Start-of-Activity Macro
Select RX2 Post-Activity Macro
Select RX3 Start-of-Activity Macro
Select RX3 Post-Activity Macro
Select RX1 Post-Activity Timer

(PW) 26 67 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 68 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 69 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 70 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 71 (macro name) *
(PW) 26 72 (macro name) *
(PW) 99 00 xx *

Select RX2 Post-Activity Timer

(PW) 99 01 xx *

Select RX3 Post-Activity Timer

(PW) 99 02 xx *

not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
xx = duration = 00–99
= 0.0–0.0 minutes
xx = duration = 00–99
= 0.0–0.0 minutes
xx = duration = 00–99
= 0.0–0.0 minutes

Acknowledgment: Sends OK

16-2

Receiver Functions

Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros are assigned; Timers are 1.0 minute
Examples:
These macros execute based solely on receiver activity, and act independently
of the transmitter paths that the receivers drive. The setting of the
corresponding receiver path to Tx1 determines when there is receiver activity
even if the corresponding path is not enabled.
If Receiver 2 is a link receiver, for example, the link can be “knocked down”
(disabled) after several minutes of link inactivity.
These receiver-driven macros should not be confused with the Repeater
Activity-Triggered Macro feature, which requires that Path 1 (Receiver 1 to
Transmitter 1) be enabled. See the Enable/Disable Path 1 (RX1 to TX1)
command on page 13-2.

16-3

7K • Chapter 16

Select COR Pulse-Triggered Macro
Select Pulse Parameters
Selects macro to be executed when a user keys the microphone
PTT button several times in succession.
Sets required characteristics of received pulses.
The controller can execute a macro when a user keys his microphone PTT
button several times in succession. Two commands are used to set up this
feature: One command selects the macro to be executed, and the other sets
the parameters of the pulse string. For the Select COR Pulse-Triggered Macro
command:
•
•
•

Macro Name is the macro to be executed.
The macro will be executed on the falling edge of the last pulse.
The macro will not be executed if any Pulse Parameters are not met.

Three variables affect the setting of Pulse Parameters:
•
•

•

Pulse Count is the number of pulses that occur within the Minimum
Duration and Window Time parameters to trigger execution of the macro.
The range is 0 to 9 pulses.
Minimum Duration (sometimes called Width) is the required duration of a
pulse, measured in 10mS counts. The range is 0001 to 9999 counts, or
00.01 (10mS) to 99.99 seconds. By requiring a certain minimum duration,
the controller can discriminate against narrow noise pulses. Use four digits.
Window Time (sometimes called Window) is the overall time allowed for all
the pulses to be counted and is measured in 10mS increments. The range
is 0001 to 9999 counts, or 00.01 (10mS) to 99.99 seconds. Use four digits.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select COR Pulse-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 17 (macro
name) *
(PW) 47 0 x yyyy zzzz
*

none exist

Select Pulse Parameters

16-4

x = pulse count
= 0–9 pulses
y = minimum duration
= (0001–9999) =
= (00.01–99.99) sec
z = window time =
(0001–9999) =
(00.01–99.99) sec

Receiver Functions
Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered, or conflict in parameters

Default: No Macros exist;, Pulse Count is 3; Minimum Duration is 0.5 sec;
Window Time Is 5.0 sec
How it Works
The Window Timing Cycle starts at the leading edge of the first Pulse. If the
pulse is longer than the Minimum Duration programmed, it is counted. If the
correct number of pulses is counted before the Window “closes,” the
programmed COR Pulse-Triggered Macro will be executed upon the falling
edge of the last counted pulse.
The controller calculates a Maximum Pulse Duration and Maximum Dead Zone
(time between pulses) when you program the parameters. During a window
timing cycle, the controller is timing pulses and deadzones. The window cycle
will be aborted if the inter- pulse dead zone exceeds the maximum value; if any
pulse exceeds the maximum value; and if any pulse is less than the minimum
duration. This means that a new window timing cycle can begin as soon as the
old one is either properly executed or discarded for any reason.
Pulses are created by COR and PL signals and depend upon the repeater
access mode. If the repeater is in carrier access mode, the controller will count
pulses at the COR input. If the repeater is in And-PL access mode, the
controller will count pulses that are comprised of both COR and PL signals.
Examples:
To execute macro 1234 if 3 COR pulses of at least 0.5 seconds each are
detected within a 5.0-second window. Enter these two commands:
(PW) 26 17 1234 * ;(which assigns macro “1234”).
(PW) 47 0 3 0050 0500 * ;(which assigns parameters).
“0025” = 25 x 10mS = 250mS = 1/4 second and “0500” = 500 x 10mS = 5000mS = 5.0 seconds

The controller calculates that 4 pulses times 1/4 second each, which equals
one second pulse duration. The maximum dead zone is then 4 seconds, and
no pulse can exceed 4 1/ 4 seconds. The window will close if any of these
timers are exceeded.
The controller will respond with an error message if the pulse count, multiplied
by the minimum duration, exceeds the window time.

16-5

7K • Chapter 16

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission
Command Execution
Allows commands to be terminated by ending the transmission
(releasing user PTT). This is in addition to the usual (*) character.
•
•
•
•

The (*) character will terminate a command in any case.
You may enable or disable this feature separately for each receiver.
If this feature is enabled, the command will be executed 0.25 seconds after
the transmission ends.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission
Command Execution for RX1
Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission
Command Execution for RX2
Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission
Command Execution for RX3

(PW) 63 57 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

(PW) 63 58 x *
(PW) 63 59 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default condition: End-of-Transmission Command Execution is OFF
(disabled) for all receivers; (*) character required to terminate all commands

16-6

Receiver Functions

Examples:
Whether or not this feature is enabled, the (*) character will always terminate a
command. This is particularly useful if an input signal keeps the receiver active
after a user enters a DTMF command.
If the feature is enabled, users can simply enter a command and release the
push-to-talk button instead of entering the trailing (*). The 0.25-second delay
prevents a partial command from being accidentally executed if the user’s
signal momentarily drops.

16-7

7K • Chapter 16

Select From-Start-of-Transmission Timer
Allows controller to “disconnect” the DTMF decoder from a receiver
if it appears no DTMF command will be entered during a
transmission.
•
•
•

The DTMF decoder is free to find another source of DTMF commands if the
current user does not enter a digit within 5 seconds from start of
transmission (See the Select DTMF Priority/Scan command on page 11-3).
Reduces DTMF “falsing”, since the DTMF decoder only listens during the
beginning of the transmission.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable From-Start-of-Transmission
Timer for RX1
Enable/Disable From-Start-of-Transmission
Timer for RX2
Enable/Disable From-Start-of-Transmission
Timer for RX3

(PW) 63 64 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

(PW) 63 65 x *
PW) 63 66 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: From-Start-of-Transmission Timer is OFF (disabled) for all
receivers.
Examples:
If this feature is disabled, the receiver will feed the DTMF decoder for the
duration of the transmission (subject to its priority. (See the Select DTMF
Priority/Scan command on page 11-3).
If this feature is enabled, the receiver will feed the DTMF decoder for the first 5
seconds of the transmission (subject to its priority). If a user wishes to enter a
command and has already transmitted more than 5 seconds, he must unkey
and re-key before entering the command. Once a DTMF digit is entered, the
receiver will continue to feed the DTMF decoder for the remainder of the
transmission.
16-8

Transmitter Functions

Chapter 17

Transmitter
Functions
Transmitter Tail Sequence
There are a number of commands which control the Transmitter Tail
Sequence. Figure 2 will help in the understanding of them. The terms used in
these commands are defined as follows.

Courtesy Delay and Courtesy Message
When a transmitting station unkeys his/her microphone, the Courtesy Delay
starts. When the courtesy delay timer times out, the Courtesy Message is sent.
At the same time, the repeater Transmitter Timeout Timer is reset. The
purpose of the courtesy message is to inform the next station that he/she may
now transmit for the full duration of the transmitter timeout timer. The courtesy
delay encourages stations to allow a short break in their transmissions,
allowing other stations to break in.

Dropout Delay and Dropout Message
After the courtesy delay resets, another timer, the Dropout Delay starts. When
the dropout delay times out, the Dropout Message will be sent, and the
repeater transmitter will drop. (Dropout delay is sometimes referred to as Hang
Time.)

Transmitter Timeout Timer and Timeout Message
If a station transmits for a longer period than set by the Transmitter Timeout
Timer, the Timeout Message will be sent and the repeater transmitter will drop.

17-1

7K • Chapter 17
If a station can override the offending station and enter the Reset Transmitter
Timeout Timer command (on page 17-7), the transmitter will return to the air
and the timer will be reset. When the offending station releases his/her pushto-talk button for at least one second (and no one has reset the timer for the
offending station), the timeout message will be sent again to inform him/her
that part of their transmission may have been lost.

Transmitter Unkey Delay
The Transmitter Unkey Delay holds the transmitter keyed for a programmable
period of time to prevent dropout between software keying requests. Event
macros can be defined that allow actions to occur at these events, eg. to
disable a CTCSS encoder before the transmitter is unkeyed (see page 17-14).
All the above delays and messages—as well as the transmitter timeout timer—
are fully programmable by the trustee. If, for example, the trustee does not
wish to have any courtesy delay or courtesy message, he/she may delete both.
In such case, the timer used for transmitter timeout timer will reset immediately
upon the user dropping his carrier. Figure 2 represents the Transmitter Tail
Sequence.
Courtesy Delay
Transmitter Keys
Transmitter Timeout
Timer Starts

Dropout Delay

Courtesy Message

Unkey Delay

Dropout Message

Time
User Keys

Figure 2

17-2

User Unkeys
Courtesy
Delay Starts

Transmitter
Timeout
Timer
Resets

Transmitter
Drops

Transmitter Functions

Select Courtesy Delay
Programs the Courtesy Delay time.
•
•

The Courtesy Delay time is the delay from COR drop to when the
Transmitter Timeout Timer resets and the courtesy message begins. See
Figure 2 on page 17-2.
Enter two digits, from 00 to 50, representing a delay time from 0.0 to 5.0
seconds.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Courtesy Delay

(PW) 32 xx *

(00–50) =
(0.0–5.0) seconds

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Courtesy Delay is 0.5 seconds
Examples:
A generous amount of courtesy delay forces repeater users to delay their
transmissions, thus allowing other stations to break into the conversation. This
is something referred to as an anti-tailgating measure. A station that ignores
the courtesy message (indicating that the transmitter timeout timer has been
reset) runs the risk of timing out the repeater. That station will have to repeat
the portion of its transmission which was lost. To program the courtesy delay
for 1.4 seconds, for example, enter this command:
(PW) 32 14 *
Some repeater groups prefer no courtesy time; that is, the transmitter timeout
timer resets as soon as the COR drops. The courtesy message may also be
erased.
To program the courtesy delay for zero delay, enter this command:
(PW) 32 00 *

17-3

7K • Chapter 17

Select Dropout Delay
Sets the Dropout Delay time.
•
•

The Dropout Delay time is the interval from the end of the Courtesy
Delay/Courtesy Message (and Reset Transmitter Timeout Timer) to the
moment the transmitter is unkeyed. See Figure 2 on page 17-2.
Enter the two digits, from 00 to 50, representing a delay from 0.0 to 5.0
seconds.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Dropout Delay

(PW) 30 xx *

(00–50) =
(0.0–5.0) seconds

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Dropout Delay is 3.0 seconds
Examples:
Owners of tube-type repeaters sometimes use long a dropout delay to lengthen
the lives of tubes and relays. Fewer transmitter keying transitions will occur,
since the users will keep the transmitter up for the duration of the conversation.
Dropout time for solid-state repeaters is mostly up to personal preference. To
program the dropout delay for 2.1 seconds, for example, enter this command:
(PW) 30 21 *
To program the dropout delay for maximum time, enter the following:
(PW) 30 00 *

17-4

Transmitter Functions

Select Transmitter Timeout Timer
Controls the maximum amount of time an input carrier signal may
be present.
•
•
•
•

The Transmitter Timeout Timer starts timing when the COR becomes
active, and continues to run until reset.
The timer is reset either by command (on page 17-7) or releasing the carrier
signal until the Courtesy Delay time elapses. See Figure 2 on page 17-2.
Enter one, two, or three digits from 1 to 546 to set the transmitter timeout
timer to 0.1 to 54.6 minutes.
To disable the timer completely, enter three zeroes.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Transmitter Timeout Timer

(PW) 40 xxx *

000 = infinity
(001–546) =
(0.1–54.6) minutes

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Transmitter Timeout Timer is 3.0 minutes
Examples:
Some of the ways to program the transmitter timeout timer follow: To change
the transmitter timeout timer from its existing value to 4.5 minutes, enter:
(PW) 40 45 *
To change the transmitter timeout timer to 10.0 minutes, enter:
(PW) 40 100 *
To set the timer for infinity (no timeout), enter:
(PW) 40 000 *

17-5

7K • Chapter 17
Note: The amount of time entered is in minutes and tenths of minutes.
Therefore, entering (PW) 40 3 * will set the timer to 0.3 minutes (18 seconds).
If you want 3.0 minutes, be sure to enter (PW) 40 30 *.
Leading zeroes are permitted. Therefore, entering (PW) 40 30 * would be the
same as entering (PW) 40 030 *.

17-6

Transmitter Functions

Reset Transmitter Timeout Timer
Resets the Transmitter Timeout Timer.
•

If the transmitter timeout timer has been exceeded, this command will allow
the transmitter to return to the air.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Reset Transmitter Timeout Timer

(PW) 10 *

Acknowledgment: None
Errors: None
Default: None
Examples:
If the transmitting station has caused a timeout to occur, the receiving station
may be able to bring the transmitter back up. To do so would require the
receiving station to be able to override the offending station at the repeater site.
Entering the Reset Transmitter Timeout Timer command will reload the timer
as well as return the repeater transmitter to the air.

17-7

7K • Chapter 17

Enable/Disable Transmitter
Enables or disables the specified Transmitter (TX1 or TX2) while
not affecting receiver functions.
•
•

The receiver will still be able to send commands to the controller, but the
transmitter will not be keyed upon receiving COR signals.
See the various Key Transmitter commands beginning on page 17-9.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Transmitter 1

(PW) 63 00 x *

Enable/Disable Transmitter 2

(PW) 63 22 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: None
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered (disable only)
illegal digit entered (disable only)

Default Condition: Both Transmitters TX1 and TX2 are ON (enabled)

17-8

Transmitter Functions

Key Transmitter (Timed)
Keys the specified Transmitter (TX1 or TX2) for a timed period.
•
•
•
•

The specified transmitter will not key under this command if it has been
disabled using the Enable/Disable Transmitter command on page 17-8.
Enter transmitter, 1 or 2.
Enter a 1-, 2-, or 3-digit number representing the amount of time the
transmitter should key (in tenths of minutes).
Enter nothing (or 000) to cancel key request.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Key Transmitter (Timed)

(PW) 00 x yyy *

x = transmitter =
(1 or 2)
yyy = (001–546) =
(0.1–54.6) minutes
or yyy = [ (nothing) ,
0, 00, 000] = cancel
key

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digits entered

Default Condition: Both Transmitters TX1 and TX2 are not requested to key

17-9

7K • Chapter 17

Key Transmitter (Untimed)
Keys the specified transmitter (TX1 or TX2) until canceled.
•
•
•

The specified transmitter will not key under these commands if it has been
disabled using the Enable/Disable Transmitter command on page 17-8.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (cancel), 1 for ON (key).
The transmitter will remain keyed indefinitely, until canceled.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Key Transmitter 1 (Untimed)

(PW) 63 41 x *

Key Transmitter 2 (Untimed)

(PW) 63 42 x *

1 = key
0 = cancel key
1 = key
0 = cancel key

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Conditions: Both Transmitters TX1 and TX2 are not requested to key

17-10

Transmitter Functions

Enable/Disable Transmitter Minimum Unkey Delay
Enables or disables the transmitter minimum unkey delay.
•

•

A Minimum Unkey Delay is normally observed on Transmitter #1 to prevent
it from unkeying between software keying requests. If this delay is disabled,
the transmitter may drop out between messages or other activities that
require keying.
The delay may be disabled in special applications (such as half-duplex
linking) where fast unkeying is desired.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable TX1 Minimum Unkey Delay

(PW) 63 31 x *

Enable/Disable TX2 Minimum Unkey Delay

(PW) 63 32 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Conditions: Minimum Unkey Delay for TX1 is ON (enabled);
for TX2 is OFF (disabled)

17-11

7K • Chapter 17

Select Transmitter Minimum Unkey Delay
Programs the minimum amount of time for a transmitter to unkey.
•
•
•
•

A Transmitter 1 Minimum Unkey Delay can be programmed from 0 to 655.3
seconds.
A Transmitter 2 Minimum Unkey Delay can be programmed from 0 to 655.3
seconds.
Enter the timeout value as 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits, leading zeroes are not
required.
A programmed Minimum Unkey Delay will not be present unless it is
enabled using the Enable/Disable Transmitter Minimum Unkey Delay
command (see page 17-11).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Tx1 Minimum Unkey Delay

(PW) 49 98 xxxx *

from table below

Select Tx2 Minimum Unkey Delay

(PW) 49 99 xxxx *

from table below

Data Digit

Explanation

xxxx = 0000-6553

seconds in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to
655.3 seconds as 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
invalid timer or seconds parameter

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To set the Transmitter 1 Minimum Unkey Delay to 0.4 second, enter the command:

(PW) 49 98 4 *
To set the Transmitter 2 Minimum Unkey Delay to 5.0 seconds, enter the command:

(PW) 49 99 50 *

17-12

Transmitter Functions

Select Receiver-to-Transmitter-Triggered Macros
Allows the programmer to execute macros based on receiver-totransmitter activity.
•
•
•
•

Macros can be executed based on receiver-to-transmitter activity.
Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the 4-digit name of the
macro you wish to have executed at the transition, and the (*).
If the macro name has fewer than 4 digits, enter leading zeros.
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Macro to Any-Receiver-Active to Tx1

(PW) 26 11 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to All-Receivers-Inactive to
Tx1

(PW) 26 09 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Any-Receiver-Active to Tx2

(PW) 26 73 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to All-Receivers-Inactive to
Tx2

(PW) 26 74 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned.

17-13

7K • Chapter 17

Select Transmitter PTT-Triggered Macros
Allows the programmer to execute macros based on transmitter
keying.
•
•
•
•

Each transmitter has its own PTT Inactive-to-Active Macro, PTT Active-toInactive Before Unkey Delay Macro, and PTT Active-to-Inactive Macro.
Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the 4-digit name of the
macro you wish to have executed at the transition, and the (*).
If the macro name has fewer than 4 digits, enter leading zeros.
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Macro to Tx1 PTT Inactive-to-Active

(PW) 26 82 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Tx1 PTT Active-to-Inactive
Before Unkey Delay

(PW) 26 83 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Tx1 PTT Active-to-Inactive

(PW) 26 84 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Tx2 PTT Inactive-to-Active

(PW) 26 85 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Tx2 PTT Active-to-Inactive
Before Unkey Delay

(PW) 26 86 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Tx2 PTT Active-to-Inactive

(PW) 26 87 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned.

17-14

Transmitter Functions

PTT

Inactive-toActive Macro

Tx Unkey Delay

Before-UnkeyDelay Macro

Active-toInactive Macro

Example 1:
PTT-triggered macros provide a way to generate messages, control logic
outputs, start timers, etc., for functions that need to be synchronized to a
transmitter’s operation. The Inactive-to-Active macro is executed when the
transmitter is keyed. The Active-to-Inactive macro is executed when the
transmitter is unkeyed. The Active-to-Inactive Before Unkey Delay macro is
executed a programmable amount of time before the transmitter is actually
unkeyed.
As an example, let’s say that you have a CTCSS encoder on your repeater
transmitter and your repeater users program their radios to only open their
receivers when a CTCSS tone is present. If the CTCSS tone is always present
on your transmitter, then, when the transmitter unkeys, a squelch burst is heard
in your users’ receivers. To prevent the squelch burst, you could disable the
CTCSS tone on your transmitter a small amount of time before the transmitter
is unkeyed so that the users’ receivers would close before the squelch burst
could occur.
To control a CTCSS encoder, you would write two macros and assign them to
the Inactive-to-Active and Active-to-Inactive Before Unkey Delay-triggered
macros to enable and disable the CTCSS encoder using a Logic Output.
To create a macro that turns on Logic Output 7 to enable the CTCSS encoder,
enter the following:
(PW) 20 9107 (PW) 70 7 *
To create a macro that turns off Logic Output 7 to disable the CTCSS encoder,
enter the following:
(PW) 20 9108 (PW) 71 7 *
To assign these macros to the PTT-triggered events, enter the following:
(PW) 26 82 9107 *
(PW) 26 83 9108 *

17-15

7K • Chapter 17
To adjust the amount of time that the transmitter stays keyed after the tone
encoder is disabled, set the Transmitter Minimum Unkey Delay (see page 1715). For example, to set the Tx1 Minimum Unkey Delay to 0.4 seconds, enter
the following:
(PW) 49 98 4 *

Note: an alternate way to control a CTCSS tone on Transmitter 1 is to use the
controller’s dedicated CTCSS audio gate (see page 10-2). When enabled, this
audio gate opens to pass audio when Transmitter 1 is keyed and closes at the
beginning of the Tx1 Minimum Unkey Delay. You would use the Select Tx1
Minimum Unkey Delay command as in the example above to adjust the
amount of time the transmitter stays keyed after the CTCSS encoder is
disabled. This method does not require the use of PTT-triggered macros.
Example 2:
The PTT-triggered macros can be used with the User Timers to control
external equipment that should operate for a time after a transmitter is
unkeyed. See page 20-7 for an example of controlling a fan.

17-16

Repeater Functions

Chapter 18

Repeater
Functions
The commands in this chapter relate to the repeater, which we define as the
Receiver 1 and Transmitter 1 combination. Receivers 2 and 3, and Transmitter
2, are generally viewed as link devices, and are described in other chapters
(see Receiver Functions on page 16-1, Transmitter Functions on page 17-1,
and Links on page 13-1).

18-1

7K • Chapter 18

Select Repeater Access Mode (Path 1)
Selects one of seven possible Access Modes for Path 1.
•

Enter one digit from the Repeater Access Mode Table below.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit (Mode)

Select Repeater Access Mode (Path 1)

(PW) 57 00 x *

Repeater Access
Mode Table (below)

Mode

Repeater Access

Explanation

0
1

No Access
Carrier Access

PL Access

And-PL Access

Or-PL Access

Anti-PL Access

Always Access

Activity on the COR and PL inputs is ignored.
Activity on the COR input will key the
transmitter; activity on the PL input is ignored.
Activity on the PL input will key the transmitter;
activity on the COR input is ignored.
Activity on both the COR and PL inputs
simultaneously will key the transmitter.
Activity on either the COR or PL inputs will key
the transmitter.
Activity on the COR input simultaneously with
no activity on the PL input will key the
transmitter.
Activity on the COR and PL inputs is ignored.
The path is always enabled.

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Access Mode for Path 1 is Mode 1 (Carrier Access)
Note: Repeater access mode may be made different from DTMF decoder
access mode, if desired. (See page 11-5.)

18-2

Repeater Functions
Examples:
Assume that the repeater is in carrier access mode, and that PL access is
desired. The proper command would be:
(PW) 57 00 2 *
A better mode for many repeater installations is mode 3, And-PL access. This
mode has better rejection of adjacent-channel interference than mode 2, since
noise falsing from unsquelched audio is eliminated. Also, COR drops out more
quickly than PL, allowing a quick dropout result. Enter this command:
(PW) 57 00 3 *
Mode 4 allows both carrier access and PL operation. Since PL is more easily
detected, PL users will find increased range. Carrier access users are
unaffected. The squelch may be tightened to suppress band opening problems.
Anti-PL is used when the repeater is co- channel with another, PL-accessed
repeater. Users of the second system are kept out of the Anti-PL system.
If you broadcast Newsline Report, the no access mode (mode 0) means that
transmissions on the repeater input are ignored and can’t interfere with the
broadcast.
If you need to control the system on its input, place the DTMF decoder in a PL
mode.

18-3

7K • Chapter 18

Select Repeater Activity-Triggered Macros
Select Repeater Activity Counter/Timer
Allows the programmer to execute macros based on the activity of
the repeater.
Sets the Repeater Activity Counter/Timer (both the Event Count
and the Duration).
•
•

•

No data digits are required for the macros.
Select the Repeater Activity Counter/Timer (Event Count) using 1-digit, 0–9.
Setting the counter to 0 (zero) means that the Post-Activity Macro will
execute each activity cycle. Setting the counter to 1 means that the postactivity macro will execute every other activity cycle, and so on. Setting the
counter to 9, therefore, means that the post- activity macro will execute
every 10th cycle.
Select the Repeater Activity Counter/Timer (Duration) using 2 digits
representing the delay. (00–99) equals (0.0–9.9) minute delay.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Repeater Start-of-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 14 (macro
name) *
(PW) 26 15 (macro
name) *
(PW) 45 x yy*

not applicable

Select Repeater Post-Activity Macro
Select Repeater Activity Counter/Timer

not applicable
x = (event count) =
(0–9)
y = (duration) =
(00–99) = (0.0–9.9)
minute delay

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default: No Macros are assigned; Event Count is 0; Duration is 1.0 minutes

18-4

Repeater Functions
Example:
Applications for this feature include tape recording all repeater conversations,
in which case, the activity count would be set to zero. However, if a taped
message is to be played every 5th usage of the repeater, set the activity
counter/timer to 4.
The three related Select Repeater Activity-Triggered Macros commands allow
the programmer to execute macros based on repeater activity. For example, a
bulletin may be sent a few minutes after the last activity of the repeater. Since
the repeater was recently used, it is likely an audience still exists to hear the
message. Of course, the bulletin would be too repetitious to send every time
the repeater is used. In this light, the activity counter/ timer allows the
programmer to select how often to execute the macro.
The Repeater Start-of-Activity Macro is executed when a fresh key-up occurs.
This event starts an “activity cycle” which ends a certain time after the tail
finishes. If activity occurs before the activity counter/timer expires, the activity
cycle is simply extended. When the activity counter/timer finally expires, the
Repeater Post-Activity Macro is executed. The activity counter/timer, which
watches the number of activity cycles, is programmable in duration from 0–9.9
minutes and from 0–9 events.
Once the activity cycle has been completed, the start-of-activity macro is again
“armed” and ready to execute at the next key-up activity. This is true regardless
of whether the last repeater post-activity macro was actually executed (it may
have been waiting for the proper activity count).
Note: The Repeater Activity Counter/Timer starts when the dropout message is
sent.

18-5

7K • Chapter 18

Select Anti-Kerchunker Parameters
Programs the “Anti-Kerchunk” Key-up Delay and Re-Arm Delay for
the repeater.
•
•
•

Users must key for the selected length of time before the repeater
transmitter keys.
Once the Key-Up Delay is exceeded, the feature is disabled.
The anti-kerchunker is Re-Armed if no activity is present for a selected
length of time after the repeater transmitter drops.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Key-Up Delay

(PW) 80 xx *

Select Re-Arm Delay

(PW) 99 10 xx *

xx = duration =
(00–99) = (0.0–9.9)
seconds
xx = duration =
(00–99) = (0.0–9.9)
minutes

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Key-Up Delay is 0 seconds; Re-Arm Delay is to 0 minutes

18-6

Repeater Functions

Examples:
If you want to require a one-half second key-up delay, enter:
(PW) 80 05 *
Unless changed, the anti-kerchunker will re-arm as soon as the repeater
transmitter drops. If you want a 1.5 minute delay in re-arming, enter:
(PW) 99 10 15 *
To disable the anti-kerchunker, set the key-up delay to 0:
(PW) 80 00 *

18-7

7K • Chapter 18

Select Anti-Kerchunk No Hangtime Mode
Allows the programmer to modify the operation of the
Anti-Kerchunker.
•
•
•

By default and when disabled, the Anti-Kerchunker does not key the
transmitter during the Key-Up Delay.
By enabling the No Hangtime Mode, the transmitter is keyed during the
Key-Up Delay.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Anti-Kerchunk No Hangtime Mode

(PW) 63 30 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Disabled.

18-8

Repeater Functions

Select (Review) Courtesy Messages
Program unique Courtesy Messages for each receiver.
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, the desired message, and a
(*).
Any message may be any combination of message types including CW,
beeps, page tones, speech, etc.
The maximum size of any message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes).
You must count the control character. Therefore, any message could have
46 CW characters, 23 synthesized speech words, and so on.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*). Do not enter any message.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Courtesy Message for Rx1

(PW) 31 10 (message) *

Select Courtesy Message for Rx2

(PW) 31 11 (message) *

Select Courtesy Message for Rx3

(PW) 31 12 (message) *

Review Courtesy Message for Rx1

(PW) 34 10 *

Review Courtesy Message for Rx2

(PW) 34 11 *

Review Courtesy Message for Rx3

(PW) 34 12 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

? err 2

illegal digit entered

Default Condition:
Command

Default Condition

Select Courtesy Message for Rx1

60mS 440 Hz beep (9910 74 09)

Select Courtesy Message for Rx2

60mS 660 Hz beep (9910 74 16)

Select Courtesy Message for Rx3

60mS 880 Hz beep (9910 74 21)

18-9

7K • Chapter 18
Example:
Suppose we want to change the courtesy message for Receiver 1 to a burst of
2 beeps. We want the two beeps to be 25 and 21, we want them to be 40mS
in duration, and we want no gap between them.
Looking up this information in the Beep Character Set Tables beginning on
page A-5, we find: 55 turns the automatic beep gap OFF; 73 changes the beep
duration to 40mS; and, the control character for a beep message is 9910.
Therefore, the complete command to change the courtesy message is:
(PW) 31 10 9910 55 73 25 21 *

18-10

Repeater Functions

Select Repeater Action-Triggered Macros
Allows the programmer to execute macros based on repeater
activity.
•
•
•
•

Macros can be executed based on receiver activity, receiver inactivity and
when a courtesy message is sent.
Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the 4-digit name of the
macro you wish to have executed at the transition, and the (*).
If the macro name has fewer than 4 digits, enter leading zeros.
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Macro to Any-Receiver-Active

(PW) 26 11 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to All-Receivers-Inactive

(PW) 26 09 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Courtesy Message

(PW) 26 10 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Dropout Message

(PW) 26 08 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Repeater Timeout

(PW) 26 18 (macro name) *

Assign Macro to Return-From-RepeaterTimeout

(PW) 26 19 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned.

18-11

7K • Chapter 18

18-12

Base Station Functions

Chapter 19

Base Station
Functions
The controller includes features that allow commercial customers to operate
Base Stations from standard dial-up phone lines or microwave links. The base
station is connected to the Receiver 1 and Transmitter 1 ports in place of a
repeater. The commands described in this chapter would not normally be used
if you are controlling a repeater instead of a base station.
Unlike a repeater, a base station operates half duplex—you must alternate
between transmitting and receiving. Therefore, commands are needed to place
the controller into half-duplex mode and to allow talkout from the phone line to
the transmitter.

19-1

7K • Chapter 19

Enable/Disable Star/Pound Talkout
Turns ON or OFF the Star/Pound (*/#) Talkout feature.
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

This feature is used when controlling a Half-Duplex Base Station from a
standard dial-up phone line.
When enabled, the phone line party has control of the DTMF decoder.
Receiver #1 audio is fed to the phone line as soon as the feature is
enabled.
The (*) button keys transmitter 1 and feeds phone line audio to the
transmitter. The (#) button unkeys transmitter 1 and feeds receiver 1 audio
to the phone line. You have 40 seconds from the time this feature is
enabled until the (*) must be entered. Otherwise, the controller will go onhook.
This command must be entered each time a call is placed to the controller.
Do not enable the Pound Down (# Dump) command on page 7-8 if you are
using Star/ Pound Talkout, since the (#) character will then terminate the
call.
See the Select Talkout Transmitter Mode command on page 19-4.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Star/Pound Talkout

(PW) 63 13 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Star/Pound Talkout is OFF (disabled)

19-2

Base Station Functions

Examples:
Dial the base station telephone number. When it answers, enter:
(PW) 63 13 1 *
This puts the controller into star/pound talkout mode. To exit the mode, enter:
(PW) 63 13 0 *.
Note: Be sure you have selected Base Station Mode with the Select Talkout
Transmitter Mode command on page 19-4.

19-3

7K • Chapter 19

Select Talkout Transmitter Mode
Selects either Repeater Mode or Base Station Mode for phone line
talkout applications.
•
•
•
•

In Repeater Mode, transmitter #1 stays keyed during the entire
conversation. This is the usual mode for all repeater autopatch applications.
In Base Station Mode, transmitter #1 is keyed and unkeyed by the (*) and
(#) characters sent by the phone line party.
This command works only when the Enable/Disable Star/Pound Talkout
command is enabled (page 19-2).
The selected mode does not change when the call is terminated.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Select Talkout Transmitter Mode

(PW) 63 14 x *

0 = Repeater Mode
1 = Base Station
Mode

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Repeater Mode is selected

19-4

Base Station Functions

Enable/Disable Command Execution
on Interdigit Timer
Selects whether DTMF Interdigit Timer serves to cancel a partial
command or execute a command that is not terminated.
•
•
•

Used by those commercial customers owning radios that lack the (*) and (#)
characters.
Although commands can be executed on End-of-Transmission, that feature
cannot operate if a stuck mic exists in the system.
Enter one digit, 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for RX1
Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for RX2
Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for RX3
Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for Phone Line

(PW) 63 60 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

(PW)•63 61 x *
(PW) 63 62 x *
(PW) 63 63 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Command Execution on Interdigit Timer is OFF (disabled)
for all receivers
Examples:
Recall that the DTMF Interdigit Timer measures the time delay between DTMF
characters. Normally, the command buffer is cleared if this timer expires.
However, the command described here changes the meaning of the timer: If
the timer expires, the command is executed rather than cleared. The user
would enter his command, then wait for execution.

19-5

7K • Chapter 19

19-6

User Timers

Chapter 20

User Timers
The Controller features ten User Timers. These timers can be used to
implement timed operations not otherwise implemented by the controller.
The User Timers can be set in 0.1-second increments to 655.3 seconds
(slightly less than 11 minutes). When a timer times out, an event macro is
executed to perform a user-defined operation.
The User Timers can be operated as “one-shot” timers or as “retriggerable”
timers.
•

One-shot timers are timers that are started and will time to completion.
Even if the start command is executed again, the duration of the timer will
be measured from the first start request:
Programmed Time

Start

•

Start

Execute Macro

Retriggerable timers are timers that are started and can be restarted during
their programmed time. When retriggerable timers do time out, the time
period will be the full programmed time from the last restart command:
Programmed Time

Restart

Execute Macro

20-1

7K • Chapter 20

Select Timeout Value
Programs the duration of a User Timer.
•
•
•
•

The range of a one-shot or a retriggerable timer is from 0.1 second to 655.3
seconds.
Enter the 2-digit number to select a timer. Use a leading zero.
Enter the timeout value as 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits, leading zeroes are not
required.
If the timer is running when this command is executed, the timer continues
to run until this new timeout value is reached. But, if the new timeout value
is less than the time already expired on the timer the new timeout value is
set, the timer is stopped, and the macro assigned to the timer is executed.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Set Timer Timeout Value

(PW) 49 (timer) 03
(seconds) *

from table below

Data Digit

Explanation

Timer, 00-09
Seconds, 0001-6553

select one of 10 timers, 2 digits are required
seconds in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to
655.3 seconds as 1, 2, 3, or 4 digits

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
invalid timer or seconds parameter

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To set the timeout duration of timer 00 to 27.0 seconds, enter the command:
(PW) 49 00 03 270 *
To set the timeout duration of timer 07 to 8 minutes (480 seconds), enter the
command:
(PW) 49 07 03 4800 *

20-2

User Timers

Select Timer Event Macro
Assigns the macro to be triggered when the one-shot or
retriggerable timer times out.
•
•
•

Enter the 2-digit timer number and 4-digit macro name to be called upon
timeout of the timer. Use leading zeros if required.
To remove the assignment to the macro, enter the command with no macro
name.
If the timer is running when this command is executed, the timer will
continue to run. The last macro entered by this command will be executed
at the end of the timer period.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Assign Timer Event Macro

from table below

Unassign Timer Event Macro

(PW) 49 (timer) 02
(macro name) *
(PW) 49 (timer) 02 *

Data Digit

Explanation

timer, 00-09
macro name

select one of 10 timers, 2 digits are required
the name of the macro to be triggered

from table below

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macro assigned.
Example:
To assign macro 9101 to timer 00, enter the command:
(PW) 49 00 02 9101 *
To assign macro 9 to timer 04, enter the command:
(PW) 49 04 02 0009 *

20-3

7K • Chapter 20

Stop Timer
Stops the one-shot or retriggerable timer.
•
•
•

Enter the 2-digit timer number. Use a leading zero.
If the timer is running, it is stopped without triggering the macro.
If the timer is stopped or has timed out, this command has no effect.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Stop Timer

(PW) 49 (timer) 00 *

from table below

Data Digit

Explanation

timer, 00-09

select one of 10 timers, 2 digits are required

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To stop timer 00, enter the command:
(PW) 49 00 00 *
To stop timer 09, enter the command:
(PW) 49 09 00 *

20-4

User Timers

Start Timer (Retriggerable)
Starts the selected timer as a retriggerable timer.
•
•
•

Enter the 2-digit timer number. Use a leading zero.
If the timer is stopped, the timer is reset to zero time expired and started.
If the timer is running, the timer is reset to zero time expired and continues.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Start/Restart Timer (Retriggerable)

(PW) 49 (timer) 01 *

from table below

Data Digit

Explanation

timer, 00-09

select one of 10 timers, 2 digits are required

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To start retriggerable timer 00 or retrigger it, enter the command:
(PW) 49 00 01 *
To start retriggerable timer 02 or retrigger it, enter the command:
(PW) 49 02 01 *

20-5

7K • Chapter 20

Start Timer (One-Shot)
Starts the selected timer as a one-shot timer.
•
•
•

Enter the 2-digit timer number. Use a leading zero.
If the timer is stopped, the timer is set to zero time expired and started.
If the timer is running, the command is ignored.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Start Timer (One-Shot)

(PW) 49 (timer) 04 *

from table below

Data Digit

Explanation

timer, 00-09

select one of 10 timers, 2 digits are required

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To start one-shot timer 00, enter the command:
(PW) 49 00 04 *
To start one-shot timer 08, enter the command:
(PW) 49 08 04 *

20-6

User Timers
Example: Fan Control
Installing a fan to cool a repeater or link transmitter is always a good idea. It
can extend the life of the transmitter significantly. But, leaving the fan running
all the time will shorten the life of the fan.
To extend the life of the fan, the fan can be operated whenever the transmitter
is keyed and for a couple of minutes after. A User Timer can be used to
control the amount of time the fan stays on after the transmitter unkeys.
Three macros will be required to implement the fan control: one is triggered
when the transmitter is keyed, a second is triggered when the transmitter is
unkeyed, and a third is triggered when the timer times out. To control the fan,
a Logic Output will be used to power the fan through a switching device, e.g. a
relay or HexFET.
For this example, we’ll create macros 8701, 8702, and 8703. We’ll use timer
#9 and logic output #1.
First, setup the timer and assign the macros.
; Setup
(PW) 49
(PW) 49
(PW) 26
(PW) 26

09
09
82
84

03 1200 * ; Set Timer 120.0 seconds
02 8703 * ; Set Timer Macro
8701 *
; Set Tx1 Active Macro
8702 *
; Set Tx1 Inactive Macro

Enter the macro that is triggered when the transmitter is keyed. This macro
stops the timer and enables the logic output to activate the fan for the entire
time that the transmitter is keyed.
; Macro: Tx1 Active: Stop Timer, Logic Out On
(PW) 20 8701 (PW) 49 09 00 * ; stop timer
(PW) 29 8701 (PW) 70 1 * ; Logic Out 1 ON
Enter the macro that is triggered when the transmitter is unkeyed. This macro
starts the timer and leaves the fan on.
; Macro: Tx1 Inactive
(PW) 20 8702 (PW) 49 09 01 *

; start timer

Enter the macro that is triggered when the timer times out. This macro turns
off the fan.
; Macro: Timer Timeout
(PW) 20 8703 (PW) 71 1 * ; Logic Out 1 OFF

20-7

7K • Chapter 20
Example: An Activity Timer
The repeater and each receiver input has an activity timer available to cause a
macro to be triggered after activity on the repeater has ceased. But,
sometimes one activity timer is not enough. A User Timer can be used to
implement one or more additional activity timers.
Three macros will be required to implement the activity timer: one is triggered
when the repeater is activated by a receiver, a second is triggered when all
receivers are inactive, and a third is triggered when the timer times out. Our
example triggers a macro that speaks a message, but any commands can be
executed at that time.
For this example, we’ll create macros 8711, 8712, and 8713. We’ll use timer
#8.
First, setup the timer and assign the macros.
; Setup
(PW) 49
(PW) 49
(PW) 26
(PW) 26

08
08
11
09

03 3000 * ; Set Timer 300.0 seconds
02 8713 * ; Set Timer Macro
8711 *
; Set Any-Rx-Active Macro
8712 *
; Set All-Rx-Inactive Macro

Enter the macro that is triggered when any receiver is active. This macro stops
the timer.
; Macro: Any-Rx-Active: Stop Timer
(PW) 20 8711 (PW) 49 08 00 * ; stop timer
Enter the macro that is triggered when all receivers are inactive. This macro
starts the timer.
; Macro: All-Rx-Inactive
(PW) 20 8712 (PW) 49 08 01 *

; start timer

Enter the macro that is triggered when the timer times out. This macro can
perform any operation, but in our example it speaks a message.
; Macro: Timer Timeout, speak 1-second-pause + “Net”
(PW) 20 8713 (PW) 15 9960 0000 0331 *

20-8

Remote Base Interface

Chapter 21

Remote Base
Interface
Your controller has many features that allow you to customize the operation of
the controller when connected to a Doug Hall Electronics RBI-1 Remote Base
Interface. All of the capabilities of the RBI-1 are supported.
The 7K Remote Base Interface has the following features:
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

All remote base user functions use a password that is different from the
Master, Control Operator, or Autopatch Passwords defined within the
controller. Because of this, users do not need to know these passwords to
use the remote base functions.
User functions are optimized to minimize the number of keystrokes users
must enter to perform common functions.
Macros can be used to define memory channels.
Direct frequency entry allows easy frequency and transmitter offset
changes.
The time-of-day scheduler can be used to control when the remote base
functions are available.
The controller can speak the current radio configuration.
Eight additional logic outputs on the RBI-1 are available for controlling
external devices.

21-1

7K • Chapter 21

Remote Base Setup and Configuration
Wiring
You will need to wire the RBI-1 to the controller using the connections shown in
the table, below. The first three wires allow the controller to send commands to
the RBI-1. The rest of the wires connect the RBI-1 to the controller’s Receiver
2 and Transmitter 2 connections.
7K
J3 Pin 16
J3 Pin 17
J3 Pin 18
J3 Pin 25
J2 Pin 8
J2 Pin 22
J2 Pin 15
J2 Pin 19
J2 Pin 3
J2 Pin 11

RBI-1
J2 Pin 1
J2 Pin 4
J2 Pin 3
J2 Pin 9
J2 Pin 6
J2 Pin 5
J2 Pin 7
J2 Pin 8

Purpose
RBI-1 Reset
RBI-1 Clock
RBI-1 Data
Ground
Rx2 Audio In
Shield
Tx2 Audio Out
Shield
Rx2 COR
Tx2 PTT

Switch Setting
DIP Switch #2 is used to invert the Receiver 2 COR signal from the RBI-1. Set
the dip switch as follows:
DIP Switch #2 = OFF. This inverts COR #2 for Rx2.

Software Configuration
The radios connected to the RBI-1 only operate half-duplex -- they cannot
transmit and receive at the same time. The Link Paths of the controller define
which receivers are connected to which transmitters. By default, Receiver 2 is
connected to Transmitter 2. This link path must be disabled for proper
operation of the remote base interface.
(PW) 63 85 0 * ;Disable Path 5 (Rx2 to Tx2)
By default, the controller will send an identifier message to Transmitter 2.
Delete this message if you don’t want to send an ID message.
(PW) 31 33 *
;Delete Initial ID Message for Tx2
(PW) 31 34 *
;Delete Normal ID Message for Tx2
By default, the 7K will mute all DTMF tones from Receiver 1 to Transmitter 2.
If you wish to pass tones to Transmitter 2, enter the following command:
(PW) 63 53 0 * ;Disable Rx1-Tx2 DTMF Mute
By default, the remote base is disabled. To enable it for use, enter the
following command:
(PW) 63 71 1 * ;Enable Remote Base

21-2

Remote Base Interface

Event Triggered Macros
The system owner must create two macros that are triggered by user function
access to the remote base interface. These Event-Triggered Macros allow the
users to enter simple user function commands to access the remote base to
make use of it, and to dump the remote base when they are done with it.
Below are the recommended macros to use for this function. They can be
modified or enhanced as necessary.
Define a Remote Base Access-Triggered Macro to allow a user to access the
remote base interface. This macro is invoked automatically by the User
Function: Access Remote Base command. This macro enables the link paths
from the repeater receiver and transmitter and the remote base receiver and
transmitter. In addition, a message is sent to the user as an acknowledgment
that the remote base is now available.
(PW) 20 9000 (PW)
(PW) 29 9000 (PW)
;Send “Remote Up”
(PW) 29 9000 (PW)

63 82 1 * ;Enable Path 2 (RX2 to TX1)
63 84 1 * ;Enable Path 4 (RX1 to TX2)
Tones
15 9910 54 48 49 50 *

Assign this macro to the Remote Base Access-Triggered Macro by entering the
following command:
(PW) 26 91 9000 *
Define a Remote Base Dump-Triggered Macro to allow a user to terminate
access to the remote base interface. This macro is invoked automatically by
the User Function: Dump Remote Base command. This macro disables the
link paths between the repeater receiver and transmitter and the remote base
receiver and transmitter. In addition, a message is sent to the user as an
acknowledgment that the remote base is no longer available.
(PW) 20 9001 (PW) 63
(PW) 29 9001 (PW) 63
; Send “Remote Down”
(PW) 29 9001 (PW) 15

82 0 * ;Disable RX2 to TX1
84 0 * ;Disable RX1 to TX2
Tones
9910 54 50 49 48 *

Assign this macro to the Remote Base Dump-Triggered Macro by entering the
following command:
(PW) 26 90 9001 *

21-3

7K • Chapter 21

Assign Remote Base Password
Assigns a new password for remote base users.
•
•

The new Remote Base Password may be 2, 4, or 6 digits in length.
The new Remote Base Password may be any combination of the numbers
0-9 and the letters A-D.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Assign Remote Base Password

(PW) 39 02 (new remote base password) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: Remote Base Password defaults to 98.
Example:
To change the remote base password to 22, enter the following:
(PW) 39 02 22 *

21-4

Remote Base Interface

Select Remote Base Access- and
Dump-Triggered Macros
Assigns macros to be executed upon accessing or dumping the
remote base.
•
•
•

Enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the 4-digit name of the
macro you wish to have executed at the transition, and the (*).
If the macro name has fewer than 4 digits, enter leading zeros.
If you wish to prevent a macro from being executed that was previously
assigned, enter just the password, the 4-digit root number, and the (*).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Remote Base Access-Triggered
Macro

(PW) 26 91 (macro name) *

Select Remote Base Dump-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 90 (macro name) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: No macros assigned.
Example:
These commands make the remote base interface much more flexible. For
example, when a user enters the Access Remote Base command, a macro can
be executed to enable the controller link paths, power up a remote base radio,
set the frequency, select an antenna, and rotate the antenna to point in a
particular direction; when a user enters the Dump Remote Base command, a
macro can be executed to disable the controller link paths and turn off the
power to the remote base radio.

21-5

7K • Chapter 21

Select (Review) Remote Base Off Message
This message is sent over the repeater transmitter when the remote
base is off.
•
•
•
•
•

The Remote Base Off Message is sent when a User Function command
has been executed and the remote base has not been enabled (see
page 21-7).
The message may be a combination of message types including CW,
beeps, page tones, speech, etc.
The maximum size of the message is 50 bytes (50 2-digit codes). You must
count the control characters. Therefore, any message could have 46 CW
characters, 23 synthesized speech words, etc.
To delete a message, enter the password, the 4-digit root number, and the
(*); do not enter any message.
If this message is not programmed, the default CW message will be sent
only when Command Responses are enabled.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Default

Select Remote Base Off Message
Review Remote Base Off Message

(PW) 31 60 (message) *
(PW) 34 60 *

OFF in CW
none

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1
? err 2

wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The default CW message is sent only if Command
Responses are enabled.
Example:
To program the Remote Base Off Message to say “Remote Base Off”, enter
the command:
(PW) 31 60 9960 0000 0418 0049 0355 *

21-6

Remote Base Interface

Reset RBI-1
Perform a hardware reset of the RBI-1 and the attached remote
base radios.
•
•
•
•

This command performs a reset of the RBI-1 and attached remote base
radios.
The RBI-1 Reset output (7K J3-16) is pulsed to hard-reset the RBI-1.
After the Reset occurs, the previous radio settings are sent to the RBI-1.
This command may take several seconds to complete.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Reset RBI-1

(PW) 39 91 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To reset the RBI-1 and attached radios, enter the following:
(PW) 39 91 *

21-7

7K • Chapter 21

Enable/Disable Access to the Remote Base
A flexible control scheme controls access to the remote base.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Turns ON or OFF the remote base interface.
Enter 1 digit: 0 for OFF (disabled), 1 for ON (enabled).
Remote Base Enable #1 is intended to be used by the Control Operator as
a master enable/disable of the remote base interface.
Remote Base Enable #2 is intended to be used by the Time-of-Day
Scheduler to control the times when the remote base interface may be
used.
Remote Base Enable #3 is intended to be used by the Control Operator to
override the Time-of-Day Scheduler to activate the remote base interface at
a time of day when the interface would be normally disabled.
If the Time-of-Day Scheduler is not going to be utilized, only Remote Base
Enable #1 needs to be manipulated by the Control Operator.
Programmer’s note: the remote base is enabled when the following
equation evaluates to TRUE: EN1 AND (EN2 OR EN3).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Data Digit

Enable/Disable Remote Base Enable #1

(PW) 63 71 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Enable/Disable Remote Base Enable #2

(PW) 63 72 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Enable/Disable Remote Base Enable #3

(PW) 63 73 x *

0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

? err 1

wrong number of digits entered

Default Condition: Enable #1 is OFF; Enable #2 is ON; Enable #3 is OFF.

21-8

Remote Base Interface
Example:
The Control Operator can enable the remote base interface by entering:
(PW) 63 71 1 *
The Control Operator can disable the remote base interface by entering:
(PW) 63 71 0 *
To have the Scheduler control remote base access, define Scheduler setpoints
to disable the remote base interface during afternoon drive times (4:00 P.M.
through 6:30 P.M.) Monday through Friday. This requires macros to be
executed by the Scheduler.
First, define macros containing the commands to enable and disable the
remote base interface using Enable #2:
(PW) 20 9002 (PW) 63 72 0 * ; disable remote base
(PW) 20 9003 (PW) 63 72 1 * ; enable remote base
Then, define Scheduler setpoints to execute these macros:
(PW) 28 00 9002 99 32 16 00 * ; disable at 4 PM
(PW) 28 01 9003 99 32 18 30 * ; enable at 6:30 PM

21-9

7K • Chapter 21

User Functions: Controlling the Radios
Users will operate the remote base radios using the User Functions commands
described on the following pages. These commands allow users to turn on and
off the remote base interface, change VFO frequency or memory channel,
transmitter offset and power, and change the operation of the CTCSS encoder
and decoder.
Note: not all features are available in all remote base radios. See the Doug
Hall Electronics RBI-1 Manual for availability of features in the radios that you
are using.
As the User Function commands are entered, they are immediately sent to the
RBI-1 and on to the radio, with only a small processing delay.
Note: User Function commands are preceded by the Remote Base Password
(shown as RBPW in the following pages) instead of the Master Password or
Control Operator Password (shown as PW where required).
Normally, the remote base interface is off. When a user wants to use the
remote base interface, he will enter the User Function: Access Remote Base
command. This causes the Remote Base Access-Triggered Macro to be
executed setting everything to initial settings that you defined.
The user can then specify a frequency or memory channel to monitor.
Direct Frequency Entry -- A user can directly enter a frequency to monitor or
operate. The transmitter can be initially disabled or it can be enabled with an
offset.
Radio Memory Channels -- A user can select a preprogrammed radio memory
channel. The memory channels can contain the frequency, offset, and CTCSS
information so that information does not need to be entered.
The user can change radio parameters as required to change frequency,
transmit power, CTCSS frequency, etc.
When done with the remote base interface, the user would enter the User
Function: Dump Remote Base. This causes the Remote Base Dump-Triggered
Macro to be executed disabling the interface.

21-10

Remote Base Interface

Defining Memory Channels using Macros
The macros of the 7K controller can be used to predefine memory channels for
easy selection of the most-used frequencies and radio configurations. Because
macros can hold complicated controller commands, changing channels can be
easily done using a short macro name.
The User Function commands described above cause each command to be
sent to the RBI-1 and remote base radio immediately. Since a macro can
contain many radio commands, many data transfers may have to take place to
setup the radio causing an unacceptable processing delay. The Macro
Function commands are queued in controller memory until the Macro Function:
Send Queued Settings command is executed. This causes all radio changes to
be sent in only one data transfer for minimum processing delay.
Here is an example of defining a memory channel using a controller macro.
The macro name we will define is 52. Let’s say that you want the macro to
select 146.520 MHz simplex, low power, and a CTCSS Frequency of 110.9 Hz.
To define the macro, you would enter:
(PW) 20 0052 (RBPW) 21 146520 2 * ;Freq and Offset
(PW) 29 0052 (RBPW) 23 1 *
;Tx Low Power
(PW) 29 0052 (RBPW) 27 15 *
;CTCSS Frequency
(PW) 29 0052 (RBPW) 39 *
;Send Queued Settings
; Pause, then say “Five-Two”
(PW) 29 0052 (PW) 15 9960 0000 0166 0538 *
To execute the macro, enter:
52 *

21-11

7K • Chapter 21

User Function: Access Remote Base
Access the remote base.
•
•
•

Enter the Remote Base Password followed by a 1 and the star (*).
Entering this command causes the Remote Base Access-Triggered Macro
to be executed.
Note: if no Remote Base Access-Triggered Macro has been assigned, this
command will have no effect.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Access Remote Base

(RBPW) 1 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The remote base interface is initially off.
Example:
To access the remote base, enter the following
(RBPW) 1 *

21-12

Remote Base Interface

User Function: Dump Remote Base
Dump the remote base.
•
•
•

Enter the Remote Base Password followed by a 0 and the star (*).
Entering this command causes the Remote Base Dump-Triggered Macro to
be executed.
Note: if no Remote Base Dump-Triggered Macro has been assigned, this
command will have no effect.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Dump Remote Base

(RBPW) 0 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The remote base interface is initially off.
Example:
To dump the remote base, enter the following
(RBPW) 0 *

21-13

7K • Chapter 21

User Function: Speak Radio Configuration
Speak the current remote base radio configuration.
•
•
•
•

The current radio settings can be spoken by the controller in one of several
formats.
Both abbreviated and detailed information is available.
The controller will speak the Frequency or Memory Channel and whether
the Transmitter is On or Off. If On, it will speak the Transmitter Offset.
The controller will speak the CTCSS frequency and whether it is enabled for
encode, decode, or both.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Speak Frequency and Offset

(RBPW) 19 *

Speak Frequency and Offset

(RBPW) 19 0 *

Speak CTCSS Frequency

(RBPW) 19 1 *

Speak All

(RBPW) 19 2 *

Speak Abbreviated Frequency and Offset

(RBPW) 19 3 *

Speak Abbreviated CTCSS Frequency

(RBPW) 19 4 *

Speak Abbreviated All

(RBPW) 19 5 *

Acknowledgment for Detailed Responses:
• When the VFO of the remote base radio is selected, the actual frequency is
spoken.
• When a memory channel of the remote base radio is selected, the memory
channel number is spoken.
• If the transmitter is disabled, the controller says “Transmit Off”.
• If the transmitter is enabled, the controller speaks the currently selected
offset: “Offset Minus”, “No Offset”, or “Offset Plus”. Special offsets are
supported. On the 1200 band, the controller may say “Offset Minus
Twenty”. On the 440 band, the controller may say “Offset Minus Minus”.
(See your radio manual for when this offset may be selected.)
• If no CTCSS tone is selected for encode or decode, the controller says
“CTCSS Off”.
• If a tone is selected for either encode or decode, the controllers says
“CTCSS” and the frequency. For example, for a CTCSS frequency of
123.0 Hz, it says “C T C S S one two three point zero hertz”.
• If a tone is selected for encode, the controller says “Transmit”.
• If a tone is selected for decode, the controller says “Receive”.
• If a tone is selected for encode and decode, the controller says “Transmit
And Receive”.

21-14

Remote Base Interface
Acknowledgment for Abbreviated Responses:
• When the VFO of the remote base radio is selected, an abbreviated version
of the actual frequency is spoken. For example, “545” is spoken for
“145.450” or “445.450”.
• When a memory channel of the remote base radio is selected, the memory
channel number is spoken.
• If the transmitter is enabled, the controller speaks the currently selected
offset: “Minus” or “Plus” or nothing for simplex.
• If no CTCSS tone is selected for encode or decode, there is no response.
• If a tone is selected for either encode or decode, the controllers says just
the CTCSS frequency. For example, for a CTCSS frequency of 123.0 Hz,
“one two three zero” is spoken.
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None.
Examples:
To have the controller speak just the frequency and transmitter status of the
remote base radio currently selected, enter the following:
(RBPW) 19 *
or:
(RBPW) 19 0 *
To verify the current CTCSS frequency and whether the radio is configured for
encode or decode, enter:
(RBPW) 19 1 *
The hear the complete status of the radio, enter:
(RBPW) 19 2 *
The hear an abbreviated status of the radio, enter:
(RBPW) 19 5 *

21-15

7K • Chapter 21

User Function: Select Memory Channel and Band
Selects a specific remote base radio and memory channel.
•
•
•
•
•
•

The RBI-1 supports four bands: 144, 222, 440, and 1200.
Memory channels range from 1 to the maximum number available in the selected
radio.
If the remote base radio was powered off, this command turns it on and enables
the receiver.
The remote base radio transmitter is disabled when this command is entered. To
enable the transmitter, see the User Function: Enable/Disable Transmitter
command.
The CTCSS encoder and decoder frequency and enable/disable are set in the
memory channel of the radio. If not set in the radio, they can be controlled by User
Function commands.
Note: this command only works on some of the radios that can be connected to
the RBI-1. See the RBI-1 manual for details.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select A Memory Channel and Band

(RBPW) 40 (band) (channel) *
band =
1 = 144
2 = 220
4 = 440
8 = 1200
channel =
1 thru the maximum supported by the radio
(RBPW) 20 (band) (channel) *

Macro: Select A Memory Channel and Band
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To select memory channel 1 in the 144 MHz radio, enter the following

(RBPW) 40 1 1 *
To select memory channel 12 in the 440 MHz radio, enter the following

(RBPW) 40 4 12 *

21-16

Remote Base Interface

User Function: Select VFO Frequency and Offset
Selects a specific remote base radio and enters a VFO frequency
and offset.
•
•
•
•
•
•

Enter the frequency that you want the receiver of the remote base radio to
be set to.
Optionally, enter the transmitter offset to be used. Transmitter offsets of
minus, simplex, plus, and special offsets can be selected.
If the remote base radio was powered off, this command turns it on and
enables the receiver..
If no transmitter offset is specified, the remote base transmitter is disabled.
To set a transmitter offset and enable the transmitter, use the User
Function: Select Transmitter Offset command.
The CTCSS encoder and decoder are disabled.
The transmitter power level remains at its previous setting.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select VFO Frequency and Offset

(RBPW) 41 (frequency) (offset) *
frequency =
140.000-149.995 MHz, 6 digits
220.000-229.995 MHz, 6 digits
420.000-449.995 MHz, 6 digits
1240.000-1299.995 MHz, 7 digits
Note: the 1kHz digit can be only 5 or 0.
The ranges are subject to the limitations
of the radios in use.
offset =
1 = Minus
2 = Simplex
3 = Plus
0 = Special: On 1200, Minus 20; On 420440, special offset subject to limitations
of radio in use.

Macro: Select VFO Frequency and Offset
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 21 (frequency) (offset) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

21-17

7K • Chapter 21
Default Condition: None.
Example:
To set the VFO frequency on the 440 MHz radio to 446.000 MHz with the
transmitter disabled, enter the following
(RBPW) 41 446000 *
To set the VFO frequency on the 144 MHz radio to 146.940 MHz with a minus
offset, enter the following
(RBPW) 41 146940 1 *
To set the VFO frequency on the 144 MHz radio to 146.520 MHz simplex,
enter the following
(RBPW) 41 146520 2 *

21-18

Remote Base Interface

User Function: Select Transmitter Offset
Selects a transmitter offset on the currently active remote base
radio.
•
•
•

Transmitter offsets of minus, simplex, plus, and special can be selected.
This command has no effect when a memory channel is currently selected.
If the remote base radio transmitter is disabled, it will be enabled.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Transmitter Offset

(RBPW) 42 (offset) *
offset =
1 = Minus
2 = Simplex
3 = Plus
0 = Special: On 1200, Minus 20; On 420440, special offset subject to limitations
of radio in use.

Macro: Select Transmitter Offset
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 22 (offset) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The remote base interface is initially off.
Example:
To enable the transmitter and set the transmitter offset on the currently
selected radio to minus, enter the following:
(RBPW) 42 1 *
To enable the transmitter and set the transmitter offset on the currently
selected radio to simplex, enter the following:
(RBPW) 42 2 *

21-19

7K • Chapter 21

User Function: Enable/Disable Transmitter
Enables or disables the transmitter on the currently active remote
base radio.
•

The transmitter can be enabled or disabled.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Enable/Disable Transmitter

(RBPW) 45 x *
0 = OFF (disable)
1 = ON (enable)

Macro: Select Enable/Disable Transmitter
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 25 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The transmitter is disabled when the Select VFO
Frequency and Offset is entered without an offset. The transmitter is disabled
when a memory channel is selected.
Example:
To enable the transmitter, enter the following:
(RBPW) 45 1 *
To disable the transmitter, enter the following:
(RBPW) 45 0 *

21-20

Remote Base Interface

User Function: Enable/Disable Receiver
Enables or disables the receiver on the currently active remote
base radio.
•

The receiver can be enabled or disabled.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Enable/Disable Receiver

(RBPW) 44 x *
0 = OFF (disable)
1 = ON (enable)

Macro: Select Enable/Disable Receiver
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 24 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The receiver is enabled when a VFO frequency or memory
channel is selected.
Example:
To enable the receiver, enter the following:
(RBPW) 44 1 *
To disable the receiver, enter the following:
(RBPW) 44 0 *

21-21

7K • Chapter 21

User Function: Enable/Disable Radio Power
Enables or disables the power to the currently active remote base
radio.
•
•

The radio power can be enabled or disabled.
Note: not all radios that can be connected to the RBI-1 can have their
power controlled. See the RBI-1 manual for details.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Enable/Disable Radio Power

(RBPW) 46 x *
0 = OFF (disable)
1 = ON (enable)

Macro: Select Enable/Disable Radio Power
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 26 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: Radio power is enabled when a VFO frequency or memory
channel is selected.
Example:
To turn the power on to the selected radio, enter the following:
(RBPW) 46 1 *
To turn the power off to the selected radio, enter the following:
(RBPW) 46 0 *

21-22

Remote Base Interface

User Function: Select Transmitter Power Output
Selects the transmitter power output level of the currently active
remote base radio.
•
•

The transmitter power output level can be set to low, medium, or high.
Note: not all radios that can be connected to the RBI-1 can have their
transmitter power output level controlled. See the RBI-1 manual for details.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select Transmitter Power Output

(RBPW) 43 x *
1 = Low
2 = Medium
3 = High

Macro: Select Transmitter Power Output
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 23 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The current transmitter power output level is the power
output level that was last set. (The controller does not change the level in
response to any other commands.)
Example:
To set the transmitter power output level on the currently selected radio to
medium, enter the following:
(RBPW) 43 2 *

21-23

7K • Chapter 21

User Function: Select Frequency of CTCSS
Selects the frequency of the CTCSS Encoder and Decoder of the
currently active remote base radio.
•
•
•
•

The CTCSS frequency is entered as a Tone Code that is looked up in a
table. See page 10-5 for frequencies from 67.0 through 203.5.
Entering this command causes the CTCSS Encoder to be enabled and the
CTCSS Decoder to be disabled.
This command has no effect if a memory channel of the currently active
radio is selected and the memory channel sets the CTCSS frequency.
Note: not all radios that can be connected to the RBI-1 can have their
CTCSS frequency controlled. See the RBI-1 manual for details.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select CTCSS Frequency

(RBPW) 47 (tone code) *
tone code =
(01-32, see page 10-5)
33 = 210.7 Hz
34 = 218.1 Hz
35 = 225.7 Hz
36 = 233.6 Hz
37 = 241.8 Hz
38 = 250.3 Hz
(RBPW) 27 (tone code) *

Macro: Select CTCSS Frequency
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To set the CTCSS frequency to 82.5 Hz, lookup the Tone Code in the TS-32
Programming Table on page 10-5 and enter the following:
(RBPW) 47 6 *
To set the CTCSS frequency to 110.9 Hz, enter the following:
(RBPW) 47 15 *

21-24

Remote Base Interface

User Function: Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder
Enables or disables the CTCSS Encoder on the currently active
remote base radio.
•
•

The CTCSS Encoder can be enabled or disabled.
This command has no effect if a memory channel of the currently active
radio is selected and the memory channel enables the CTCSS Encoder.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder

(RBPW) 48 x *
0 = OFF (disable)
1 = ON (enable)

Macro: Select Enable/Disable CTCSS
Encoder
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 28 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The CTCSS Encoder is enabled when a CTCSS frequency
is selected. The CTCSS Encoder is disabled when a VFO frequency is
selected.
Example:
To enable the CTCSS Encoder in the selected radio, enter the following:
(RBPW) 48 1 *
To disable the CTCSS Encoder in the selected radio, enter the following:
(RBPW) 48 0 *

21-25

7K • Chapter 21

User Function: Enable/Disable CTCSS Decoder
Enables or disables the CTCSS Decoder on the currently active
remote base radio.
•
•

The CTCSS Decoder can be enabled or disabled.
This command has no effect if a memory channel of the currently active
radio is selected and the memory channel enables the CTCSS Encoder or
Decoder.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Enable/Disable CTCSS Decoder

(RBPW) 49 x *
0 = OFF (disable)
1 = ON (enable)

Macro: Select Enable/Disable CTCSS
Decoder
(Stored until (RBPW) 39 sent.)

(RBPW) 29 x *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: The CTCSS Decoder is disabled when a CTCSS
frequency is selected. The CTCSS Decoder is also disabled when a VFO
frequency is selected.
Example:
To enable the CTCSS Decoder in the selected radio, enter the following:
(RBPW) 49 1 *
To disable the CTCSS Decoder in the selected radio, enter the following:
(RBPW) 49 0 *

21-26

Remote Base Interface

Macro Function: Send Queued Settings
Transfers the queued Macro settings to the remote base radio.
•
•

The settings entered from the Macro commands are stored in the controller
memory until this command is executed.
Settings are queued using Macro commands 20-29.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Send Queued Settings

(RBPW) 39 *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: None.
Example:
To send the queued settings stored in the controller memory to the remote
base radio, enter the following:
(RBPW) 39 *

21-27

7K • Chapter 21

RBI-1 User Function Outputs
The eight RBI-1 User Function Outputs are available for your use in operating
auxiliary devices at the repeater site. These outputs can be latched ON or
OFF. The outputs can be controlled individually or as a group.
“ON” refers to the state of an output when it is sinking current to ground; “OFF”
refers to the state of an output when it is open (floating).
Following a power failure or controller reset, the outputs are set to the state that
they were before the power failure or reset.
A number of the User Function Outputs can be grouped for control using
decimal numbers from 0 to 255. This type of command could be used to enter
rotator azimuths for control of an antenna rotator. Since not all outputs may
need to be used for rotator control, the number of outputs can be specified so
that the remaining outputs can be used for control of other auxiliary devices.
Here is an example of the use of the User Function Outputs. Suppose you
needed to control a rotator that needed six control lines to specify the azimuth
in which to point the antenna. You would connect the rotator controller to the
User Function Outputs starting from UF-1 as follows:
RBI-1 Pin

Function

RBI-1 Pin

Function

UF-1
UF-2
UF-3

Rotator Control Line #0
Rotator Control Line #1
Rotator Control Line #2

UF-4
UF-5
UF-6

Rotator Control Line #3
Rotator Control Line #4
Rotator Control Line #5

You would then issue the Select RBI-1 Number of User Function Outputs
command:
(PW) 39 90 6 *

to specify that only the first six User Function Outputs are to be controlled by
the Enter RBI-1 User Function Output Group. The rotator would then be
controlled by entering values in the range of zero (0) through sixty-three (63).
The remaining User Function Outputs, seven and eight, would be available for
auxiliary control.
The range of decimal numbers that may be entered in the group depends on
the number of User Function Outputs included in the group. The following table
defines the ranges. The group always starts with UF-1:

21-28

Group

Valid Decimal Numbers

Group

Valid Decimal Numbers

0
1
2
3
4

none available
0 or 1
0 thru 3
0 thru 7
0 thru 15

5
6
7
8

0 thru 31
0 thru 63
0 thru 127
0 thru 255

Remote Base Interface

Select RBI-1 Number of User Function Outputs
Selects the number of RBI-1 User Function Outputs to be included
in the group.
•
•
•

Enter a number from 0 to 8 to define how many outputs are to be controlled
as a group.
The group always starts at UF-1.
Programmer’s note: UF-8 is the Most Significant Bit (MSB); UF-1 is the
Least Significant Bit (LSB).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select RBI-1 Number of User Function
Outputs

(PW) 39 90 (number of outputs) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: All 8 outputs are included in the group.
Example:
To set the number of outputs in the group to 6, enter the following:
(PW) 39 90 6 *

21-29

7K • Chapter 21

Select Individual RBI-1 User Function Outputs
Control one or more RBI-1 User Function Outputs.
•
•

Each output in a list of outputs may be latched ON or OFF.
List the outputs to be controlled by entering any combination of digits 1
through 8.

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select User Function Outputs Latched OFF

(RBPW) 12 (list the outputs) *

Select User Function Outputs Latched ON

(RBPW) 11 (list the outputs) *

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: After a 7K cold reset, the outputs are off. After a power
failure, the outputs will be set to the state they were in before the power failure.
Example:
To turn ON user function output 1, enter the following:
(RBPW) 11 1 *
To turn OFF user function output 2, enter the following:
(RBPW) 12 2 *
To turn ON user function outputs 7 and 8, enter the following:
(RBPW) 11 7 8 *

21-30

Remote Base Interface

Enter RBI-1 User Function Output Group
Control a group of RBI-1 User Function Outputs.
•
•
•

Enter a decimal number to control a group of outputs.
The largest decimal number is determined by the number of outputs
selected by the Select Number Of User Function Outputs command
Programmer’s Note: UF-8 is the Most Significant Bit (MSB); UF-1 is the
Least Significant Bit (LSB).

Command Form:
Command

Form

Select User Function Output Group

(RBPW) 10 (decimal number) *
decimal number =
(See table on page 26.)

Acknowledgment: Sends OK
Errors:
Error

Meaning

OFF
? err 1
? err 2

remote base is disabled
wrong number of digits entered
illegal digit entered

Default Condition: After a 7K cold reset, the outputs are off. After a power
failure, the outputs will be set to the state they were in before the power failure.
Example:
To output a value of 30 to the group of outputs, enter the following:
(RBPW) 10 30 *

21-31

7K • Chapter 21

21-32

Programming Tables

Appendix A

Programming
Tables
The tables in this section are used to program the controller. Additionally, the
Command Quick Reference on page A-25 contains a summary of each
command.

A-1

7K • Appendix A

CW Character Set Tables
CW Alphanumeric Characters
Control Character 9900

A-2

Character

Code

Character

Code

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

Programming Tables

CW Punctuation and Related
Characters
Control Character 9900

Character/Parameter

Symbol

Code

period
comma
fraction
Question
word space
end-of-message
wait
break
double dash
end-of-work
hyphen
colon
semicolon
parenthesis
apostrophe
exclamation
quotation
understood
1.0 second pre-message delay

.
,
/
?
space
(AR)
(AS)
(BK)
(BT)
(SK)
:
;
()
’
!
”
(SN)

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54

CW Frequency and Speed Changes
Control Character 9900

Change

Code

frequency
speed to 5 WPM
speed to 7 WPM
speed to 10 WPM
speed to 13 WPM
speed to 15 WPM
speed to 17 WPM
speed to 20 WPM
speed to 24 WPM
speed to 30 WPM
speed to 40 WPM

59xxxx (xxxx = tone code)
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

A-3

7K • Appendix A

Beep Character Set Tables
Factory-Fixed Frequency Beeps
Control Character 9910

Freq

Note

Beep

Freq

Note

Beep

Freq

Note

Beep

262Hz
277Hz
294Hz
311Hz
330Hz
349Hz
370Hz
392Hz
415Hz
440Hz
466Hz
494Hz
523Hz
554Hz
587Hz
622Hz

C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

659Hz
698Hz
740Hz
784Hz
831Hz
880Hz
932Hz
988Hz
1046Hz
1109Hz
1175Hz
1244Hz
1319Hz
1397Hz
1480Hz
1568Hz

E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

1661Hz
1760Hz
1865Hz
1976Hz
2093Hz
2217Hz
2349Hz
2489Hz
2637Hz
2794Hz
2960Hz
3136Hz
3322Hz
3520Hz
3729Hz
3951Hz

G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
F6
F#6
G6
G#6
A6
A#6
B6

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

Owner-Fixed Frequency Beeps
Control Character 9910

Beep

48
49
50
51
52
53

A-4

Owner-Fixed Frequency (Fill-In)

Default Condition

500Hz
750Hz
1000Hz
1250Hz
1500Hz
1750Hz

Programming Tables

Beep Duration Change Characters
Control Character 9910

Beep Duration Change

Code

10mS
20mS
30mS
40mS
60mS
80mS
120mS
160mS
240mS
320mS

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79

Beep Gap Change Characters
Control Character 9910

Beep Gap Change

Code

10mS
20mS
30mS
40mS
60mS
80mS
120mS
160mS
240mS
320mS

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

A-5

7K • Appendix A

Beep Parameters (General)
Control Character 9910

A-6

Beep Parameter

Code

custom beep
custom beep delay
1 second pre-message delay
automatic beep gap OFF
automatic beep gap ON

57xxxxyy
58xx
54
55
56

Programming Tables

DTMF Character Set Tables
DTMF Characters
Control Character 9950

DTMF Character

Code

DTMF Character

Code

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

8
9
A
B
C
D
*
#

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

DTMF Duration Change Characters
Control Character 9950

DTMF Duration Change

Code

30mS
40mS
50mS
60mS
70mS
80mS
90mS
100mS
150mS
200mS

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

A-7

7K • Appendix A

DTMF Gap Change Characters
Control Character 9950

DTMF Gap Change

Code

20mS
30mS
40mS
50mS
60mS
70mS
80mS
90mS
100mS
150mS

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

DTMF Pause Characters
Control Character 9950

A-8

DTMF Pause

Code

100mS
200mS
300mS
400mS
500mS
600mS
700mS
800mS
900mS
1000mS

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49

Programming Tables

DTMF Custom Changes
(Duration Gap Pause)
Control Character 9950

DTMF Custom Change

Code

Data Digit

50xx
51xx
52xx
53xx
54xx
55xx

0199 x 10mS
0199 x 100mS
0199 x 10mS
0199 x 100mS
0199 x 10mS
0199 x 100mS
enter 00 for xx in any
of above codes

A-9

7K • Appendix A

Synthesized Speech Vocabulary
(Male Voice)
Control Character 9960

A-10

Word

Code

Word

Code

Word

Code

A
abeam
abort
about
above
accelerated
acknowledge
action
adjust
advise
aerial
affirmative
afternoon
air
air brakes
aircraft
airport
airspeed
alert
all
aloft
alpha
alternate
altimeter
altitude
amateur
amps
and
answer
approach
approaches
April
A.P.U.
D
danger
date

0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0101
0102
0103

area
arrival
as
association
at
atis
August
autoautomatic
autopilot
auxiliary
B
band
bank
base
battery
below
between
big
blowing
boost
brake
braking
bravo
break
broken
busy
button
by
C
cabin
calibrate
call
eleven
emergency
engine

0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0135
0136
0137

calling
calm
cancel
caution
ceiling
Celsius
center
change
Charlie
check
circuit
clear
clearance
clearance delay
climb
clock
closed
club
code
come
complete
connect
contact
control
converging
course
cowl
crane
crosswind
crystals
current
cycle
cylinder
flaps
flight1
flight2

0068
0069
0070
0071
0072
0073
0074
0075
0076
0077
0078
0079
0080
0081
0082
0083
0084
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0097
0098
0099
0100
0169
0170
0171

Programming Tables
day
days
December
decrease
decreasing
degree
degrees
delta
departure1
departure2
device
dialing
dinner
direction
display
divided
door
doors
down
downwind
drizzle
dust
E
east
echo
eight
eighteen
eighth
eighty
electrician
elevation
Greenwich
ground
gundish
gusting to
H
hail
half
ham
hamfest
have
haze
heading

0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117
0118
0119
0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127
0128
0129
0130
0131
0132
0133
0134
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0208
0209
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214

enter
equal
-er
error
estimated
E.T.A.
evacuate
evacuation
evening
exit
expect
F
Fahrenheit
fail
failure
farad
fast
February
feet
field
fiffifteen
fifth
fifty
filed
final
fire
first
five
flameout
flap load
immediately
in
inbound
inch
increase
increasing
increasing to
India
indicated
inflight
information
-ing

0138
0139
0140
0141
0142
0143
0144
0145
0146
0147
0148
0149
0150
0151
0152
0153
0154
0155
0156
0157
0158
0159
0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167
0168
0237
0238
0239
0240
0241
0242
0243
0244
0245
0246
0247
0248

flight watch
flow
fog
forforty
four
fourteen
fourth
foxtrot
freedom
freezing
frequency
Friday
from
front
F.S.S.
fuel
full
G
galley
gallons
gate
gauge
gear
get
glide
go
golf
good bye
grain
green
leg
less than
level1
level2
level off
light
lights
Lima
line
link
list
localizer

0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0178
0179
0180
0181
0182
0183
0184
0185
0186
0187
0188
0189
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
0195
0196
0197
0198
0199
0200
0201
0202
0271
0272
0273
0274
0275
0276
0277
0278
0279
0280
0281
0282

A-11

7K • Appendix A
heavy
hello
help
Henry
hertz
high
hold
home
hotel
hour
hours
hundred
I
ice
icing
identify
idle
if
I.F.R.
ignite
ignition
I.L.S.
micro
middle
midpoints
mig
mike
miles
mill
milli
million
minus
minutes
mist
mixture
mobile
moderate
monday
month
more than
morning
motor
move

A-12

0215
0216
0217
0218
0219
0220
0221
0222
0233
0234
0225
0226
0227
0228
0229
0230
0231
0232
0233
0234
0235
0236
0305
0306
0307
0308
0309
0310
0311
0312
0313
0314
0315
0316
0317
0318
0319
0320
0321
0322
0323
0324
0325

inner
inspector
instruments
intruder
is
it
J
January
Juliet
July
June
K
key
kilo
knots
L
land
landing
landing gear
launch
lean
left
ninth
no
noon
north
northeast
northwest
not
notam
no turn
November
number
O
obscured
o'clock
October
of
off
ohm
oil
on
one

0249
0250
0251
0252
0253
0254
0255
0256
0257
0258
0259
0260
0261
0262
0263
0264
0265
0266
0267
0268
0269
0270
0339
0340
0341
0342
0343
0344
0345
0346
0347
0348
0349
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
0359

long
low
lower
lunch
M
machine
magnetos
maintain
man
manual
March
marker
May
mayday
me
mean
measure
meet
meeting
mega
messages
meter
pass
passed
patch
path
(pause)
pellets
per
percent
phone
pico
plan
please
plus
P.M.
point
police
position
power
press
pressure
priority

0283
0284
0285
0286
0287
0288
0289
0290
0291
0292
0293
0294
0295
0296
0297
0298
0299
0300
0301
0302
0303
0304
0373
0374
0375
0376
0377
0378
0379
0380
0381
0382
0383
0384
0385
0386
0387
0388
0389
0390
0391
0392
0393

Programming Tables
moving
much
N
near
negative
net
new
next
night
nine
niner
nineteen
ninety
raise
range
rate1
rate2
ready
rear
receive
red
refueling
release
remark
remote
repair
repeat
repeater
rich
right
R nav
road
Roger
rollout
Romeo
runway
R.V.R.s
S
/S/ sound
safe
sand
Saturday
scattered

0326
0327
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0338
0407
0408
0409
0410
0411
0412
0413
0414
0415
0416
0417
0418
0419
0420
0421
0422
0423
0424
0425
0426
0427
0428
0429
0430
0431
0432
0433
0434
0435
0436

open
operator
oscar
other
out
outer
over
overcast
overspeed
P
page
papa
partially
select
September
sequence
service
set
seven
seventeen
seventh
seventy
severe
short
showers
shut
side
sierra
sigmet
six
sixteen
sixteenth
sixth
sixty
sleet
slope
slow1
slow2
smoke
snow
south
southeast
southwest

0360
0361
0362
0363
0364
0365
0366
0367
0368
0369
0370
0371
0372
0441
0442
0443
0444
0445
0446
0447
0448
0449
0450
0451
0452
0453
0454
0455
0456
0457
0458
0459
0460
0461
0462
0463
0464
0465
0466
0467
0468
0469
0470

probe
props
pull
pumps
push
Q
Quebec
R
radar
radial
radio
radios
rain
squawking
stabilizer
stall
start
stop
storm
street
Sunday
switch
system
T
tacan
tango
tank
target1
target2
taxi
-teen
telephone
temperature
ten
tenth
terminal
test
-th
the
thee
thin
thinly
thir-

0394
0395
0396
0397
0398
0399
0400
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
0475
0476
0477
0478
0479
0480
0481
0482
0483
0484
0485
0486
0487
0488
0489
0490
0491
0492
0493
0494
0495
0496
0497
0498
0499
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504

A-13

7K • Appendix A
second
seconds
security
selcal
this is
thousand
three
thunderstorms
Thursday
time
timer
times
totoday
tommorow
tonight
tool
too low
tornado
touchdown
tower
traffic
transmit
trim
true
Tuesday
turbulence
turn1
turn2
twelfth
twelve
twentieth
twenty
two

A-14

0437
0438
0439
0440
0509
0510
0511
0512
0513
0514
0515
0516
0517
0518
0519
0520
0521
0522
0523
0524
0525
0526
0527
0528
0529
0530
0531
0532
0533
0534
0535
0536
0537
0538

speed
spoilers
spray
squawk
-ty
U
under
undercarriage
unicom
uniform
unit
unlimited
until
up
use1 (noun)
use2 (verb)
V
vacuum
valley
valve
variable
vectors
verify
V.F.R.
V.H.E.
Victor
visibility
volts
V.O.R.
vortac
W
wait
wake
warning

0471
0472
0473
0474
0539
0540
0541
0542
0543
0544
0545
0546
0547
0548
0549
0550
0551
0552
0553
0554
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
0560
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0566
0567
0568

third
thirteen
thirty
this
watch
watts
way
we
weather
Wednesday
week
welcome
west
whiskey
white
will
wind
windows
with
wrong
X
X-ray
Y
yankee
yellow
yesterday
you
your
you’ve
Z
zero
zone
Zulu

0505
0506
0507
0508
0569
0570
0571
0572
0573
0574
0575
0576
0577
0578
0579
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
0585
0586
0587
0588
0589
0590
0591
0592
0593
0594
0595
0596
0597

Programming Tables

Synthesized Speech Vocabulary
(Female Voice and Sound Effects)
Control Character 9960

Word

Code

Word

Code

Word

Code

afternoon
A.M.
eight
eighteen
eleven
evening
fifteen

4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103

ten
the
thirteen
thirty
three
time
twelve

4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128

4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152

fifty
five

4104
4105

twenty
two

4129
4130

laugh 2
laugh- diabolic
music
Superman
tic
TI first (football)
TI second
(football)
toc
tone 1

forty

4106

Sound Effect

Code

tone 2

4155

four
fourteen
good
is
morning
nine
nineteen
o'clock
oh
one
P.M.
seven
seventeen
six
sixteen

4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121

ball caught
bat hitting ball
bugle call
chime 1
chime 2
chime 3
chime 4
crowd noise
def-in-pos (f’tball)
explosion-long
explosion-short
Georgia Brown
gunshot
laser
laugh 1

4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145

tone 3
tone 4
tone 5
tone A
tone B
tone D
tone G
tone low B
tone low C
tone low G
tune 1
tune 2
whistle
whistle - falling
whistle - rising

4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170

4153
4154

A-15

7K • Appendix A

Message Run-Time Variables
Run-Time Variable

A-16

Meaning

Example

9810

hour & minute, 12-hr format CW

2 45 in CW

9811

AM/PM, CW

PM in CW

9812

hour & minute, 24-hr format, CW

14 45 in CW

9813

day-of-week, CW

WED in CW

9814

month, CW

1 in CW

9815

day-of-month, CW

1 in CW

9816

seconds, CW

27 in CW

9820

hour & minute, 12-hr format, male voice

two forty-five (male)

9821

AM/PM, male voice

PM (male)

9822

hour & minute, 12-hr format, female voice

two forty-five (female)

9823

AM/PM, female voice

PM (female)

9824

hour & minute, 24-hr format, male voice

14 hours, 45 minutes
(male)

9825

same as 9824 without “hours” & “minutes”

fourteen forty-five (male)

9826

day-of-week, male voice

Wednesday (male)

9827

cardinal day-of-month, male voice

one (male)

9828

ordinal day-of-month, male voice

first (male)

9829

month, male voice

January (male)

9830

“good morning/good afternoon/good evening”,
female voice

good afternoon (female)

9831

“morning/afternoon/evening”, male voice

afternoon (male)

9832

seconds, male voice

twenty-seven (male)

9896

Call Count, CW

105 in CW

9897

Call Count, male voice

one zero five (male)

9898

Software Version, CW

203 in CW

9899

Software Version, male voice

two point zero three
(male)

Programming Tables

Message Control Characters
Control Character

Definition

9900

CW characters follow

9910

beep characters follow

9920

single-tone page follows

9930

two-tone page follows

9940

5/6-tone page follows

9950

DTMF characters follow

9960

synthesized speech characters follow

9981

route this message to transmitter #1 mixed with other audio

9982

route this message to transmitter #1 not mixed with other audio

9983

route this message to transmitter #2 mixed with other audio

9984

route this message to transmitter #2 not mixed with other audio

9985

route this message to phone line mixed with Rx audio

9986

route this message to phone line not mixed with Rx audio

9987

do not route remaining message audio to transmitter #1

9988

do not route remaining message audio to transmitter #2

9989

do not route remaining message audio to phone line

9990

save current routing settings

9991

restore saved routing settings

9999 xxxx

execute macro xxxx after prior message audio has been sent

A-17

7K • Appendix A

Scheduler Day Code Table

A-18

Day Code

Explanation

Day Code

Explanation

01-31

calendar day-of-month

2nd Saturday of month

weekdays (Mon-Fri)

3rd Sunday of month

weekends (Sat-Sun)

3rd Monday of month

Sundays

3rd Tuesday of month

Mondays

3rd Wednesday of month

Tuesdays

3rd Thursday of month

Wednesdays

3rd Friday of month

Thursdays

3rd Saturday of month

Fridays

4th Sunday of month

Saturdays

4th Monday of month

1st Sunday of month

4th Tuesday of month

1st Monday of month

4th Wednesday of month

1st Tuesday of month

4th Thursday of month

1st Wednesday of month

4th Friday of month

1st Thursday of month

4th Saturday of month

1st Friday of month

5th Sunday of month

1st Saturday of month

5th Monday of month

2nd Sunday of month

5th Tuesday of month

2nd Monday of month

5th Wednesday of month

2nd Tuesday of month

5th Thursday of month

2nd Wednesday of month

5th Friday of month

2nd Thursday of month

5th Saturday of month

2nd Friday of month

every day (wild card)

Programming Tables

Tone Code Table
All Frequencies in Hz

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

Freq

Code

100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
205
210
215
220
725
730
735
740
745
750
755
760
765
770
775
780
785
790
795

9999
9523
9090
8695
8333
8000
7692
7407
7142
6896
6666
6451
6250
6060
5882
5714
5555
5405
5263
5128
5000
4878
4761
4651
4545
1379
1369
1360
1351
1342
1333
1324
1315
1307
1298
1290
1282
1273
1265
1257

225
230
235
240
245
250
255
260
265
270
275
280
285
290
295
300
305
310
315
320
325
330
335
340
345
850
855
860
865
870
875
880
885
890
895
900
905
910
915
920

4444
4347
4255
4166
4081
4000
3921
3846
3773
3703
3636
3571
3508
3448
3389
3333
3278
3225
3174
3125
3076
3030
2985
2941
2898
1176
1169
1162
1156
1149
1142
1136
1129
1123
1117
1111
1104
1098
1092
1086

350
355
360
365
370
375
380
385
390
395
400
405
410
415
420
425
430
435
440
445
450
455
460
465
470
975
980
985
990
995
1000
1005
1010
1015
1020
1025
1030
1035
1040
1045

2857
2816
2777
2739
2702
2666
2631
2597
2564
2531
2500
2469
2439
2409
2380
2352
2325
2298
2272
2247
2222
2197
2173
2150
2127
1025
1020
1015
1010
1005
1000
0995
0990
0985
0980
0975
0970
0966
0961
0956

475
480
485
490
495
500
505
510
515
520
525
530
535
540
545
550
555
560
565
570
575
580
585
590
595
1100
1105
1110
1115
1120
1125
1130
1135
1140
1145
1150
1155
1160
1165
1170

2105
2083
2061
2040
2020
2000
1980
1960
1941
1923
1904
1886
1869
1851
1834
1818
1801
1785
1769
1754
1739
1724
1709
1694
1680
0909
0904
0900
0896
0892
0888
0884
0881
0877
0873
0869
0865
0862
0858
0854

600
605
610
615
620
625
630
635
640
645
650
655
660
665
670
675
680
685
690
695
700
705
710
715
720
1225
1230
1235
1240
1245
1250
1255
1260
1265
1270
1275
1280
1285
1290
1295

1666
1652
1639
1626
1612
1600
1587
1574
1562
1550
1538
1526
1515
1503
1492
1481
1470
1459
1449
1438
1428
1418
1408
1398
1388
0816
0813
0809
0806
0803
0800
0796
0793
0790
0787
0784
0781
0778
0775
0772

A-19

7K • Appendix A
800
805
810
815
820
825
830
835
840
845
1350
1355
1360
1365
1370
1375
1380
1385
1390
1395
1400
1405
1410
1415
1420
1425
1430
1435
1440
1445
1450
1455
1460
1465
1470
1975
1980
1985
1990
1995
2000
2005
2010

A-20

1250
1242
1234
1226
1219
1212
1204
1197
1190
1183
0740
0738
0735
0732
0729
0727
0724
0722
0719
0716
0714
0711
0709
0706
0704
0701
0699
0696
0694
0692
0689
0687
0684
0682
0680
0506
0505
0503
0502
0501
0500
0498
0497

925
930
935
940
945
950
955
960
965
970
1475
1480
1485
1490
1495
1500
1505
1510
1515
1520
1525
1530
1535
1540
1545
1550
1555
1560
1565
1570
1575
1580
1585
1590
1595
2100
2105
2110
2115
2120
2125
2130
2135

1081
1075
1069
1063
1058
1052
1047
1041
1036
1030
0677
0675
0673
0671
0668
0666
0664
0662
0660
0657
0655
0653
0651
0649
0647
0645
0643
0641
0638
0636
0634
0632
0630
0628
0626
0476
0475
0473
0472
0471
0470
0469
0468

1050
1055
1060
1065
1070
1075
1080
1085
1090
1095
1600
1605
1610
1615
1620
1625
1630
1635
1640
1645
1650
1655
1660
1665
1670
1675
1680
1685
1690
1695
1700
1705
1710
1715
1720
2225
2230
2235
2240
2245
2250
2255
2260

0952
0947
0943
0938
0934
0930
0925
0921
0917
0913
0625
0623
0621
0619
0617
0615
0613
0611
0609
0607
0606
0604
0602
0600
0598
0597
0595
0593
0591
0589
0588
0586
0584
0583
0581
0449
0448
0447
0446
0445
0444
0443
0442

1175
1180
1185
1190
1195
1200
1205
1210
1215
1220
1725
1730
1735
1740
1745
1750
1755
1760
1765
1770
1775
1780
1785
1790
1795
1800
1805
1810
1815
1820
1825
1830
1835
1840
1845
2350
2355
2360
2365
2370
2375
2380
2385

0851
0847
0843
0840
0836
0833
0829
0826
0823
0819
0579
0578
0576
0574
0573
0571
0569
0568
0566
0564
0563
0561
0560
0558
0557
0555
0554
0552
0550
0549
0547
0546
0544
0543
0542
0425
0424
0423
0422
0421
0421
0420
0419

1300
1305
1310
1315
1320
1325
1330
1335
1340
1345
1850
1855
1860
1865
1870
1875
1880
1885
1890
1895
1900
1905
1910
1915
1920
1925
1930
1935
1940
1945
1950
1955
1960
1965
1970
2475
2480
2485
2490
2495
2500
2505
2510

0769
0766
0763
0760
0757
0754
0751
0749
0746
0743
0540
0539
0537
0536
0534
0533
0531
0530
0529
0527
0526
0524
0523
0522
0520
0519
0518
0516
0515
0514
0512
0511
0510
0508
0507
0404
0403
0402
0401
0400
0400
0399
0398

Programming Tables
2015
2020
2025
2030
2035
2040
2045
2050
2055
2060
2065
2070
2075
2080
2085
2090
2095
2600
2605
2610
2615
2620
2625
2630
2635
2640
2645
2650
2655
2660
2665
2670
2675
2680
2685
2690
2695
2700
2705
2710
2715
2720

0496
0495
0493
0492
0491
0490
0488
0487
0486
0485
0484
0483
0481
0480
0479
0478
0477
0384
0383
0383
0382
0381
0380
0380
0379
0378
0378
0377
0376
0375
0375
0374
0373
0373
0372
0371
0371
0370
0369
0369
0368
0367

2140
2145
2150
2155
2160
2165
2170
2175
2180
2185
2190
2195
2200
2205
2210
2215
2220
2725
2730
2735
2740
2745
2755
2760
2765
2770
2775
2780
2785
2790
2795
2755
2800
2805
2810
2815
2820
2825
2830
2835
2840
2845

0467
0466
0465
0464
0462
0461
0460
0459
0458
0457
0456
0455
0454
0453
0452
0451
0450
0366
0366
0365
0364
0364
0362
0362
0361
0361
0360
0359
0359
0358
0357
0362
0357
0356
0355
0355
0354
0353
0353
0352
0352
0351

2265
2270
2275
2280
2285
2290
2295
2300
2305
2310
2315
2320
2325
2330
2335
2340
2345
2850
2855
2860
2865
2870
2875
2880
2885
2890
2895
2900
2905
2910
2915
2920
2925
2930
2935
2940
2945
2950
2955
2960
2965
2970

0441
0440
0439
0438
0437
0436
0435
0434
0433
0432
0431
0431
0430
0429
0428
0427
0426
0350
0350
0349
0349
0348
0347
0347
0346
0346
0345
0344
0344
0343
0343
0342
0341
0341
0340
0340
0339
0338
0338
0337
0337
0336

2390
2395
2400
2405
2410
2415
2420
2425
2430
2435
2440
2445
2450
2455
2460
2465
2470
2975
2980
2985
2990
2995
3000

0418
0417
0416
0415
0414
0414
0413
0412
0411
0410
0409
0408
0408
0407
0406
0405
0404
0336
0335
0335
0334
0333
0333

2515
2520
2525
2530
2535
2540
2545
2550
2555
2560
2565
2570
2575
2580
2585
2590
2595

0397
0396
0396
0395
0394
0393
0392
0392
0391
0390
0389
0389
0388
0387
0386
0386
0385

A-21

7K • Appendix A

Root Numbers (Commands) by Number

A-22

Page

Number

Description

17-9

Key Transmitter (Timed)

10-2

Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder

10-3

Select Frequency of CTCSS

4-12
4-19
17-7

Select Frequency of CW/Beep

Reset Transmitter Timeout Timer

4-13

Send Next CW Message Slowly

4-14

Select Normal CW Speed

4-14

Select Slow CW Speed

4-42

Send Message

6-5

Create New Macro

6-11

Erase Macro

6-12

Erase All Macros

7-32

Change Autopatch Access Password

8-2

Set Clock and Calendar

A-24

Set Event-Triggered Macro (See table page A-24.)

6-13

Rename Macro

9-2
9-6
6-7

Create Scheduler Setpoint

Append to Macro

17-4

Select Transmitter Dropout Delay

A-27

Select Message (See table page A-27.)

17-3

Select Transmitter Courtesy Delay

6-9

List Macro in CW

A-27

Review Message (See table page A-27.)

6-9

List Macro in Speech

21-4

39 02

Assign Remote Base Password

21-29

39 90

Select RBI-1 Number of User Function Outputs in Group

21-7

39 91

Reset RBI-1

17-5

Select Transmitter Timeout Timer

18-4

Select Repeater Activity Counter/Timer

16-4

Select COR Pulse Parameters

8-4
8-6
20-1
A-29
12-10

Adjust Daylight Savings Time

49
50

User Timers
Set xxx.x Seconds Timers (See table page A-29.)
Select ID Tail Message

12-5

Select ID Message Interval

12-7

Reset Initial ID Message to Normal ID Message for Tx1

Programming Tables

Root Numbers (Commands) by Number
12-8

Send Initial ID Message for Tx1

A-29

Select Access Mode (See table page A-29.)

7-36

Select Autopatch Call Types

7-6

Select Autopatch Dialing Mode

A-30

Enable/Disable Software Switches (See page A-30.)

7-53

Select Phone Line Answer Mode

7-25

Select Autopatch Timeout Timer

7-42

Enter/Clear Autopatch Reject Number Table

7-40

Enter/Clear Autopatch Accepted Number Table

7-48

Clear Autopatch Call Counter

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Latched ON

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Latched OFF

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Momentary ON

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Momentary OFF

7-57

Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer

18-6

Select Repeater Anti-Kerchunk Key-Up Delay

7-26

Reset Autopatch Timeout Timer

11-7

Select DTMF Decoder Interdigit Timer

7-15

Dump Autopatch Using A Code

7-23

83 1

Landline Hookflash

7-34

83 2

Autopatch Go Off-Hook

7-34

83 3

Autopatch Go Off-Hook, Ignore Busy Logic Input

7-13

83 10

Select/Delete Autopatch Dialing Prefix

7-45

Autopatch Redial Last Number

7-46

Clear Autopatch Redialer

7-49

Send Autopatch Call Count in CW

7-60

Trigger Reverse Patch

7-61

Answer Reverse Patch

11-3

Select DTMF Priority/Scan

13-3

Select Audio Routing Priorities

7-68

Select Autopatch Command Response Message Routing

5-2

Assign Control Operator Password

5-3

Assign Master Password

5-4
5-5
11-8

Assign Control Operator Privilege level

Select DTMF Decoder Mute Delay

6-15

Pause Command Execution

A-29

Select xx.x Minute Timers (See table page A-29.)

A-23

7K • Appendix A

Event Macros by Number
Assign with (PW) 26 (number) (macro) *
Erase with (PW) 26 (number) *

A-24

Page

Number

Description

6-16

Power-On Reset Macro

12-4

Initial ID Macro for Tx1

12-4

Normal ID Macro for Tx1

12-4

Impolite ID Macro for Tx1

7-22

Any-Receiver-Active-to-Autopatch-Triggered Macro

7-22

All-Receivers-Inactive-to-Autopatch-Triggered Macro

18-11

Dropout Message-Triggered Macro

18-11
17-13
18-11

All-Receivers-Inactive-to-Tx1-Triggered Macro

Courtesy Message-Triggered Macro

18-11
17-13
7-16

Any-Receiver-Active-to-Tx1-Triggered Macro

Autopatch Access-Triggered Macro

7-16

Autopatch Dump-Triggered Macro

18-4

Repeater Start-of-Activity Macro

18-4

Repeater Post-Activity Macro

7-55

Phone Line Answer Macro

16-4

COR Pulse-Triggered Macro

18-11

Repeater Timeout Macro

18-11

Repeater Return-From-Timeout Macro

14-2

Logic Input 1 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

Logic Input 1 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

Logic Input 2 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

Logic Input 2 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

Logic Input 3 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

Logic Input 3 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

Logic Input 4 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

Logic Input 4 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

Logic Input 5 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

Logic Input 5 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

Logic Input 6 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

Logic Input 6 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

Phone Line Busy Input Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

Phone Line Busy Input Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

COR Input 1 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

COR Input 1 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

COR Input 2 Hi-to-Lo Macro

Programming Tables

Event Macros by Number
Assign with (PW) 26 (number) (macro) *
Erase with (PW) 26 (number) *
14-2

COR Input 2 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

COR Input 3 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

COR Input 3 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

PL Input 1 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

PL Input 1 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

PL Input 2 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

PL Input 2 Lo-to-Hi Macro

14-2

PL Input 3 Hi-to-Lo Macro

14-2

PL Input 3 Lo-to-Hi Macro

12-4

Initial ID Macro for Tx2

12-4

Normal ID Macro for Tx2

12-4

Impolite ID Macro for Tx2

11-12

DTMF Digit Decoded-Triggered Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Zero Macro

11-11

Long-Tone One Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Two Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Three Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Four Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Five Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Six Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Seven Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Eight Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Nine Macro

11-11

Long-Tone A Macro

11-11

Long-Tone B Macro

11-11

Long-Tone C Macro

11-11

Long-Tone D Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Star (*) Macro

11-11

Long-Tone Pound (#) Macro

16-2

Rx1Start-of-Activity Macro

16-2

Rx1 Post-Activity Macro

16-2

Rx2 Start-of-Activity Macro

16-2

Rx2 Post-Activity Macro

16-2

Rx3 Start-of-Activity Macro

16-2

Rx3 Post-Activity Macro

17-13

Any-Receiver-Active-to-Tx2-Triggered Macro

17-13

All-Receivers-Inactive-to-Tx2-Triggered Macro

7-67

Autopatch Access-From-Rx1-Triggered Macro

7-67

Autopatch Access-From-Rx2-Triggered Macro

7-67

Autopatch Access-From-Rx3-Triggered Macro

A-25

7K • Appendix A

Event Macros by Number
Assign with (PW) 26 (number) (macro) *
Erase with (PW) 26 (number) *

A-26

7-63

Reverse Patch Ring-Triggered Macro

7-56

Control Line Dump Macro

17-14

Tx1 Inactive-to-Active Macro

17-14

Tx1 Active-to-Inactive Before Unkey Delay Macro

17-14

Tx1 Active-to-Inactive Macro

17-14

Tx2 Inactive-to-Active Macro

17-14

Tx2 Active-to-Inactive Before Unkey Delay Macro

17-14

Tx2 Active-to-Inactive Macro

21-5

Remote Base Access-Triggered Macro

21-5

Remote Base Dump-Triggered Macro

Programming Tables

Messages by Number
Program with (PW) 31 (number) (message) *
Review with (PW) 34 (number) *
Page

Number

Description

Default

4-45

Warm Reset Message

?RES in CW

4-44

OK Command Response Message

OK in CW

4-44

Error 1 Command Response Message

?ERR1 in CW

4-44

Error 2 Command Response Message

?ERR2 in CW

18-9

Courtesy Message for Rx1

60 mS
440 Hz
(74 09)

18-9

Courtesy Message for Rx2

60 mS
660 Hz
(74 16)

18-9

Courtesy Message for Rx3

60 mS
880 Hz
(74 21)

4-37

Dropout Message

none

4-37

Pre-Timeout Message

TO in CW

4-37

Post-Timeout Message

TO in CW

12-9

Initial ID Programmable Tail Message for Tx1

none

12-9

Normal ID Programmable Tail Message for Tx1

none

12-3

Initial ID Message for Tx1

ID in CW

12-3

Normal ID Message for Tx1

ID in CW

12-3

Impolite ID Message for Tx1

none

12-3

Initial ID Message for Tx2

9983 ID in
CW

12-3

Normal ID Message for Tx2

9983 ID in
CW

12-3

Impolite ID Message for Tx2

none

7-7

Autopatch Dialing Message

AS in CW

7-27

Autopatch Timeout Warning Message

AR in CW

7-8

Landline Busy Message

BZ in CW

7-9

Autopatch Dump Message

none

7-8

Autopatch Off Message

OFF in CW

7-8

Autopatch Error Message
(Invalid phone number)

?ERR
in CW

7-8

Autopatch Reject Message
(Match in Reject Table)

?REJ
in CW

7-8

Autopatch No-Redial-Number Message

CLR in CW

7-54

Phone Line Answer Message

3 beeps
(74 09 21 33)

7-62

Reverse Patch Ringout Message

55 in CW

A-27

7K • Appendix A

Messages by Number
Program with (PW) 31 (number) (message) *
Review with (PW) 34 (number) *

A-28

Page

Number

Description

Default

21-6

Remote Base Off Message

OFF in CW

4-41

User Message 1

none

4-41

User Message 2

none

4-41

User Message 3

none

4-41

User Message 4

none

Programming Tables

Tenth-Second Timers by Number
User Timers: (PW) 49 (number) (function) (value) *
Other Timers: (PW) 49 (number) (value) *
Page

Number

Description

20-1

00-09

User Timers

7-11

Autopatch Pause (“B”) Digit Time

12-6

Select ID Pending Interval for Tx1 and Tx2

17-12

Select Tx1 Unkey Delay

17-12

Select Tx2 Unkey Delay

Tenth-Minute Timers by Number
(PW) 99 (number) (value) *
Page

Number

Description

16-2

Rx1 Post-Activity Timer

16-2

Rx2 Post-Activity Timer

16-2

Rx3 Post-Activity Timer

18-6

Repeater Anti-Kerchunk Re-Arm Delay

Path Access Mode by Number
(PW) 57 (number) (mode) *
Page

Number

Description

13-4
18-2
13-4
18-2
13-4
18-2
13-4
18-2
13-4
18-2
13-4
18-2
11-5

Rx1-to-Tx1 Access Mode (Path1)

Rx2-to-Tx1 Access Mode (Path2)

Rx3-to-Tx1 Access Mode (Path3)

Rx1-to-Tx2 Access Mode (Path4)

Rx2-to-Tx2 Access Mode (Path5)

Rx3-to-Tx2 Access Mode (Path6)

Rx1-to-DTMF Decoder Access Mode

11-5

Rx2-to-DTMF Decoder Access Mode

11-5

Rx3-to-DTMF Decoder Access Mode

A-29

7K • Appendix A

Software Switches by Number
(PW) 63 (number) (enable/disable) *

A-30

Page

Number

Description

17-8

Enable/Disable Transmitter 1

4-11

Enable/Disable CW

11-2

Enable/Disable Command Responses

7-10

Enable/Disable Autopatch Dialing Mixed-Mode

7-12

Enable/Disable Autopatch Pound Down (# Dump)

7-18

Enable/Disable Autopatch Privacy

7-17

Enable/Disable Autopatch Full-Duplex Mode

7-19

Enable/Disable Autopatch Repeater-to-Phone DTMF Mute

7-20

Enable/Disable ID During Autopatch

7-21

Require Autopatch Dump Before Next Call

7-33

Enable/Disable Autopatch Access Without Password

19-2

Enable/Disable Base Station Star/Pound Talkout

19-4

Select Base Station Talkout Transmitter Mode

9-7

Enable/Disable Scheduler

17-8

Enable/Disable Transmitter 2

7-58

Monitor Repeater Receiver #1 (Rx1)

7-58

Monitor Repeater Receiver #2 (Rx2)

7-58

Monitor Repeater Receiver #3 (Rx3)

7-58

Talk Out Transmitter #1 (Tx1)

7-58

Talk Out Transmitter #2 (Tx2)

18-8

Select Anti-Kerchunk No Hangtime Mode

17-11

Enable/Disable Tx1 Minimum Unkey Delay

17-11

Enable/Disable Tx2 Minimum Unkey Delay

17-10

Key Transmitter 1 (Untimed)

17-10

Key Transmitter 2 (Untimed)

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx1-Tx1 DTMF Mute

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx2-Tx1 DTMF Mute

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx3-Tx1 DTMF Mute

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx1-Tx2 DTMF Mute

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx2-Tx2 DTMF Mute

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx3-Tx2 DTMF Mute

16-6

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission Command Execution for Rx1

16-6

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission Command Execution for Rx2

16-6

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission Command Execution for Rx3

19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on Interdigit Timer for Rx1

19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on Interdigit Timer for Rx2

19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on Interdigit Timer for Rx3

Programming Tables

Software Switches by Number
(PW) 63 (number) (enable/disable) *
19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on Interdigit Timer for Phone Line

16-8

Enable/Disable From-Start-of-Transmission Timer for Rx1

16-8

Enable/Disable From-Start-of-Transmission Timer for Rx2

16-8

Enable/Disable From-Start-of-Transmission Timer for Rx3

11-10

Enable/Disable DTMF Long Tones

21-8

Enable/Disable Remote Base -- Control Operator

21-8

Enable/Disable Remote Base -- Scheduler

21-8

Enable/Disable Remote Base -- Control Op Scheduler Override

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 1 (Rx1 to Tx1)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 2 (Rx2 to Tx1)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 3 (Rx3 to Tx1)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 4 (Rx1 to Tx2)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 5 (Rx2 to Tx2)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 6 (Rx3 to Tx2)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 7 (Rx1 to LL)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 8 (Rx2 to LL)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 9 (Rx3 to LL)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 10 (LL to Tx1)

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 11 (LL to Tx2)

5-6

Enable/Disable Front Panel

A-31

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
This section of the manual may be copied by the registered owner and
distributed freely to users of the repeater controller. It may not be copied for
any other purpose.
No other portion of the manual may be copied.

A-32

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

4-1

Messages

4-11

Enable/Disable CW

(PW) 63 01 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

4-12

Select Frequency of CW

(PW) 06 00 (tone code) *

1500 Hz

User

See Tone Code Table on page A-20.

4-13

Send Next CW Message Slowly

(PW) 11 *

4-14

Select Normal CW Speed

(PW) 12 x *
0 = 5 WPM
1 = 7 WPM
2 = 10 WPM
3 = 13 WPM
4 = 15 WPM

5 = 17 WPM
6 = 20 WPM
7 = 24 WPM
8 = 30 WPM
9 = 40 WPM

(PW) 13 x *
0 = 5 WPM
1 = 7 WPM
2 = 10 WPM
3 = 13 WPM
4 = 15 WPM

5 = 17 WPM
6 = 20 WPM
7 = 24 WPM
8 = 30 WPM
9 = 40 WPM

4-14

4-19

Select Slow CW Speed

Select Frequency of Beep 48

normal rate
20 WPM

15 WPM

(PW) 06 01 (tone code) *

500 Hz

See Tone Code Table on page A-20.

4-19

Select Frequency of Beep 49

(PW) 06 02 (tone code) *

750 Hz

See Tone Code Table on page A-20.

4-19

Select Frequency of Beep 50

(PW) 06 03 (tone code) *

1000 Hz

See Tone Code Table on page A-20.

4-19

Select Frequency of Beep 51

(PW) 06 04 (tone code) *

1250 Hz

See Tone Code Table on page A-20.

4-19

Select Frequency of Beep 52

(PW) 06 05 (tone code) *

1500 Hz

See Tone Code Table on page A-20.

4-19

Select Frequency of Beep 53

(PW) 06 06 (tone code) *

1750 Hz

See Tone Code Table on page A-20.

4-37

Select Courtesy Message

(PW) 31 10 (message) *

60 mS
440 Hz
beep
(74 09)

4-37

Select Dropout Message

(PW) 31 13 (message) *

none

4-37

Select Pre-Timeout Message

(PW) 31 16 (message) *

TO in CW

4-37

Select Post-Timeout Message

(PW) 31 19 (message) *

TO in CW

4-37

Select Initial ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 31 30 (message) *

ID in CW

4-37

Select Initial ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 31 33 (message) *

9983 ID
in CW

4-37

Select Normal ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 31 31 (message) *

ID in CW

4-37

Select Normal ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 31 34 (message) *

9983 ID
in CW

A-33

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

4-37

Select Autopatch Dialing Message

(PW) 31 40 (message) *

AS in CW

4-37

Select Autopatch Timeout Warning
Message

(PW) 31 41 (message) *

AR in CW

4-37

Select Phone Line Answer Message

(PW) 31 50 (message) *

3 beeps
(74 09 21
33 )

4-37

Select Reverse Patch Ringout Message

(PW) 31 51 (message) *

55 in CW

4-40

Review Courtesy Message

(PW) 34 10 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Dropout Message

(PW) 34 13 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Pre-Timeout Message

(PW) 34 16 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Post-Timeout Message

(PW) 34 19 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Initial ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 34 30 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Initial ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 34 33 (message) *

9983 ID
in CW

4-40

Review Normal ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 34 31 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Normal ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 34 34 (message) *

9983 ID
in CW

4-40

Review Autopatch Dialing Message

(PW) 34 40 (message) *

AS in CW

4-40

Review Autopatch Timeout Warning
Message

(PW) 34 41 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Phone Line Answer Message

(PW) 34 50 (message) *

none

4-40

Review Reverse Patch Ringout Message

(PW) 34 51 (message) *

none

4-41

Select User Messages

(PW) 31 xx (message) *
xx = 70, 71, 72, or 73

none

4-41

Review User Messages

(PW) 34 xx *
xx = 70, 71, 72, or 73

none

4-42

Send Message

(PW) 15 (message) *

none

4-44

Select OK Command Response Message

(PW) 31 01 (message) *

OK in CW

4-44

Review OK Command Response
Message

(PW) 34 01 *

none

4-44

Select Keystroke Error Command
Response Message

(PW) 31 02 (message) *

?ERR1 in
CW

4-44

Review Keystroke Error Command
Response Message

(PW) 34 02 *

none

4-44

Select Data Error Command Response
Message

(PW) 31 03 (message) *

?ERR2 in
CW

4-44

Review Data Error Command Response
Message

(PW) 34 03 *

none

4-45

Select Warm Reset Message

(PW) 31 00 (message) *

?RES in
CW

4-45

Review Warm Reset Message

(PW) 34 00 *

none

5-1

Security

5-2

Assign Control Operator Password

(PW) 92 (new control operator PW) *

no
password

5-3

Assign Master Password

(PW) 93 (new master PW) *

A-34

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

5-4

Assign Control Operator Privilege Level

(PW) 94 (root number, x) *
0 = master and control operator
1 = master only

all
commands
accessible

5-5

Assign Control Operator Privilege Level to
a Range of Commands

(PW) 94 (first root number, last root
number, x) *
0 = master and control operator
1 = master only

all
commands
accessible

5-6

Enable/Disable Front Panel Display

(PW) 63 99 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

6-1

Macros

6-5

Create New Macro

(PW) 20 (macro name, command) *

no macros

6-7

Append to Macro

(PW) 29 (macro name, command) *

none

6-9

List Macro in CW

(PW) 33 (macro name) *

none

6-9

List Macro in Speech

(PW) 35 (macro name) *

none

6-11

Erase Macro

(PW) 21 (macro name) *

none

6-12

Erase All Macros

(PW) 22 00 *

none

6-13

Rename Macro

(PW) 27 (old, new) *

none

6-15

Pause

(PW) 98 xxx *
(1-255) seconds

none

6-16

Select Power ON-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 00 (macro name) *

none

7-3

Autopatch Setup and Configuration

7-6

Select Autopatch Dialing Mode

(PW) 61 x *
1 = 10 PPS rotary
2 = 20 PPS rotary
3 = 5 PPS DTMF

10 PPS
rotary

7-7

Select Autopatch Dialing Message

(PW) 31 40 (message) *

AS in CW

7-7

Review Autopatch Dialing Message

(PW) 34 40 *

AS in CW

7-8

Select Landline Busy Message

(PW) 31 42 (message) *

BZ in CW

7-8

Select Autopatch Off Message

(PW) 31 44 (message) *

OFF in CW

7-8

Select Autopatch Error Message
(Invalid phone number)

(PW) 31 45 (message) *

?ERR
in CW

7-8

Select Autopatch Reject Message
(Match in Reject Table)

(PW) 31 46 (message) *

?REJ
in CW

7-8

Select Autopatch No-Redial-Number
Message

(PW) 31 47 (message) *

CLR in CW

7-8

Review Autopatch Error Message

(PW) 34 45 *

?ERR
in CW

7-8

Review Autopatch No-Redial-Number
Message

(PW) 34 47 *

CLR in CW

7-8

Review Autopatch Off Message

(PW) 34 44 *

OFF in CW

7-8

Review Autopatch Reject Message

(PW) 34 46 *

?REJ
in CW

7-8

Review Landline Busy Message

(PW) 34 42 *

BZ in CW

7-9

Select Autopatch Dump Message

(PW) 31 43 (message) *

none

User

A-35

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

7-9

Review Autopatch Dump Message

(PW) 34 43 *

none

7-10

Enable/Disable Autopatch Dialing MixedMode

(PW) 63 04 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-11

Autopatch Pause (“B”) Digit Time

(PW) 49 96 xxx *
(001-100)=0.1-10.0 seconds
010 = 1.0 seconds
020 = 2.0 seconds
100 = 10.0 seconds

5.0
seconds

(Note: does not affect the pause in an
Autopatch Dialing Prefix.)
7-12

Enable/Disable Pound Down (# Dump)

(PW) 63 05 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-13

Select Autopatch Dialing Prefix

(PW) 83 10 (prefix) *
Up to 16-digits.
00=0, 01=1, 02=2, 03=3, 04=4,
05=5, 06=6, 07=7, 08=8, 09=9,
10=A, 11=B, 12=C, 13=D, 14=*,
15=#, 16=1-Second Pause,
17=2-Second Pause, 18=5-Second
Pause, 19 = 10-Second Pause,
20=Rotary, 21=DTMF

none

7-13

Delete Autopatch Dialing Prefix

(PW) 83 10 *

none

7-15

Dump Autopatch Using a Code

(PW) 83 *

none

7-16

Select Autopatch Access-Triggered
Macro, Default

(PW) 26 12 (macro name) *

none

7-16

Select Autopatch Dump-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 13 (macro name) *

none

7-17

Enable/Disable Full-Duplex Mode

(PW) 63 07 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-18

Enable/Disable Autopatch Privacy

(PW) 63 06 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-19

Enable/Disable Repeater-to-Phone DTMF
Mute

(PW) 63 08 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-20

Enable/Disable ID During Autopatch

(PW) 63 09 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-21

Require Dump Before Next Call

(PW) 63 10 x *
0 = OFF (not required)
1 = ON (required)

OFF
not
required

7-22

Assign Macro to Any-Rx-Active to AP

(PW) 26 06 (macro name) *

none

7-22

Assign Macro to All-Rx-Inactive to AP

(PW) 26 07 (macro name) *

none

7-23

Landline Hookflash

(PW) 83 1 *

none

A-36

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

7-24

Autopatch Timeout Timer

7-25

Select Autopatch Timeout Timer

(PW) 65 xxx *
(000-546) = 0.0-54.6 minutes
000 = infinity
001 = 0.1 minute
030 = 3.0 minutes
546 = 54.6 minutes ... etc.

3.0
minutes

7-26

Reset Autopatch Timeout Timer

(PW) 81 *

none

7-27

Select Autopatch Timeout Warning
Message

(PW) 31 41 (message) *

AR in CW

7-27

Review Autopatch Timeout Warning
Message

(PW) 34 41 *

none

7-28

Autopatch Access and Passwords

7-29

Access Autopatch With Password

(AP access pswd) (phone number) *

PW is 10

7-30

Access Autopatch Without Password

(phone number) *

OFF
(disabled)

7-32

Change Autopatch Access Password

(PW) 23 (new AP access password) *

PW is 10

7-33

Enable/Disable Autopatch Access
Without Password

(PW) 63 11 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-34

Autopatch Go Off-Hook

(PW) 83 2 *

none

7-34

Autopatch Go Off-Hook, Ignore Busy
Logic Input

(PW) 83 3 *

none

7-35

Autopatch Call Types

7-36

Select Autopatch Call Types

(PW) 60 x *
none = OFF (disabled)
0 = accepted numbers only
1 = operator (0)
2 = xxx-xxxx
3 = 0-xxx-xxxx
4 = 1-xxx-xxxx
5 = 0-xxx-xxx-xxxx
6 = 1-xxx-xxx-xxxx
7 = 1-800-xxx-xxxx, 1-888-xxx-xxxx
8 = xxx-xxx-xxxx

OFF
disabled

7-38

Autopatch Restrictions

7-40

Clear All Accepted Numbers From Table

(PW) 68 *

table
empty

7-40

Enter Accepted Number Into Table

(PW) 68 (phone number) *

table
empty

7-42

Clear All Rejected Numbers From Table

(PW) 67 *

table
empty

7-42

Enter Rejected Number Into Table

(PW) 67 (phone number) *

table
empty

User

A-37

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

7-44

Autopatch Redialer

7-45

Redial Last Number

(PW) 84 *

memory
cleared

7-46

Clear Autopatch Redialer

(PW) 85 *

memory
cleared

7-47

Autopatch Call Counter

7-48

Clear Autopatch Call Counter

(PW) 69 *

counter
000

7-49
4-35

Send Autopatch Call Count in CW

(PW) 86 *

counter
000

4-35

Send Autopatch Call Count in Speech

(PW) 15 9897 *

counter
000

7-50

Phone Line Control Mode

7-53

Select Phone Line Answer Mode, Do Not
Answer

(PW) 64 0 *

(see next
command)

7-53

Select Phone Line Answer Mode

(PW) 64 x yy zz *
x = mode (1-4) (See page 7-38)
y = ring-in delay (00-99) rings
z = ringout limit (00-99) rings

7-54

Select Phone Line Answer Message

(PW) 31 50 (message) *

mode 3,
ring-in
delay 2,
ringout
limit 1
3 beeps
(74 09 21
33)

7-54

Review Phone Line Answer Message

(PW) 34 50 *

none

7-55

Select Phone Line Answer Macro

(PW) 26 16 (macro name) *

none

7-56

Select Control Mode Dump-Triggered
Macro

(PW) 26 81 (macro name) *

none

7-57

Select Phone Line Off-Hook Timer

(PW) 79 xxx *
(000-546)=0.1-54.6 minutes
000 = infinity
001 = 0.1 minute
030 = 3.0 minutes
546 = 54.6 minutes ... etc.

none

7-58

Monitor Repeater Receiver (Rx1)

(PW) 63 23 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-58

Monitor Repeater Receiver (Rx2)

(PW) 63 24 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-58

Monitor Repeater Receiver (Rx3)

(PW) 63 25 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-58

Talk Out Tx1

(PW) 63 26 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

7-58

Talk Out Tx2

(PW) 63 27 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

A-38

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

7-59

Reverse Patch

7-60

Trigger Reverse Patch

(PW) 87 *

none

7-61

Answer Reverse Patch

(PW) 88 *

none

7-62

Select Reverse Patch Ringout Message

(PW) 31 51 (message) *

55 in CW

7-62

Review Reverse Patch Ringout Message

(PW) 34 51 *

none

7-63

Select Ring-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 80 (macro name) *
Note: executes on each ring.

none

7-64

Autopatch Multiple Port Access

7-67

Select Autopatch Access-Triggered
Macro from Rx1

(PW) 26 75 (macro name) *

none

7-67

Select Autopatch Access-Triggered
Macro from Rx2

(PW) 26 76 (macro name) *

none

7-67

Select Autopatch Access-Triggered
Macro from Rx3

(PW) 26 77 (macro name) *

none

7-68

Select Rx1 Autopatch Command
Response Message Routing

(PW) 91 00 x x *
1 = Tx1, 2 = Tx2

1 (Tx1)

7-68

Select Rx2 Autopatch Command
Response Message Routing

(PW) 91 01 x x *
1 = Tx1, 2 = Tx2

1 (Tx1)

7-68

Select Rx3 Autopatch Command
Response Message Routing

(PW) 91 02 x x *
1 = Tx1, 2 = Tx2

1 (Tx1)

8-1

Clock and Calendar

8-2

Set Clock and Calendar

(PW) 25 (year, month, day-of-month,
day-of-week, hour, minute) *
year = 00-99
month = 01-12 (Jan is 01)
day-of-month = 01-31
day-of-week = 0-6 (Sun is 0)
hour = 00-23
minute = 00-59

00:00:00,
Wed, Jan
1, 1992

8-4

Adjust Daylight Savings Time

(PW) 48 x *
0 = fall back (subtract 1 from hours)
1 = spring ahead (add 1 to hours)
2 = fall back (subtract 1 from hours,
inhibited for 61 minutes.)

none

8-6

Reset Clock Seconds

(PW) 48 3 *

none

8-7

Add Clock Seconds

(PW) 48 4 (seconds) *
seconds = 01-30

none

8-7

Subtract Clock Seconds

(PW) 48 5 (seconds) *
seconds = 01-30

none

8-7

Subtract Clock Seconds, Inhibited for 2
Minutes

(PW) 48 6 (seconds) *
seconds = 01-30
(Inhibited for 2 minutes)

none

User

A-39

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

9-1

Scheduler

9-2

Create Setpoint

Form and Data Digit

Default

(PW) 28 (setpoint, macro, month, day,
hour, minute) *
setpoint = 00-99, 2 digits
macro = 4 digits
month = 01-12 or 99, 2 digits
day = 01-75 or 99, 2 digits

no
setpoints

(See Day Code Table page A-46.)

hour = 00-23 or 99, 2 digits
minute = 00-59 or 99, 2 digits
(Note: 99 is the wild card)
9-6

Delete One Setpoint

(PW) 28 (setpoint) *
setpoint = 00-99, 2 digits

none

9-6

Delete Range of Setpoints

(PW) 28 (first setpoint) (last setpoint) *
setpoint = 00-99, 2 digits

none

9-7

Enable/Disable Scheduler

(PW) 63 15 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

10-1

CTCSS Functions

10-2

Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder

(PW) 02 x *
0 = disabled
1 = continuous
2 = 2 seconds
3 = 3 seconds
4 = 4 seconds

0
disabled

10-3

Select Frequency of CTCSS

5 = 5 seconds
6 = 6 seconds
7 = 7 seconds
8 = 8 seconds
9 = 9 seconds

(PW) 03 xx *
(00-63)

all outputs
open

See TS-32 Programming, page 10-5.

11-1

DTMF Decoder

11-2

Enable/Disable Command Response
Messages

(PW) 63 02 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

11-3

Select DTMF Priority/Scan

(PW) 89 (Rx1, Rx2, Rx3, PH) *
0 = no access to DTMF decoder
1 = Priority 1 (highest priority)
2 = Priority 2
3 = Priority 3
4 = Priority 4
5 = Scan this device

Priorities:
Rx1 = 3
Rx2 = 4
Rx3 = 1
PH = 2

11-5

Select Rx1-to-DTMF Decoder Access
Mode

(PW) 57 06 x *
0 = no access
1 = carrier access
2 = PL access
3 = And-PL access
4 = Or-PL access
5 = Anti-PL access

1
carrier
access

11-5

Select Rx2-to-DTMF Decoder Access
Mode

(PW) 57 07 x *
Same as above

1
carrier
access

A-40

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

11-5

Select Rx3-to-DTMF Decoder Access
Mode

(PW) 57 08 x *
Same as above

11-7

Select DTMF Decoder Interdigit Timer

(PW) 82 xx *
(01-99) = 0.1-9.9 seconds
01 = 0.1 seconds
05 = 0.5 seconds
10 = 1.0 seconds
99 = 9.9 seconds ... etc.

1
carrier
access
5.0
seconds

11-8

Select DTMF Decoder Mute Delay

(PW) 96 x *
(0-9) = 0.0-0.9 seconds
0 = 0 seconds
1 = 0.1 seconds
2 = 0.2 seconds ... etc.

0.5
seconds

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx1-Tx1 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 50 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx2-Tx1 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 51 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx3-Tx1 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 52 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx1-Tx2 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 53 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx2-Tx2 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 54 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

11-9

Enable/Disable Rx3-Tx2 DTMF Mute

(PW) 63 55 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

11-10

Enable/Disable DTMF Long Tones

(PW) 63 68 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Zero

(PW) 26 50 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone One

(PW) 26 51 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Two

(PW) 26 52 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Three

(PW) 26 53 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Four

(PW) 26 54 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Five

(PW) 26 55 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Six

(PW) 26 56 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Seven

(PW) 26 57 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Eight

(PW) 26 58 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Nine

(PW) 26 59 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone A

(PW) 26 60 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone B

(PW) 26 61 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone C

(PW) 26 62 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone D

(PW) 26 63 (macro name) *

none

User

A-41

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Star (*)

(PW) 26 64 (macro name) *

none

11-11

Assign Macro to Long Tone Pound (#)

(PW) 26 65 (macro name) *

none

11-12

Assign Macro to DTMF Digit Decoded

(PW) 26 49 (macro name) *

none

12-1

Identifier

12-3

Select Initial ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 31 30 (message) *

ID in CW

12-3

Select Initial ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 31 33 (message) *

12-3

Select Normal ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 31 31 (message) *

9983 ID in
CW
ID in CW

12-3

Select Normal ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 31 34 (message) *

12-3

Select Impolite ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 31 32 (message) *

9983 ID in
CW
none

12-3

Select Impolite ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 31 35 (message) *

none

12-3

Review Initial ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 34 30 *

none

12-3

Review Initial ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 34 33 *

none

12-3

Review Normal ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 34 31 *

none

12-3

Review Normal ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 34 34 *

none

12-3

Review Impolite ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 34 32 *

none

12-3

Review Impolite ID Message for Tx2

(PW) 34 35 *

none

12-4

Select Impolite ID Macro for Tx1

(PW) 26 05 (macro name) *

none

12-4

Select Impolite ID Macro for Tx2

(PW) 26 48 (macro name) *

none

12-4

Select Initial ID Macro for Tx1

(PW) 26 03 (macro name) *

none

12-4

Select Initial ID Macro for Tx2

(PW) 26 46 (macro name) *

none

12-4

Select Polite ID Macro for Tx1

(PW) 26 04 (macro name) *

none

12-4

Select Polite ID Macro for Tx2

(PW) 26 47 (macro name) *

none

12-5

Select ID Message Interval for Tx1 and
Tx2

(PW) 51 xxx *
(005-300) = 0.5-30.0 minutes
005 = 0.5 minutes
060 = 6.0 minute
099 = 9.9 minutes
300 = 30.0 minutes ... etc.

3.0
minutes

12-6

Select ID Pending Interval for Tx1 and
Tx2

(PW) 49 97 xxxx *
(0300-1800) = 30.0-180.0 seconds
0300 = 30.0 seconds
0600 = 60.0 seconds
1200 = 120.0 seconds
1800 = 180.0 seconds ... etc.

30.0
seconds

12-7

Reset Initial ID Message to Normal ID
Message for Tx1

(PW) 54 *

none

12-8

Send Initial ID Message for Tx1

(PW) 55 *

none

12-9

Select Initial ID Programmable Tail
Message for Tx1

(PW) 31 28 (message) *

none

12-9

Select Normal ID Programmable Tail
Message for Tx1

(PW) 31 29 (message) *

none

12-9

Review Initial ID Programmable Tail
Message for Tx1

(PW) 34 28 *

none

A-42

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

12-9

Review Normal ID Programmable Tail
Message for Tx1

(PW) 34 29 *

none

12-10

Select Initial ID Tail Message for Tx1

(PW) 50 0 xx *
xx = tail number 0-15 and 98
0 = (none)
9 = WARN
1 = FEST
10 = RACES
2 = DUES
11 = TGIF
3 = MEET
12 = /R
4 = NET
13 = LINK
5 = HI
14 = RMT (remote)
6 = WX
15 = BAT
7 = ALERT
98 = programmable
8 = WATCH (none) = no msg

none

12-10

Select Normal ID Tail Message for Tx1

(PW) 50 1 xx *
xx = tail number 0-15 and 98
0 = (none)
9 = WARN
1 = FEST
10 = RACES
2 = DUES
11 = TGIF
3 = MEET
12 = /R
4 = NET
13 = LINK
5 = HI
14 = RMT (remote)
6 = WX
15 = BAT
7 = ALERT
98 = programmable
8 = WATCH (none) = no msg

none

12-10

Review Initial ID Tail Message
for Tx1

(PW) 50 0 99 *

none

12-10

Review Normal ID Tail Message
for Tx1

(PW) 50 1 99 *

none

12-11

Enable/Disable ID During Autopatch

(PW) 63 09 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

13-1

Links

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 1 (Rx1 to Tx1)

(PW) 63 81 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 2 (Rx2 to Tx1)

(PW) 63 82 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 3 (Rx3 to Tx1)

(PW) 63 83 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 4 (Rx1 to Tx2)

(PW) 63 84 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 5 (Rx2 to Tx2)

(PW) 63 85 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 6 (Rx3 to Tx2)

(PW) 63 86 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

User

A-43

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 7 (Rx1 to AP)

(PW) 63 87 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 8 (Rx2 to AP)

(PW) 63 88 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 9 (Rx3 to AP)

(PW) 63 89 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 10 (AP to Tx1)

(PW) 63 90 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

13-2

Enable/Disable Path 11 (AP to Tx2)

(PW) 63 91 x *
0 = OFF (disabled
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

13-3

Select Receiver-to-Tx1 Audio Routing
Priority

(PW) 90 00 x x x *
x = 1, 2, 3
1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2, 3 = Rx3

13-3

Select Receiver-to-Tx2 Audio Routing
Priority

(PW) 90 01 x x x *
x = 1, 2, 3
1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2, 3 = Rx3

13-3

Select Receiver-to-Autopatch Audio
Routing Priority

(PW) 90 02 x x x *
x = 1, 2, 3
1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2, 3 = Rx3

13-3

Select Receiver-to-Phone Line Monitor
Audio Routing Priority

(PW) 90 03 x x x *
x = 1, 2, 3
1 = Rx1, 2 = Rx2, 3 = Rx3

13-4

Select Rx1-to-Tx1 Access Mode (Path 1)

(PW) 57 00 x *
0 = no access
1 = carrier access
2 = PL access
3 = And-PL access
4 = Or-PL access
5 = Anti-PL access
6 = Always access

Routing
Priorities:
Rx1, Rx2,
Rx3
Routing
Priorities:
Rx1, Rx2,
Rx3
Routing
Priorities:
Rx1, Rx2,
Rx3
Routing
Priorities:
Rx1, Rx2,
Rx3
1
carrier
access

13-4

Select Rx2-to-Tx1 Access Mode (Path 2)

(PW) 57 01 x *
Same as above

13-4

Select Rx3-to-Tx1 Access Mode (Path 3)

(PW) 57 02 x *
Same as above

13-4

Select Rx1-to-Tx2 Access Mode (Path 4)

(PW) 57 03 x *
Same as above

13-4

Select Rx2-to-Tx2 Access Mode (Path 5)

(PW) 57 04 x *
Same as above

13-4

Select Rx3-to-Tx2 Access Mode (Path 6)

(PW) 57 05 x *
Same as above

A-44

1
carrier
access
1
carrier
access
1
carrier
access
1
carrier
access
1
carrier
access

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

14-1

Logic Inputs

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 1 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 20 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 1 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 21 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 2 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 22 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 2 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 23 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 3 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 24 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 3 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 25 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 4 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 26 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 4 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 27 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 5 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 28 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 5 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 29 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 6 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 30 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Logic Input 6 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 31 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Phone Line Busy Input
Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 32 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to Phone Line Busy Input
Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 33 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to COR Input 1 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 34 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to COR Input 1 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 35 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to COR Input 2 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 36 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to COR Input 2 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 37 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to COR Input 3 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 38 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to COR Input 3 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 39 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to PL Input 1 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 40 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to PL Input 1 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 41 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to PL Input 2 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 42 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to PL Input 2 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 43 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to PL Input 3 Hi-to-Lo

(PW) 26 44 (macro name) *

none

14-2

Assign Macro to PL Input 3 Lo-to-Hi

(PW) 26 45 (macro name) *

none

15-1

Logic Outputs

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Latched OFF

(PW) 71 (list of outputs 1-7) *

all OFF
disabled

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Latched ON

(PW) 70 (list of outputs 1-7) *

all OFF
disabled

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Momentary OFF

(PW) 73 (list of outputs 1-7) *

all OFF
disabled

15-2

Select Logic Outputs Momentary ON

(PW) 72 (list of outputs 1-7) *

all OFF
disabled

16-1

Receiver Functions

16-2

Select Rx1 Start-of-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 67 (macro name) *

none

User

A-45

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

16-2

Select Rx1 Post-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 68 (macro name) *

none

16-2

Select Rx2 Start-of-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 69 (macro name) *

none

16-2

Select Rx2 Post-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 70 (macro name) *

none

16-2

Select Rx3 Start-of-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 71 (macro name) *

none

16-2

Select Rx3 Post-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 72 (macro name) *

none

16-2

Select Rx1 Post-Activity Timer

(PW) 99 00 xx *
(00-99) = 0.0-9.9 minutes.

1.0 minute

16-2

Select Rx2 Post-Activity Timer

(PW) 99 01 xx *
(00-99) = 0.0-9.9 minutes.

1.0 minute

16-2

Select Rx3 Post-Activity Timer

(PW) 99 02 xx *
(00-99) = 0.0-9.9 minutes.

1.0 minute

16-4

Select COR Pulse-Triggered Macro

(PW) 26 17 (macro name) *

none

16-4

Select COR Pulse Parameters

(PW) 47 0 x yyyy zzzz *
x = pulse count
(0-9) = 0-9 pulses
0 = 0 pulses
1 = 1 pulse
5 = 5 pulses ... etc.
y = minimum duration
(0001-9999) = 0.01-99.99 seconds
0001 = 0.01 seconds
0010 = 0.10 seconds
0100 = 1.00 seconds
1000 = 10.00 seconds
9999 = 99.99 seconds ... etc.
z = window time
Same as minimum duration

3 pulses,
0.5 second
minimum
duration,
5.0 second
window
time

16-6

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission
Command Execution for Rx1

(PW) 63 57 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

16-6

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission
Command Execution for Rx2

(PW) 63 58 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

16-6

Enable/Disable End-of-Transmission
Command Execution for Rx3

(PW) 63 59 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

16-8

Enable/Disable From-Start-ofTransmission Timer for Rx1

(PW) 63 64 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled
(*) required
to
terminate
commands
OFF
disabled
(*) required
to
terminate
commands
OFF
disabled
(*) required
to
terminate
commands
OFF
disabled

16-8

Enable/Disable From-Start-ofTransmission Timer for Rx2

(PW) 63 65 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

A-46

OFF
disabled

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

16-8

Enable/Disable From-Start-ofTransmission Timer for Rx3

(PW) 63 66 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

17-1

Transmitter Functions

17-3

Select Courtesy Delay

(PW) 32 xx *
(00-50) = 0.0-5.0 seconds
00 = 0.0 seconds
05 = 0.5 seconds
10 = 1.0 seconds
50 = 5.0 seconds ... etc.

0.0
seconds

17-4

Select Dropout Delay

(PW) 30 xx *
(00-50) = 0.0-5.0 seconds
00 = 0.0 seconds
05 = 0.5 seconds
10 = 1.0 seconds
50 = 5.0 seconds ... etc.

3.0
seconds

17-5

Select Transmitter Timeout Timer

(PW) 40 xxx *
(001-546) = 0.1-54.6 minutes
000 = infinity
001 = 0.1 minute
030 = 3.0 minutes
546 = 54.6 minutes ... etc.

3.0
minutes

17-7

Reset Transmitter Timeout Timer

(PW) 10 *

none

17-8

Enable/Disable Transmitter 1

(PW) 63 00 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

17-8

Enable/Disable Transmitter 2

(PW) 63 22 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

17-9

Key Transmitter (Timed)

(PW) 00 x yyy *
x = transmitter
1 = Tx1
2 = Tx2
y = duration
000 = cancel tx key
(001-546) = 0.1-54.6 minutes
001 = 0.1 minute
010 = 1.0 minute
100 = 10.0 minutes
546 = 54.6 minutes ... etc.

Tx1 and
Tx2 not
requested
to key

17-10

Key Transmitter 1 (Untimed)

(PW) 63 41 x *
0 = cancel tx key
1 = key tx

0
cancel tx
key

17-10

Key Transmitter 2 (Untimed)

(PW) 63 42 x *
0 = cancel tx key
1 = key tx

0
cancel tx
key

17-11

Enable/Disable Tx1 Minimum Unkey
Delay

(PW) 63 31 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

ON
enabled

17-11

Enable/Disable Tx2 Minimum Unkey
Delay

(PW) 63 32 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

User

A-47

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

17-12

Select Tx1 Minimum Unkey Delay

(PW) 49 98 xxxx *
(00-6553) = 0-655.3 second
0000 = 0.0 second
0001 = 0.1 second
0010 = 1.0 second
6553 = 655.3 seconds ... etc.

0.1 second
when
enabled

17-12

Select Tx2 Minimum Unkey Delay

(PW) 49 99 xxxx *
(0000-6553) = 0-655.3 seconds
0000 = 0.0 second
0001 = 0.1 second
0010 = 1.0 second
0100 = 10.0 seconds
6553 = 655.3 seconds ... etc.

0.1 second
when
enabled

17-13

Assign Macro to Any-Rx-Active to Tx1

(PW) 26 11 (macro name) *

none

17-13

Assign Macro to All-Rx-Inactive to Tx1

(PW) 26 09 (macro name) *

none

17-13

Assign Macro to Any-Rx-Active to Tx2

(PW) 26 73 (macro name) *

none

17-13

Assign Macro to All-Rx-Inactive to Tx2

(PW) 26 74 (macro name) *

none

17-14

Assign Macro to Tx1 PTT Inactive-toActive

(PW) 26 82 (macro name) *

none

17-14

Assign Macro to Tx1 PTT Active-toInactive Before Unkey Delay

(PW) 26 83 (macro name) *

none

17-14

Assign Macro to Tx1 PTT Active-toInactive After Unkey Delay

(PW) 26 84 (macro name) *

none

17-14

Assign Macro to Tx2 PTT Inactive-toActive

(PW) 26 85 (macro name) *

none

17-14

Assign Macro to Tx2 PTT Active-toInactive Before Unkey Delay

(PW) 26 86 (macro name) *

none

17-14

Assign Macro to Tx2 PTT Active-toInactive After Unkey Delay

(PW) 26 87 (macro name) *

none

18-1

Repeater Functions

18-2

Select Repeater Access Mode (Path 1)

(PW) 57 00 x *
0 = no access
1 = carrier access
2 = PL access
3 = And-PL access
4 = Or-PL access
5 = Anti-PL access
6 = Always access

1
carrier
access

18-4

Select Repeater Start-of-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 14 (macro name) *

none

18-4

Select Repeater Post-Activity Macro

(PW) 26 15 (macro name) *

none

18-4

Select Repeater Activity Counter/Timer

(PW) 45 x yy *
x = event counter 0-9
0 = each time
1 = every other time ... etc.
y = duration
(00-99) = 0.0-9.9 minutes

0 event
count, 1.0
minute
duration

18-6

Select Anti-Kerchunk Key-Up Delay

(PW) 80 xx *
(00-99) = 0.0-9.9 seconds

0 seconds
(disabled)

18-6

Select Anti-Kerchunk Re-Arm Delay

(PW) 99 10 xx *
(00-99) = 0.0-9.9 minutes

0 minutes

A-48

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

18-8

Select Anti-Kerchunk No Hangtime Mode

(PW) 63 30 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

18-9

Select Courtesy Message for Rx1

(PW) 31 10 (message) *

18-9

Select Courtesy Message for Rx2

(PW) 31 11 (message) *

18-9

Select Courtesy Message for Rx3

(PW) 31 12 (message) *

18-9

Review Courtesy Message for Rx1

(PW) 34 10 *

60 mS 440
Hz beep
(9910 74
09)
60 mS 660
Hz beep
(9910 74
16)
60 mS 880
Hz beep
(9910 74
21)
none

18-9

Review Courtesy Message for Rx2

(PW) 34 11 *

none

18-9

Review Courtesy Message for Rx3

(PW) 34 12 *

none

18-11

Assign Macro to Any-Rx-Active to Tx1

(PW) 26 11 (macro name) *

none

18-11

Assign Macro to All-Rx-Inactive to Tx1

(PW) 26 09 (macro name) *

none

18-11

Assign Macro to Courtesy Message

(PW) 26 10 (macro name) *

none

18-11

Assign Macro to Dropout Message

(PW) 26 08 (macro name) *

none

18-11

Assign Macro to Repeater Timeout

(PW) 26 18 (macro name) *

none

18-11

Assign Macro to Return-From-RepeaterTimeout

(PW) 26 19 (macro name) *

none

19-1

Base Station Functions

19-2

Enable/Disable Star/Pound Talkout

(PW) 63 13 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

19-4

Select Talkout Transmitter Mode

(PW) 63 14 x *
0 = Repeater Mode
1 = Base Station Mode

0,
Repeater
Mode

19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for Rx1

(PW) 63 60 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for Rx2

(PW) 63 61 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for Rx3

(PW) 63 62 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

19-5

Enable/Disable Command Execution on
Interdigit Timer for Phone Line

(PW) 63 63 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)

OFF
disabled

User

A-49

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

20-1

User Timers

20-2

Set Timer Timeout

(PW) 49 xx 03 yyyy *
xx = timer number, 00-09
yyyy = timeout
(0001-6553) = 0.1-655.3 seconds

1.0 second

20-3

Assign Timer Event Macro

(PW) 49 xx 02 (macro name)*
xx = timer number, 00-09

none

20-3

Unassign Timer Event Macro

(PW) 49 xx 02 *
xx = timer number, 00-09

none

20-4

Stop Timer

(PW) 49 xx 00 *
xx = timer number, 00-09

none

20-5

Start/Restart Timer (Retriggerable)

(PW) 49 xx 01 *
xx = timer number, 00-09

none

20-6

Start Timer (One-Shot)

(PW) 49 xx 04 *
xx = timer number, 00-09

none

21-1

Remote Base

21-2

Remote Base Configuration

21-4

Assign Remote Base Password

(PW) 39 02 (new password)*

21-5

Select Remote Base Access-Triggered
Macro

(PW) 26 91 (macro name) *
Note: invoked by Access Remote
Base command.

none

21-6

Select Remote Base Dump-Triggered
Macro

(PW) 26 90 (macro name) *
Note: invoked by Dump Remote
Base command.

none

21-6

Select Remote Base Off Message

(PW) 31 60 (message) *

OFF in CW

21-6

Review Remote Base Off Message

(PW) 34 60 *

OFF in CW

21-7

Reset RBI-1

(PW) 39 91 *

none

21-8

Enable/Disable Remote Base -- Control
Operator

(PW) 63 71 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
Note: used by the Control Operator to
enable/disable the remote base.
Note: Remote Base enabled when
(En71 AND (En72 OR En73)) = TRUE.

OFF
disabled

21-8

Enable/Disable Remote Base -Scheduler

(PW) 63 72 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
Note: used by the Scheduler to
enable/disable the remote base.
Note: Remote Base enabled when
(En71 AND (En72 OR En73)) = TRUE.

ON
enabled

21-8

Enable/Disable Remote Base -- Control
Operator Override Scheduler Disable

(PW) 63 73 x *
0 = OFF (disabled)
1 = ON (enabled)
Note: used by the Control Operator to
override a scheduler disable of the
remote base.
Note: Remote Base enabled when
(En71 AND (En72 OR En73)) = TRUE.

OFF
disabled

A-50

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

21-10

Remote Base User Commands

Form and Data Digit

Default

21-12

Access Remote Base

(RBPW) 1 *

21-13

Dump Remote Base

(RBPW) 0 *

21-14

Speak Radio Configuration

(RBPW) 19 x *
0 = Frequency and Offset
1 = CTCSS Frequency
2 = Both
3 = Abbreviated Freq and Offset
4 = Abbreviated CTCSS Frequency
5 = Abbreviated Both

21-16

Select Memory Channel and Band

(RBPW) 40 (band, channel) *
band =
1 = 144
2 = 222
4 = 440
8 = 1200
channel =
1 thru maximum supported

none

21-16

Macro: Select Memory Channel and Band

(RBPW) 20 (band, channel) *
band =
1 = 144
2 = 222
4 = 440
8 = 1200
channel =
1 thru maximum supported

none

21-17

Select VFO Frequency and Offset

(RBPW) 41 (frequency, offset) *
frequency
140.000 thru 149.995, 6-digits
220.000 thru 229.995, 6-digits
420.000 thru 449.995, 6-digits
1240.000 thru 1299.995, 7-digits
The 1kHz digit can be only 0 or 5.
offset
1 = Minus
2 = Simplex
3 = Plus
0 = On 1200, Minus 20. On 420440, special offset depending
on radio.

none

21-17

Macro: Select VFO Frequency and Offset

(RBPW) 21 (frequency, offset) *
frequency =
140.000 thru 149.995, 6-digits
220.000 thru 229.995, 6-digits
420.000 thru 449.995, 6-digits
1240.000 thru 1299.995, 7-digits
The 1kHz digit can be only 0 or 5.
offset =
1 = Minus
2 = Simplex
3 = Plus
0 = On 1200, Minus 20. On 420440, special offset depending
on radio.

none

User

A-51

7K • Appendix A

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

21-19

Select Transmitter Offset

(RBPW) 42 (offset) *
offset:
1 = Minus
2 = Simplex
3 = Plus
0 = On 1200, Minus 20. On 420440, special offset depending
on radio.

none

21-19

Macro: Select Transmitter Offset

(RBPW) 22 (offset) *
offset =
1 = Minus
2 = Simplex
3 = Plus
0 = On 1200, Minus 20. On 420440, special offset depending
on radio.

none

21-20

Enable/Disable Transmitter

(RBPW) 45 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

disabled

21-20

Macro: Enable/Disable Transmitter

(RBPW) 25 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

disabled

21-21

Enable/Disable Receiver

(RBPW) 44 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

enabled

21-21

Macro: Enable/Disable Receiver

(RBPW) 24 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

enabled

21-22

Enable/Disable Radio Power

(RBPW) 46 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

enabled

21-22

Macro: Enable/Disable Radio Power

(RBPW) 26 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

enabled

21-23

Select Transmitter Power Output

(RBPW) 43 x *
1 = Low
2 = Medium
3 = High

none

21-23

Macro: Select Transmitter Power Output

(RBPW) 23 x *
1 = Low
2 = Medium
3 = High

none

21-24

Select Frequency of CTCSS

(RBPW) 47 (tone code) *
See Page 10-5 for frequencies of 67.0
through 203.5. Above 203.5, use:
33 = 210.7
24 = 218.1
35 = 225.7
36 = 233.6
37 = 241.8
38 = 250.3

none

A-52

User

Programming Tables

Command Quick Reference
Page

Command Name

Form and Data Digit

Default

21-24

Macro: Select Frequency of CTCSS

(RBPW) 27 (tone code) *
See Page 10-5 for frequencies of 67.0
through 203.5. Above 203.5, use:
33 = 210.7
24 = 218.1
35 = 225.7
36 = 233.6
37 = 241.8
38 = 250.3

none

21-25

Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder

(RBPW) 48 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

disabled

21-25

Macro: Enable/Disable CTCSS Encoder

(RBPW) 28 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

disabled

21-26

Enable/Disable CTCSS Decoder

(RBPW) 49 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable

disabled

21-26

Macro: Enable/Disable CTCSS Decoder

disabled

21-27

Send Current Settings

(RBPW) 29 x *
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
(RBPW) 39 *

21-28

Remote Base User Function Outputs

21-29

Select RBI-1 Number of User Function
Outputs in Group

(PW) 39 90 (number in group) *

21-30

Select Individual RBI-1 User Function
Outputs Latched ON

(RBPW) 11 (list of outputs 1-8) *

none

21-30

Select Individual RBI-1 User Function
Outputs Latched OFF

(RBPW) 12 (list of outputs 1-8) *

none

21-31

Enter RBI-1 User Function Output Group

(RBPW) 10 (decimal number) *
The decimal number can be set to 0
through the maximum set in the Select
Number of User Function Outputs
command. The following ranges are
available by number of outputs:
0 = none available
1 = 0 or 1
2 = 0 thru 3
3 = 0 thru 7
4 = 0 thru 15
5 = 0 thru 31
6 = 0 thru 63
7 = 0 thru 127
8 = 0 thru 255

none

User

none

A-53

7K • Appendix A

A-54

Application Notes

Appendix B

Application
Notes
Using the 7K as a Beacon Controller
Several customers are using the 7K Repeater Controller as a Beacon
Controller. The 7K does an excellent job at this, since the speed, pitch, and
interval of the ID-er are remotely programmable; It can also be turned ON
(enabled) and OFF (disabled) remotely. Here's how to do it:
•
•
•

Set the Transmitter Timeout Timer for infinity (page 17-5).
Program the ID Message Interval for the desired frequency of occurrence
(perhaps 1.0 minute). See page 12-5.
Either ground the COR input (RX switch is ON), or open the COR input (RX
switch is OFF).

The transmitter will stay keyed indefinitely. The ID will be sent at the interval
selected by command. If desired, the actual ID Message can be changed
automatically by the 7K. This is accomplished by using the ID-Triggered Macro
capability (page 12-4): when the controller wishes to ID, it executes a macro.
The macro sends the CW ID, and also changes the ID-triggered-macro for the
next ID.
For example, let's assume that we have defined 5 CW ID messages that we
want the 7K to “rotate.” How do we program the 7K to do the rotation?
•
•

Delete the messages (callsigns) that have been stored in the ID-er, if any.
See page 12-3.
Create five macros. Let's call them 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, and 1004.

B-1

7K • Appendix B
Place two commands into each macro; the first one is a Send Message
command (page 4-42) that has one of the desired callsigns in it, and the
second one reprograms the impolite ID macro using the Select Impolite ID
Macro command (page 12-4):
(PW) 20 1000 (PW) 15 (CW message #1) *
(PW) 29 1000 (PW) 26 05 1001 *
(PW) 20 1001 (PW) 15 (CW message #2) *
(PW) 29 1001 (PW) 26 05 1002 *
Continue building macros 1002, 1003, and 1004. At macro 1004 reprogram the
Select Impolite ID Macro command back to 1000:
(PW) 20 1004 (PW) 15 (CW message #5) *
(PW) 29 1004 (PW) 26 05 1000 *
Don't forget to program the Select Impolite ID Macro command (page 12-4) to
get the chain started:
(PW) 26 05 1000 *
You’ll also want to suppress the Enable/Disable Command Response
Messages command (see page 11-2) to keep from hearing OK each time a
macro is executed.

B-2

Application Notes

Positive Voltage TX Keying Circuit
Some transmitters require a positive voltage to be sourced into their PTT inputs
to key; removing the voltage unkeys the transmitter. This contrasts with the
style of transmitter that requires the PTT line to be grounded to key, opened to
unkey.
Transmitters that require positive voltage keying include models made by
Hamtronics, Maggiore, and the RCA 500 and 700-series repeaters.
A simple outboard circuit can be placed between the 7K controller and the
transmitter PTT. A PNP power transistor allows current to flow to the
transmitter to key, and opens the current path to unkey. Be sure to use a
sufficiently large PNP transistor for Q for Q1, as these transmitters or exciters
can draw considerable current. The TX DIP switch in the 7K controller should
be ON.
Q1 can be a 2N2904 if the transmitter/exciter draws 500 mA or less;
recommend TIP30 for loads of 1 A or less.
+13.6VDC

S-COM
4.7K
2K
Q1

PTT

to TX PTT
(+13.6V = key)
(0V = unkey)

B-3

7K • Appendix B

B-4

Installation

Appendix C

Installation
Theory of Operation
Great care was taken in the design of the controller to make it installer-friendly.
Audio and digital interfaces are universal in nature, so that a minimum of
external hardware is needed to complete the installation. Although the
controller’s “engine” is a powerful microprocessor, the command language is
designed to be flexible and easy to learn.

Pre-Programming
The controller needs to know your repeater’s callsign for its Identifier. You also
must tell it your choice of Courtesy Message, Transmitter Timeout Timer, and
so on. You can program the controller on your workbench, with an external
DTMF pad and other devices to simulate the repeater, or you can program the
controller after installation through one of the receiver ports.

Default Information
To make the installation easier, the controller comes pre-programmed with
certain default information stored in non-volatile memory. This is refered to as
the Default Condition of the device.
When you have finished the installation, you may overwrite the preprogrammed default conditions by entering DTMF commands. Likewise, if it
ever becomes necessary, you may also force the controller into its original
default condition by using the Initialize Push-Button during a power-up
sequence. This procedure is explained in the Getting Started chapter on
page 2-1.
This initialize push-button procedure causes the controller to read the default
condition information from the EPROM and write it over the old information
stored in the non- volatile memory.

Power Supply
The controller has a modest power requirement which can be supplied by the
repeater’s power supply in most cases. The controller requires 12VDC at
approximately 125mA (Main Board with Telephone Interface Module). The
C-1

7K • Appendix C
optional Speech Synthesizer Module requires approximately 180mA more.
Power can be unregulated, since the controller contains internal regulators to
create both a 10VDC audio supply and a 5VDC digital supply. A third supply of
4.5VDC is created from the audio supply, and is used as the audio section’s
bias voltage.

Repeater Interfacing
In addition to the power supply, the controller requires a minimum of four
connections to the repeater: Receiver COR, Receiver Audio, Transmitter PTT,
and Transmitter Audio.
If you require subaudible tone operation, additional connections are provided
for a CTCSS Encoder/Decoder.
Note: Paths around the controller should not exist for either the COR-to-PTT
circuit or the RX audio-to-TX audio. Otherwise, the controller will not be able to
fully take charge of the repeater control functions.

Control Receiver Interfacing
If a control receiver is to be used, two additional connections are
required: Control Receiver COR and Control Receiver Audio.
Note: Each COR Input, CTCSS Decoder Input, and Transmitter PTT Output
has an associated DIP switch which is used to either invert—or not invert—the
signal. Thus, signals which are low-active or high-active can be
accommodated.

External Device Interfacing
The controller can sense the states of up to six external devices. Seven logiclevel power MOSFETS accomplish high-current switching (75mA).

Audio Gating
The controller uses two ICs—both of which are under microprocessor control:
An 8-by- 12 Analog Crosspoint Switch IC for main audio gating, and a Triple
SPDT Analog Gate IC for additional gating.
Extremely flexible system designs are possible since all audio sources
(receivers, tone generators, phone line, etc.) are fed into the crosspoint switch,
and all audio loads (transmitters, tone decoder, phone line) are driven from the
crosspoint switch.

Tone Generation
CW and paging tones are generated as square waves by an HD6340
Programmable Timer IC, then shaped by a Transconductance Amplifier to
reduce CW thumping. (This thumping effect is caused by the DC component in
the square wave pulse train). Tones are filtered by a Sixth-Order SwitchedCapacitor Lowpass Filter to yield sine waves. The lowpass filter is under

C-2

Installation
microprocessor control and tracks the tone frequency, so that a constantamplitude sine wave tone is created at any CW or paging tone frequency.
DTMF tones are generated by a MT8880 DTMF Transceiver IC.

Memory Protection
The controller contains circuitry to protect the data stored in RAM and to
maintain the clock and calendar even with no power applied to the controller.
A Dallas Semiconductor DS1644 Timekeeping RAM IC performs the following
tasks: It monitors the 5V logic supply, disables the RAM’s chip-enable input
when an out-of-tolerance condition is detected, and switches the RAM’s VCC
pin from the logic supply to the lithium battery when the logic supply falls too
low to maintain the data. The IC also contains the controller's Clock and
Calendar.
The Lithium Battery contained within the IC has better than a 10-year life due
to low (about 1 µA) current drawn by the RAM under backup conditions.

Cables
You will need to prepare either two or three Cables for the 7K controller.
•
•
•

One cable is for DC power, using the 2.5mm plug provided.
One cable is for repeater connections, using the DB25P provided.
A third cable is for auxiliary connections, and is not needed for simple
installations. It uses the DB25S provided.

The following section of the manual describes the proper connection of the
7K’s circuits to your equipment, and the audio adjustments required.

Repeater Receiver COR
The controller requires a signal, generated by the repeater receiver, which
becomes active when an incoming carrier is detected. This signal is usually
called COR (Carrier Operated Relay) or COS (Carrier Operated Switch), and is
usually generated by the receiver’s Noise-Operated Squelch Circuit. Some
receivers don't have a COR or COS but have a Channel Busy LED Indicator,
which works similarly. At this point, it is unimportant whether the COR signal is
low active or high active, since the controller has sense-reversal DIP switches
(discussed later). The COR from your receiver should be connected to Pin #2
of J2 (the female DB25S connector).
To get a better idea of how to interface your particular COR signal to the
controller, let’s examine the controller’s COR Input Circuit. This circuit consists
of an NPN transistor, Q1A, and three resistors. Q1 is actually a DIP package
containing four 2n3904-type transistors. R10 is a DIP package containing
seven 10K resistors. R11 is a SIP package containing seven 4.7K resistors
with one common. One resistor from R10 and one resistor from R11 form a
three-to-one voltage divider. Therefore, the COR input voltage threshold is 3 x
0.7V, or about 2V. Your receiver’s COR driver must be capable of swinging

C-3

7K • Appendix C
above and below this 2V threshold as the incoming carrier is applied and
removed.
The third resistor mentioned above is R12 (4.7K), which is a “pullup” resistor
connected between the input pin and the controller’s +5V supply. The purpose
of the pullup resistor is to provide input current for the transistor in installations
using dry contacts, or an open- collector transistor driver, to feed the COR
input.
The purpose of the voltage divider mentioned above is to increase the
threshold of voltage needed to switch the input ON and OFF. If the divider were
not used, the input threshold would be only 0.7V, and some COR drivers would
keep the input “high” permanently.
•
•
•

If your receiver’s COR circuit provides a pair of relay contacts to indicate
carrier detection, connect one contact to the COR input of the controller and
the other contact to ground.
If your COR circuit provides and open-collector transistor (or open-drain
MOSFET), connect the signal to the COR input.
If, however, your COR circuit sources a voltage (such as from a TTL logic
gate or an op amp comparator circuit), you may need to disable the
controller’s input.

To check your installation:
•
•

Make the connection.
Measure the voltage at the controller’s COR input pin with both the
controller and receiver powered up.
• The voltage should swing above and below the 2V threshold as an
incoming carrier is applied and removed.
Some COR drivers have low output impedances, and it is not necessary to clip
the pullup resistor. However, if the pullup resistor interferes with the operation
of your COR driver, you should clip one lead and lift the resistor to prevent it
making contact.
Finally, determine the “sense” of your receiver’s COR signal. That is, does the
COR signal go low or high when an incoming carrier is detected?
•
•

C-4

If the COR goes low when a carrier is applied and returns high when the
carrier is removed, place DIP Switch #1 (part of S2) in the ON (closed)
position.
If, however, the COR goes high when a carrier is applied and returns to low
the carrier is removed, place DIP Switch #1 in the OFF (open) position.

Installation

Repeater Transmitter PTT
Your transmitter will require a PTT (Push-To-Talk) Signal from the controller.
When this signal becomes active, the transmitter will Key (Transmit). At this
point, it is unimportant whether your transmitter’s PTT input is low active or
high active since the controller has sense-reversal DIP switches (discussed
later). The PTT input from your transmitter should be connected to Pin #10 of
J2 (the female DB25S connector).
To get a better idea of how to interface your particular PTT input to the
controller, let’s examine the controller’s PTT output circuit. This circuit consists
of a power MOSFET connected as an open-drain driver, plus a transient
suppressor connected between the output and ground. The suppressor
removes transients above about 40V, thereby protecting the MOSFET. The
MOSFET is a large (8 Amp) device in a TO-220 package, but it was not
selected for its high current capability. Rather, it was used because of its low
ON resistance (less than 1 Ω), making it a nearly perfect switch. The
MOSFET’s drain is connected to the PTT output, and its source is grounded.
When turned ON, the MOSFET appears to be a very low resistance between
the output and ground. When turned OFF, the MOSFET appears to be a very
high impedance, isolating the output from ground. Because of these
characteristics, the PTT circuit can control transmitters with a variety of PTT
inputs, from TLL-logic-compatible to large DC relay coils.
Some transmitters, including models made by Hamtronics, MELCO (Maggiore
Electronic Laboratory), and RCA (500-and 700-series), use a powered PTT
input arrangement, and cannot be keyed by an open-drain driver. These
transmitters require a positive voltage to be sourced into their PTT inputs to
key; removing the voltage unkeys the transmitter. The current requirement can
be substantial.
A simple outboard circuit can be placed between the controller’s PTT output
and the transmitter’s PTT input to satisfy these requirements. (See schematic
on page B-3.)
•
•
•
•
•
•

Connect a large PNP transistor so that its emitter goes to the transmitter’s
+12V supply, its collector goes to the transmitter’s PTT input, and its base
goes to the controller’s PTT output through a 2K resistor (important).
Connect a 4.7K resistor across the PNP transistor’s base and emitter.
If the transmitter draws little current through its PTT (500mA or less), you
can use a 2N2904.
If the transmitter draws 1 Amp or less, use a TIP30.
When using this outboard circuit, place DIP Switch #7 (part of S2) in the ON
(closed) position.
You may then skip to the Repeater Receiver Audio section which follows.

Unless you have used the outboard circuit described above, you must
determine the sense of your transmitter’s PTT input.
•
•

Does the transmitter key when the PTT input is driven low or high? (The
majority of transmitters key when the PTT input is driven low.)
If the transmitter keys when the PTT input is driven low and unkeys when
the PTT input is opened, place DIP Switch #7 (part of S2) in the ON
(closed) position.

C-5

7K • Appendix C
•

If the transmitter keys when the PTT input is opened and unkeys when the
PTT input is driven low, place DIP Switch #7 in the OFF (open) position.

Repeater Receiver Audio
The controller requires audio from the repeater receiver. Connect the audio
from the repeater receiver to Pin #1 of J2 (the female DB25S connector).
To get a better idea of how to interface your particular receiver’s audio output
to the controller, let’s examine the controller’s repeater receiver audio input.
This circuit consists of an op amp connected as an AC-coupled inverting
amplifier, with two feedback resistors and one feedback capacitor. A 50K pot,
R97, is connected between the audio input and ground, and serves as an
adjustment for the audio going into the op amp. The input impedance of the
controller depends upon the pot setting, but will be 14KΩ or greater.The best
place to get receiver audio is the output of the receiver’s first audio preamplifier
stage (usually right after the discriminator). This point is often available at the
high end of the volume control pot. The preamplifier stage provides flat audio
from a low-impedance driver, often an op amp or an emitter-follower stage.
Note: Do not tap into the wiper of the volume control, or use the speaker driver
as the audio source; accidental adjustment of the volume control will affect the
repeat level. Speaker audio has a higher level of distortion than audio from
earlier stages.
The controller works best when driven with flat (not pre-emphasized) audio at a
level of 700mV RMS (2V peak-to-peak). At this level, the controller’s RX1 pot
(R97) will be in the mid range position when optimum audio is fed to internal
circuits. The controller’s actual input acceptance range is 200mV RMS (0.5V pp) to 2V RMS (5.6V p-p) as shipped from the factory, controllable by the RX1
pot.
If your receiver’s audio level is below the minimum of 200mV, you can increase
the op amp’s gain by cutting a feedback resistor.
•
•
•

Resistor R30 (100K) has one lead marked “A”on the PC board; cut his lead
and lift the resistor.
This operation changes the input acceptance to a new range of 70mV RMS
(0.2V p-p) to 700mV RMS (2V p-p).
The midrange position of the RX1 pot will now correspond to 250mV RMS
(0.7V p- p).

Some repeater owners will prefer to drive the controller with pre-emphasized
audio from the receiver’s discriminator circuit.
•
•

C-6

To accommodate this, the op amp stage must provide a -6dB/octave rolloff
response (de-emphasis), which results in flat audio being sent to the
controller’s circuits. (This is especially important for the DTMF decoder).
Capacitor C67 (47pF) can be increased to 0.01µF if normal gain is used, or
to 0.0047µF if the high-gain modification has been done, to provide the
required de-emphasis.

Installation
After you have completed the repeater receiver audio interfacing, check the
audio level at Pin #1 of U37A. It should be 700mV RMS (2V p-p) when the
receiver is fed a fully- deviated 1KHz sine wave tone from a service monitor.

Repeater Transmitter Audio
Your transmitter will require audio from the controller. Connect the audio input
of the transmitter to Pin #14 of J2 (the female DB25S connector).
To get a better idea of how to interface your particular transmitter’s audio input
to the controller, let’s examine the controller’s repeater transmitter audio output
circuit. This circuit consists of two op amps and a number of discrete parts. The
first op amp, U34D, is an audio summer (mixer) with two inputs from the
crosspoint switch. Typically, one input carries repeat audio and the other
carries the CW ID tones; however, the controller’s software can switch a
number of sources to these mixed inputs. The second op amp, U34A, is the
transmitter audio driver. The output impedance of the driver is 600 Ω. A 50K
pot, R104, is connected between the two op amps and serves as the master
gain pot for the transmitter audio.
The controller’s driving capability depends upon the load impedance presented
by the transmitter’s audio input.
•
•

If the controller is driving a load of 10KΩ or greater, the output level can be
adjusted from 200mV RMS (0.5V p-p) to 2V RMS (5.6V p-p).
If the controller is driving a 600Ω load, the output level can be adjusted from
100mV RMS (0.3 p-p) to 1V RMS (2.8V p-p).

Note: In most 600Ω systems, nominal level is 0dBm, or 775mV RMS. This
corresponds to the 80% clockwise position of R104.
If your transmitter’s audio input is much more sensitive than the level figures
given above, or if you must drive the microphone input, the gain of the
transmitter audio driver op amp should be reduced.
•
•
•

This is accomplished by cutting an input resistor, R75 (27K). Clip one lead
and lift the resistor. This modification reduces all audio sent to the
transmitter.
If the controller is driving a load of 10KΩ or greater, the output level can be
adjusted form 40mV RMS (113mV p-p) to 400mV RMS (1.1V p-p).
If the controller is driving a 600Ω load, the output level can be adjusted from
20mV RMS (56mV p-p) to 200mV RMS (565mV p-p).

Note: Although it is always a good idea to use shielded cable between the
controller’s audio connections and the repeater’s audio connections, it is
especially important to do so when driving sensitive mic inputs in transmitters.

C-7

7K • Appendix C

Repeater CTCSS Decoder
CTCSS, or Continuous Tone-Controlled Squelch System, is a convenient
problem solver for those bands that are being crowded with repeaters in
various parts of the country. In addition, the controller allows CTCSS to be
used as a qualifier for the entry of DTMF commands to increase the security of
the repeater system. Well-known trademarked names for CTCSS include: PL
or Private Line™ (Motorola), Channel Guard™ (General Electric), and Call
Guard™ (Johnson). Your repeater may already have a CTCSS Decoder built
in, or you may wish to install one of the add-on boards readily available from a
number of sources. The TS-64, from Communications Specialists, Inc.,
Orange, CA, 1-800-854-0547, http://www.com-spec.com, is a good example. This
device is crystal-controlled for stability, and allows switch selection of one of 64
CTCSS tone frequencies.
The CTCSS Decoder should be installed in your repeater receiver following the
instructions provided by the decoder manufacturer. The output from the
decoder is usually an open-collector transistor driver which is either low active
or high active. This signal should be connected to Pin #5 of J2 (the female
DB25S connector).
To check your installation:
•
•

Measure the voltage at Pin #5 of J2 with the receiver, CTCSS decoder, and
controller powered up.
The voltage should swing above and below the 2.1V threshold as an
incoming CTCSS tone is applied and removed.

You must also determine the sense of your CTCSS decoder output.
•
•
•

Does the output go low or high when the correct CTDSS tone is received?
If the output goes low when the tone is received and returns high when the
tone is removed, then place DIP Switch #4 in the ON (closed) position.
If, however, the output goes high when the tone is received and returns low
when the tone is removed, the place DIP Switch #4 in the OFF (open)
position.

An additional feature of this controller is the ability to change the CTCSS
decoder’s frequency remotely. To do so requires that you use a CTCSS
decoder that has jumper- or switch-selectable tones, not pot-adjusted (tunable)
tones.
•
•
•
•
•
•

C-8

You must remove any CTCSS frequency selection jumpers or open any DIP
switches to allow the controller to control the frequency.
Connect wires from the frequency selection sides of the jumpers or DIP
switches to the CTCSS Frequency pins on the controller (see page C-16,
connector J2).
Connect jumper or switch #1 to CTCSS Frequency #1, jumper or switch #2
to CTCSS Frequency #2, and so on.
The TS-64 will use all 6 CTCSS Frequency connections.
Other CTCSS decoders, eg. the TS-32, will need only 5.
By entering the proper commands, you can tell the controller to connect the
jumpers or throw the switches on the decoder to change the tone
frequency.

Installation

Control Receiver COR
A control receiver is a wise addition to your repeater system, as it allows you to
control the repeater on a frequency other than the repeater’s input. Users of
the repeater will not notice any change in operation while the control channel is
occupied, except that the repeater will not accept any of their DTMF
commands. Additionally, any Command Response Messages will be sent over
the repeater transmitter that are caused by commands received from the
control channel (unless these response messages have been turned OFF by
command). When the control channel is released, all operations return to
normal.
If you want to implement a control channel function, you must supply both the
following from your control receiver: A COR signal and audio.
The control receiver COR signal can be either low active or high active. This
signal should be connected to Pin #4 of J2 (the female DB25S connector), the
RX3 COR Input.
No software currently exists to support the RX3 PL Input; therefore, if you wish
to use a CTCSS decoder on the control channel, you must connect the output
of the decoder to the RX3 COR Input.
Better yet, externally “and” together the COR and CTCSS decode signals, and
feed the result into the RX3 COR input. Unless the correct CTCSS tone is
recognized by the decoder, the controller will ignore the control receiver. The
control receiver COR input to the controller is similar to the repeater receiver
COR input. The voltage divider is made up of one resistor from network R10
and one resistor from network R11. The pullup resistor is R14. (You may refer
to the Repeater Receiver COR section on page C-3 for a discussion of the
hardware design of the input circuit.)
To check your installation:
•
•

Measure the voltage at Pin #4 of J2 with the control receiver and controller
powered up.
The voltage should swing above and below the 2.1V threshold as an
incoming carrier is applied and removed.

You must also determine the sense of your control receiver COR output signal.
•
•

Does the output go low or high when an incoming carrier is detected and
returns high when the carrier is removed? If so, place DIP Switch #3 in the
ON (closed) position.
If, however, the output goes high when the carrier is detected and returns
low when the carrier is removed, place DIP Switch #3 in the OFF (open)
position.

Note: If you do not use a control receiver, be sure DIP Switch #3 is in the ON
(closed) position. This configures the controller for a low-active COR signal.
The pullup resistor on the input will hold the input high, thus releasing the
DTMF decoder from the control channel.

C-9

7K • Appendix C

Control Receiver Audio
If you are adding a control receiver to your repeater system, you must supply
both a COR signal and an audio signal from the control receiver to the
controller. The COR signal has been previously discussed. Control Receiver
Audio should be connected to Pin #25 of J2 (the female DB25S connector),
shown in the schematics as RX3.
The design of the control receiver audio input is similarly to the design of the
repeater receiver audio input. Refer to the Repeater Receiver Audio section on
page C-6 for additional information. The control receiver level pot is R99.
•
•

To increase the gain of the control receiver input stage, cut the lead labeled
“C” of resistor R37 (100K).
To accommodate pre-emphasized audio, change capacitor C74 from 47pF
to 0.01µF if normal gain is used, or 0.0047µF if the high-gain modification
has been done.

After you have completed the control receiver audio interfacing, check the
audio level at Pin #8 of U37C. The level should be about 700mV RMS (2V p-p)
when the control receiver is fed a fully-deviated 1KHz sine wave tone from a
service monitor.

DC Power
The controller requires a power source of +12 to +15VDC.
Note: Do not exceed a supply voltage of +15V. The controller’s DC power
input is protected by a 15V transient suppressor, which will start to draw current
when the input voltage exceeds 15VDC.
The amount of current drawn by the controller depends upon the configuration.
•
•
•
•

The 7K Main Board draws less than 125 mA.
The Telephone Interface Module draws negligible current.
The Speech Synthesis Module draws about 180 mA.
A loaded system, then, can be expected to draw about 300 mA.

The controller does not require a regulated power source, since it contains
local voltage regulator ICs for its analog and digital circuits. However, The
power source must be free of “sags” that may occur, for example, when the
transmitter is keyed. If significant ripple is present on the power source output,
the ripple “peaks” must not exceed +15V. Ripple “valleys” must not fall below
+12V.
The controller contains circuitry to protect the data stored in memory during the
power outages. No external battery backup is needed to prevent loss of
memory data. Owners may wish to provide backup power to both the repeater
and the controller to ensure continuous service during utility power outages.

C-10

Installation
Power should be supplied to the controller via the 2.5mm x 5.5mm DC power
plug (supplied).
•
•

The center hold forms the positive (+) connection.
The sleeve forms the negative (-) connection.

Note: Owners of alternatively-powered repeaters (solar, fuel cell, battery, etc.)
should be aware that the 7K has been designed to behave predictably when
the DC power source is slowly reduced. Such behavior is important to prevent
damage to the energy source. For example, some controllers will suddenly stop
operating (i.e. reset) when a low voltage limit is reached. If an output, such as
the transmitter PTT line, was enabled at the time, and the transmitter PTT line,
was likewise enabled, the transmitter could stay keyed until the power source
failed.
Your S-COM controller will cease microprocessor operation when the power
supply voltage fails, but it will also reset the digital outputs at that time. This
condition will be held until the power source voltage drops considerably. With
little load on the source. This will take a long time to occur.

Logic Inputs
The controller has the ability to monitor logical (ON/OFF) devices at the
repeater site. There are 7 Logic Inputs for this purpose. Any of the 3 Receiver
COR Inputs and the 3 CTCSS Decoder Inputs may be used as additional logic
inputs. Each logic input has a hardware interface that is similar to the repeater
receiver COR input. Refer to the Repeater Receiver COR section on page C-3
for details on the design of the input circuit.
The controller can sense either a low-to-high or a high-to-low transition, or
both, on each logic input. Therefore, there is no need for Sense-Reversal DIP
Switches on the 7 logic inputs.
Logic inputs are very handy for informing the controller when some external
condition has changed. Examples include detection of high water, high SWR,
power failure, intrusion, and so on. Since the controller will execute macro
commands upon sensing a change, the owner can control the action that will
be taken. (This is a big improvement over controllers that take fixed action
when an input is tripped, such as appending an alarm CW message to the tail.)

Logic Outputs
The controller has the ability to control logical (ON/OFF) devices at the
repeater site. There are 7 Logic Outputs for this purpose.
Each logic output has a hardware interface that is similar to the transmitter PTT
output, except that the power MOSFET devices are smaller. Refer to the

C-11

7K • Appendix C
Repeater Transmitter PTT section on page C-5 for details on the design of the
output circuit.
The power MOSFETS used as logic output drivers appear as 5Ω resistances to
ground when in the conducting state (ON), and can sink up to 75mA. They
appear as open circuits when in the non-conducting state (OFF). Do not apply
over 40VDC, as the transient suppressors start conducting at 40V.
Since the drain connections of the MOSFETs are brought out to the connector
without pullup resistors, this configuration is called open drain (similar to open
collector circuits using bipolar transistors). An ohmmeter cannot be used to
check the logic outputs, since no change will be seen when the outputs are
turned ON and OFF. A DC power source and a load of some type will be
needed to see the outputs change state. If you need TLL- Compatible Outputs,
simply connect pullup resistors of 3KΩ from the desired outputs to the 5V
power supply of the TTL device being driven.
Logic outputs are very handy for controlling external devices and appliances at
the site. Loads include incandescent lamps, LEDs, integrated or discrete logic,
and relay coils.
Note: Although the power MOSFETS are protected by transient suppressors in
the controller, it is still important to wire diodes across inductive loads (such as
relays) in the non-conducting direction.
Each logic output may be commanded to be Latched ON or OFF, or
Momentary turned ON or OFF for 0.5 seconds.
The controller will remember the status of each logic output during power
outages. When power returns, the controller will turn the outputs ON or OFF to
match the conditions before the power loss. An initialization sequence will force
all outputs OFF.

Telephone Line Connection
If your controller is equipped with the Telephone Interface Module, you can
connect the controller to the telephone network. The 14-foot cable supplied
with your controller has a modular USOC (Universal Service Order Code) plug
at each end. This plug mates with the USOC RJ11C jack. Connect one end of
the cable to the controller, and the other end to the RJ11C jack at your
repeater site.
The Telephone Interface Module is registered under Part 68 of the FCC Rules
and Regulations for direct connection to the telephone line. A label is attached
on the rear of the cabinet, listing the registered number and ringer equivalence.
It reads:
Complies with Part 68, FCC Rules
FCC Registration No. GHZ37K-10180-DP-N
Ringer Equivalence: 1.3B

C-12

Installation
The Telephone Interface Module contains lightning protection circuitry.
However, it is still a good practice to install additional protection at the
telephone line service entrance. The following companies market phone line
suppressors:

Telephone Line Suppressors Market
Sources
Citel America, Inc. 1111 Parkcentre
Blvd., Suite 474 MiamiFL33169 (305)
621-0022 (FL) (800) 248-3548
ITW Linx Communications Products 201
Scott Street Elk GroveIL60007 (312)
952-8844 (312) 952-1633 (FAX)
Telebyte Technology, Inc. 270 East
Pulaski Road GreenlawnNY11740 (516)
385-8184 (FAX) (800) 835-3298 (516)
423-3232
TII Industries, Inc. 1375 Akron Street
CopiagueNY11726 (516) 789-5020
(Sales) (516) 789-5000 Telex 144631

L-COM Data Products 1755 Osgood
Street, Rt. 125 North AndoverMA01845
(617) 682-6936 (617) 689-9484 (FAX)
MCG Electronics Inc. 12 Burt Drive Deer
ParkNY11729 (516) 586-5125 Telex
645518
PolyPhaser Corporation 1425 Industrial
Way GardnervilleNV89410-1237 (800)
325-7170 (702) 782-4476 (FAX) Telex
272718
L.E.A. Dynatech 12516 Lakeland Road
Santa Fe SpringsCA90670 (213) 9440916 (800) 654-8087 (213) 944-0781
(FAX)

FCC Part 68 Rules
FCC rules and regulations, Part 68 require the following information be
provided to the user of FCC Registered Terminal Equipment:
Section 68.100 General.
Terminal equipment may be directly connected to the telephone network in
accordance with the rules and regulations … of this part.
Section 68.104 Standard Plugs And Jacks.
(a) General. “Except for telephone company-provided ringers, all connections
to the telephone network shall be made through standard (USOC) plugs and
standard telephone company-provided jacks, in such manner as to allow for
easy and immediate disconnection of the terminal equipment. Standard jacks
shall be so arranged that if the plug connected thereto is withdrawn, no
interference to the operation of the equipment at the customer’s premises
which remains connected to the telephone network shall occur by reason of
such withdrawal.”
Section 68.106 Notification to Telephone Company.
“Customers connecting terminal equipment or protective circuitry to the
telephone network shall, before such connection is made, give notice to the
telephone company of the particular line(s) to which such connection is to be
made, and shall provide to the telephone company the FCC Ringer
Equivalence of the registered terminal equipment or protective circuitry. The
customer shall give notice to the telephone company upon final disconnection
of such equipment or circuitry from the particular line(s).”

C-13

7K • Appendix C
Section 68.108 Incidence of Harm.
“Should terminal equipment or protective circuitry cause harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company shall, where practicable, notify the customer
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required; however, where
prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company may temporarily
discontinue service forthwith, if such action is reasonable in the circumstances.
In case of such temporary discontinuance, the telephone company shall
(1) promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance, (2) afford
the customer the opportunity to correct the situation which gave rise to the
temporary discontinuance, and (3) inform the customer of the right to bring a
complaint to the Commission pursuant to the procedures set forth in Subpart
E of this part.”
Section 68.110 Compatibility of the Telephone Network and Terminal
Equipment.
(b) Changes in Telephone Company Facilities, Equipment Operations or
Procedures.
“The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment, operations or procedures, where such action is reasonably
required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules
and regulations in the Part. If such changes can be reasonably expected to
render any customer’s terminal equipment incompatible with telephone
company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of
such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or
performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow
the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.”
Section 68.216 Repair of Registered Terminal Equipment and Registered
Protective Circuitry.
“Repair of registered terminal equipment and registered protective circuitry
shall be accomplished only by the manufacturer or assembler thereof or by
their authorized agent; however, routine repairs may be performed by a user, in
accordance with the instruction manual if the applicant certifies that such
routine repairs will not result in noncompliance with the rules in Subpart D of
this Part.”
Section 68.218 (b) Additional Instructions To User.
1. “… registered terminal equipment or protective circuitry may not be used
with party lines or coin lines.”
2. “… when trouble is experienced the customer shall disconnect the registered
equipment from the telephone line to determine if the registered equipment is
malfunctioning, and … if the registered equipment is malfunctioning, the use of
such equipment shall be discontinued until the problem has been corrected.”
3. “… the user must give notice to the telephone company in accordance with
the requirements of section 68.106 …”

C-14

Installation

Input and Output Connectors
Two 25-position D-subminiature connectors, one male and one female, are
mounted on the 7K Main Board for interfacing to external devices. J2 is a
female connector (DB25S). J3 is a male connector (DB25P). Use the mating
connectors supplied with the 7K for your cable assemblies.

Input and Output Connectors
Controller Main Board

Pin #

J2 Female Connector

J3 Male Connector

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

receiver #1 audio input
receiver #1 COR
receiver #2 COR
receiver #3 COR
receiver #1 CTCSS decoder
receiver #2 CTCSS decoder
receiver #3 CTCSS decoder
receiver #2 audio input
CTCSS frequency #1
transmitter #1 PTT
transmitter #2 PTT
CTCSS frequency #2
CTCSS frequency #3
transmitter #1 audio output
transmitter #2 audio output
CTCSS frequency #4
CTCSS frequency #5
CTCSS frequency #6
ground
ground
ground
ground
CTCSS encoder in
CTCSS encoder out
receiver #3 audio input

logic input #1
logic input #2
logic input #3
logic input #4
logic input #5
logic input #6
phone line busy input
logic output #1
logic output #2
logic output #3
logic output #4
logic output #5
logic output #6
logic output #7
phone line busy output
FC1 (reserved)
FC2 (reserved)
FC3 (reserved)
+5V test
+10V test
+12V test
ground
ground
ground
ground

C-15

7K • Appendix C

Audio Level Potentiometers
The 7K Main Board contains 12 potentiometers. The pots are used to adjust
audio levels only. Signalling tones are digitally generated and do not require
frequency adjustment.

Audio Level Potentiometers
Controller Main Board

Pot

Location

Function

RX1
RX2
RX3
TX1
TX2
CW-TX
CW-PL
tone page

R97
R98
R99
R104
R105
R102
R101
R103

DTMF page
AGCPL

R100
R107

R106

speech

R108

adjusts audio level from receiver #1
adjusts audio level from receiver #2
adjusts audio level from receiver #3
adjusts audio level to transmitter #1
adjusts audio level to transmitter #2
adjusts level of CW feeding the transmitters
adjusts level of CW feeding the phone line
adjusts level of paging tones feeding the transmitters (1-tone, 2tone, 5/ 6-tone)
adjusts level of DTMF paging tones feeding the transmitters
adjusts audio level of phone line feeding the transmitters
(AGC’d)
adjusts audio level of phone line feeding the DTMF decoder
(non- AGC’d)
adjusts the level of the speech synthesizer

Note: There is also a pot on the Speech Synthesis Module, R3, which is used
to adjust the pitch of the synthesizer. This pot may be adjusted to suit your
taste.

C-16

Installation

Message Level Potentiometers
Five of the 12 pots located on the 7K Main Board are used to set levels
associated with messages. The five pots are shown in the table which follows:

Message Level Potentiometers
Controller Main Board

Pot

Sets Level

R100
R101
R102
R103
R108

DTMF to transmitter
CW to phone line
CW to transmitter
tone page to transmitter
Speech Synthesizer Module

•
•
•
•
•

•

All pots are adjusted clockwise to increase level, and counter-clockwise to
decrease level.
R100 adjusts the level of the DTMF characters sent to the transmitter. The
level of DTMF characters sent to the phone line during autopatch dialing is
not adjustable.
R101 adjusts the level of CW characters and beep characters sent into the
phone line.
R102 adjusts the level of CW characters and beep characters sent to the
transmitter. Many repeater owners adjust the level of CW to a low deviation.
(.5–1.5KHz) to prevent interference with voice conversations.
R103 adjusts the level of tone pages (single-tone, two-tone sequential, and
5/6-tone) sent to the transmitter. Typically, the deviation for these types of
pages is 3 to 3.3KHz. Pages sent to the phone line as acknowledgments
will be at the same level as CW characters sent to the phone line.
R108 adjusts the level of the speech synthesizer, and controls the level of
speech characters to both the transmitter and the phone line.

C-17

7K • Appendix C

DIP Switches
The 7K Main Board contains a group of 8 DIP Switches. They are used to
invert the logic of the 3 COR inputs, the 3 CTCSS decoder inputs, and the 2
PTT outputs. In all cases, a switch in the ON (closed) position means low
active; a switch in the OFF (open) position means high active.

DIP Switches
Controller Main Board

Switch #

Function

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

inverts receiver #1 COR
inverts receiver #2 COR
inverts receiver #3 COR
inverts CTCSS decoder for receiver #1
inverts CTCSS decoder for receiver #2
inverts CTCSS decoder for receiver #3
inverts transmitter #1 PTT
inverts transmitter #2 PTT

Testing The Controller-To-Repeater Transmitter
Interface
Apply power to both the controller and the repeater while monitoring the
repeater with an extra receiver. When power is applied, the transmitter should
key and send the reset CW message.
If the transmitter does not key at all:
•
•

Check the wiring. Both the controller and the repeater should be powered
up.
Check the connection between the controller’s PTT output and the
transmitter’s PTT input.

If the transmitter keying is acting “upside down” (unkeying during the message
but keying afterwards), reverse the repeater transmitter PTT DIP switch.
If the transmitter is keying properly but no CW message is heard, check the
wiring from the controller’s repeater transmitter audio output to the transmitter’s
audio input.
If the CW message is too loud or too soft:
•
•
•

C-18

Adjust the CW-to-TX pot on the main board.
See the Messages chapter on page 4-1.
Turn the pot clockwise to increase the level, and counter-clockwise to
decrease the level.

Installation
If the CW message is still too loud with the pot turned nearly all the way down,
you may be attempting to drive the microphone input of the transmitter instead
of a later stage.
If you cannot drive a later stage, check the Transmitter Audio Output on page
C-7 for hints for decreasing the transmitter drive level.

Testing The Controller-To-Repeater Receiver Interface
Generate an RF signal on the repeater’s input frequency. The controller should
key the repeater transmitter. When the signal disappears, a short courtesy
beep should be heard. The transmitter should stay keyed for a few more
seconds, then it should unkey.
If this does not happen:
•
•

Check the wiring between the repeater receiver’s COR driver and the
controller’s Receiver #1 COR Input.
Check the voltage on the COR line to see if it swings above and below the
required threshold. (Check the voltage with the controller and receiver
connected, not just the open-circuit COR output from the receiver).

If the repeater is acting upside down (unkeying when a signal exists but keying
afterwards), reverse the Receiver #1 COR DIP Switch.
The default condition of the controller causes a 0.5-second delay between the
loss of carrier and the courtesy beep. The transmitter will stay keyed for an
additional 3.0 second dropout delay. These characteristics may all be changed
later, so do not be concerned if this is not the way you wish the repeater to act.
•
•
•
•

Generate a modulated RF signal on the repeater’s input frequency (a
service monitor is quite helpful).
Check the audio level as instructed in the Repeater Receiver Audio section
on page C-6.
Check the transmitter for proper deviation, and
Adjust the Transmitter #1 Audio Output pot as necessary.

Testing The DTMF Decoder
Your controller uses an 8800-Type DTMF Transceiver IC. This crystalcontrolled device encodes and decodes all 16 DTMF digits. It has an extremely
wide dynamic range (30 dB), and can detect digits that have as much as -6 dB
to +6 dB of twist.
Twist refers to the difference in amplitude between the two individual tones that
are summed to make up a DTMF digit. The more twist a system gives to DTMF
digits, the more difficult it is to detect the digits. In repeater systems, twist can
be caused by the user’s transmitter.
The audio fed into the transmitter is pre-emphasized before it is applied to the
limiter circuit. Pre-emphasis causes high frequency tones to have more
amplitude than low frequency tones, so the high frequency tone of a DTMF
C-19

7K • Appendix C
digit can be severely clipped while the low frequency tone is not. The result is
twist, and the solution is to keep the DTMF pad audio at a reasonably low level.
Twist can also be introduced by the repeater receiver if it has poor audio
response, or if a poor impedance match exists between the receiver and the
controller.

Command Sources
The DTMF decoder can monitor all receiver inputs and the phone line for
incoming digits. However, it can monitor only one device at a time. Therefore, a
priority scheme is used to determine which source feeds the decoder at any
given time. If no source is active, the decoder’s input is grounded.

Local Control
You can program the controller with a local DTMF keyboard, if desired.
•
•
•
•

Connect the audio from the keyboard to the Receiver #1 Audio Input.
Connect a switch between the RX #1 COR Input and ground.
Whenever the switch is ON (closed), the controller will accept commands
from the keyboard.
Alternately, you can use the same scheme with Receiver #3 and leave the
keyboard permanently connected.

Note: Return the switch to the OFF (open) position when finished
programming, so the repeater Receiver #1 can drive the DTMF decoder once
again.

Performing the Tests
Generate an RF signal on the repeater’s input frequency.
•
•
•

While listening to the repeater output on an extra receiver, send some
DTMF digits to the repeater.
You should hear a short burst of DTMF, followed by silence, as the
controller detects the digit and then mutes it.
If the digits are passed through to the transmitter with no muting taking
place, the DTMF decoder is not recognizing the digits.

There are several areas to check:
•
•
•
•

C-20

Check the audio level at the output of the Receiver #1 Audio Op Amp; it
should be 700 mV RMS (2V p-p) as discussed in the Repeater Transmitter
Audiosection on page C-7.
Check the operation of the Receiver #1 COR Input. If the COR input isn't
active, the DTMF decoder will not be monitoring the repeater receiver
audio.
Check the other receiver COR inputs and their associated DIP switches. If a
higher- priority input is active, the DTMF decoder will be monitoring that
input, not the repeater receiver.
Check to see if a command was entered to disable the DTMF decoder from
the repeater receiver.

Installation

Falsing
Some user’s voices can contain frequency components that appear as DTMF
digits to the decoder. If such a digit is detected, falsing is said to occur. If the
DTMF muting feature is enabled, the result of falsing is the loss of repeat audio
for a syllable or two. In addition, an accidental digit is stored into the controller’s
command buffer. This last item is not usually a problem, however, because the
digit will be discarded after a few seconds when the controller discovers that
the digit was no part of a valid command. In any case, falsing is annoying and
can usually be cured to an acceptable extent.
Several solutions to falsing are available:
•

•

Turn OFF the DTMF muting feature. Use the Select DTMF Decoder Mute
Delay command on page 11-8. If you do this, all DTMF digits will be
repeated. This is a simple fix, but it may not be acceptable for repeaters
that need security for DTMF commands.
Don't overdrive the DTMF decoder. The higher the audio level to the
decoder, the more likely it is to false. Check the audio level at the output of
the receiver’s op amp. If over the recommended 700 mV RMS (2V p-p),
turn the audio level down. Overdriving the decoder will not help it decode
any better.
Increase the DTMF decoder’s detect time. The decoder’s tone detect
time is controlled by resistor R7, which is 300K as shipped from the factory.
This provides a rather fast 40mS detect time (a telephone company
standard). Increasing R7 will require a longer detect time, thus reducing the
possibility of falsing. The disadvantage of slowing the detection time is that
some DTMF autodialers generate digits at a rapid rate; a long detection
time could result in missed digits. If autodialers are not a problem,
increasing the detection time will make a noticeable improvement in falsing.
Field experience has shown that changing R7 to 500K will solve minor
cases, and changing it to 1M will solve nearly all cases. The slower
response to DTMF digits has not been a problem for users, since the
increase in time is small by human operator standards.

Real-Time Clock
The Controller features a year 2000-compliant hardware real-time clock and
calendar circuit with a lithium power source. Accurate time keeping is
maintained during loss of main power.
The clock and calendar circuit is accurate to ±1 minute per month. For
improved accuracy, commands are provided to manually or automatically
adjust the clock to compensate for drift. (See page 8-1.)

C-21

7K • Appendix C

C-22

Parts Lists and Schematics

Appendix D

Parts Lists and
Schematics
Controller Main Board
Parts Controller Main Board
Dated 06-05-89 Revised 07-31-89 Revised 11-30-90 For Serial Numbers 207 and up Purchased After 12-90

Part # or Type

Qty

Location

237¾ 1% 1/4W
604¾ 1% 1/4W
1.69K¾ 1% 1/4W
11.3K¾ 1% 1/4W
14.0K¾ 1% 1/4W
22.6K¾ 1% 1/4W
47¾ 5% 1/4W
100¾ 5% 1/4W
1K¾ 5% 1/4W
2K¾ 5% 1/4W
4.7K¾ 5% 1/4W

1
2
1
1
1
2
7
2
1
1
20

10K¾ 5% 1/4W
20K¾ 5% 1/4W

9
24

R28
R78, R86
R109
R50
R51
R61, R119
R32, R56, R64, R70, R113, R114, R116
R52, R90
R65
R115
R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, R17, R21, R22, R23, R24,
R25, R26, R27, R41, R42, R58, R110, R111, R112,
R118
R45, R49, R54, R55, R57, R60, R69, R77, R85
R29, R33, R36, R39, R40, R43, R44, R46, R47, R48,
R62, R63, R71, R72, R73, R79, R80, R81, R87, R88,
R89, R92, R94, R96

Resistors

D-1

7K • Appendix D
22K¾ 5% 1/4W
27K¾ 5% 1/4W
47K¾ 5% 1/4W
51K¾ 5% 1/4W
68K¾ 5% 1/4W
82K¾ 5% 1/4W
100K¾ 5% 1/4W
200K¾ 5% 1/4W
300K¾ 5% 1/4W
470K¾ 5% 1/4W
4.7K¾ 8-pin sip
4.7K¾ 10-pin sip
10K¾ 14-pin DIP
50K¾ 3/8" pot

1
2
2
1
4
2
5
3
1
4
5
4
2
12

R5
R75, R83
R6, R59
R117
R76, R84, R93, R95
R74, R82
R30, R34, R37, R53, R91
R31, R35, R38
R7
R66, R67, R68, R120
R1, R8, R9, R11, R20
R2, R3, R4, R18
R10, R19
R97, R98, R99, R100, R101, R102, R103, R104, R105,
R106, R107, R108

3-23pF trimmer
18pF ceramic NPO
47pF ceramic NPO
100pF ceramic

1
3
3
39

470pF ceramic NPO
.001µF film
.0022µF film
.0039µF film
.1µF film
.1µF MLC

2
3
1
1
1
28

.47µF film

1µF tantalum
4.7µF tantalum
10µF tantalum

4
5
13

330µF electrolytic

C22
C2, C3, C23
C67, C71, C74
C28, C29, C30, C31, C32, C33, C34, C35, C36, C37,
C38, C39, C40, C42, C43, C46, C47, C48, C49, C50,
C51, C52, C53, C65, C69, C72, C98, C103, C111,
C112, C113, C114, C115, C116, C117, C118, C119,
C120, C121
C96, C101
C16, C60, C86, C122
C17
C85
C20
C1, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11, C12, C13, C14,
C15, C19, C21, C25, C26, C27, C41, C44, C45, C54,
C55, C56, C57, C58, C59, C110
C18, C66, C70, C73, C75, C76, C77, C78, C79, C81,
C84, C95, C100, C104, C105, C106
C24, C62, C63, C88
C87, C90, C91, C94, C99
C64, C68, C80, C82, C83, C89, C92, C93, C97, C102,
C107, C108, C109
C61, C123

2
1
10

D12, D13
D11
D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D10

Capacitors

Diodes
1N4002
ICTE-15/MPTE-15
SA40A

D-2

Parts Lists and Schematics

Transistors
2N3904
2N7000/VN10KM
MPQ3904
RFP12N08L

1
9
3
2

Q4
Q7, Q8, Q9, Q10, Q11, Q12, Q13, Q14, Q15
Q1, Q2, Q3
Q5, Q6

1
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1

U5
U29, U30, U31
U24
U26
U27, U28
U7, U8
U6, U11
U13, U14
U15, U16, U17
U18, U19, U20
U25
U32
U36
U3
U1
U9
U2
U4
U12
U21
U22
U33, U34, U37, U38
U23
U35
U10

1
1
1

Y2
Y3
Y1

B1, B2

1
1

S1
S2

Integrated Circuits
27C256 factory program
74C906
74HC00
74HC04
74HC86
74HC138
74HC139
74HC251
74HC259
74HC374
74HC4078
CA3080
CD4053
DS1210
DS1232
HD6340
HD63B09
HM62256LP
ICM7170
LM317
LM7805
LMC660
MF6CN-50
MT8812
MT8880

Crystals
32.768KHz
3.579MHz
4.000MHz

Batteries
lithium 3V

Switches
push-button, momentary
DIP switch, 8 pole

Ferrite Beads
2943666661

D-3

7K • Appendix D

Connectors
2-pin male header
4-pin male header
10-pin male header
14-pin male header
16-pin male header
8-pin IC socket
14-pin IC socket
16-pin IC socket
20-pin IC socket
24-pin IC socket
28-pin IC socket
40-pin IC socket
2.5mm DC power jack
DB25P PC mount
DB25S PC mount

2
2
1
1
1
3
16
10
4
1
3
2
1
1
1

Hardware
PC board
heat sink 5910B
4-40 x 3/8" machine screw
#4 int tooth lockwasher
4-40 hex nut
6-32 x 1/4" machine screw
6-32 hex nut

D-4

1
2
4
4
4
2
2

P3(MEM), P5(RTC)
P1(ADM1), P2(ADM2)
P9(DISPLAY)
P7(TIM)
P8(SSM)

J1
J3
J2

Parts Lists and Schematics

Main Board schematic page 1 of 4 to be provided.

D-5

7K • Appendix D

Main Board schematic page 2 of 4 to be provided.

D-6

Parts Lists and Schematics

Main Board schematic page 3 of 4 to be provided.

D-7

7K • Appendix D

Main Board schematic page 4 of 4 to be provided.

D-8

Parts Lists and Schematics

Main Board layout to be provided.

D-9

7K • Appendix D

Speech Synthesizer Module (SSM)
Parts: Speech Synthesizer Module (SSM)
Dated 05-05-89 Revised 04-08-91

Part # or Type

Qty

Location

3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1

R5, R10, R12
R11
R4
R1
R7, R8, R9
R2
R6
RN1
RN2
R3

2
1

D1, D2
D3

1
1
1
1
1
9
1
1
5
3

C6
C2
C11
C9
C10
C3, C4, C5, C13, C14, C15, C16, C17, C18
C8
C1
C7, C12, C19, C20, C24
C21, C22, C23

1
1
3
1
1

U6
U4
U7, U8, U9
REG1
REG2

Resistors
47¾ 5% 1/4W
1K¾ 5% 1/4W
1.2K¾ 5% 1/4W
10K¾ 5% 1/4W
20K¾ 5% 1/4W
47K¾ 5% 1/4W
100K¾ 5% 1/4W
4.7K¾ 8-pin sip
4.7K¾ 10-pin sip
100K¾ 3/8" pot

Diodes
1N4002
ICTE-15/MPTE-15

Capacitors
10pF ceramic NPO
18pF ceramic NPO
120pF ceramic NPO
.0047µF film
.039µF film
.1µF MLC
.47µF film
1µF tantalum
10µF tantalum
22µF electrolytic

Transistors
2N3904

Integrated Circuits
27C512 standard
vocabulary
27C512 expansion vocab
74HC138
74HC374
LM7805
LM7906

D-10

Parts Lists and Schematics
LMC662/TLC272
MC68705P3S
Si7661
TSP5220C

1
1
1
1

U3
U1
U10
U2

1
1
2
1
3
4

Crystals
3.579545MHz

Connectors
16-pin (dual 8) header
ribbon cable assembly
8-pin IC socket
16-pin IC socket
20-pin IC socket
28-pin IC socket

for U3, U10
for U4
for U7, U8, U9
for U1, U2, U5, U6

Hardware
PC board
heat sink
6-32 x 1/4" machine screw
6-32 hex nut

1
1
2
2

for REG1
for REG1, REG2
for REG1, REG2

D-11

7K • Appendix D

SSM schematic to be provided.

D-12

Parts Lists and Schematics

Telephone Interface Module (TIM)
Parts: Telephone Interface Module (TIM)
Dated 05-05-89

Part # or Type

Qty

Location

1.00K¾ 1% 1/4W
3.01K¾ 1% 1/4W
10.0K¾ 1% 1/4W
18.2K¾ 1% 1/4W
20.0K¾ 1% 1/4W
24.9K¾ 1% 1/4W
49.9K¾ 1% 1/4W
22¾ 5% 1/4W
22¾ 5% 1/4W

2
1
6
1
5
1
4
1
2

R31, R50
R49
R2, R3, R8, R10, R15, R21
R18
R5, R9, R40, R46, R47
R22
R4, R37, R42, R48
R14
R52, R53

47¾ 5% 1/4W
100¾ 5% 1/4W
620¾ 5% 1/4W
1K¾ 5% 1/4W
1.5K¾ 5% 1/4W
2.2K¾ 5% 1/4W
2.7K¾ 5% 1/4W
10K¾ 5% 1/4W
20K¾ 5% 1/4W
47K¾ 5% 1/4W
62K¾ 5% 1/4W
240K¾ 5% 1/4W

2
5
1
8
1
1
1
2
2
8
1
1

R1, R17
R6, R11, R12, R16, R30
R23
R28, R32, R35, R38, R43, R51, R55, R56
R29
R54
R26
R27, R39
R34, R45
R7, R13, R19, R24, R33, R36, R41, R44
R20
R25

.001µF film
.0047µF film
.01µF film
.022µF film
.1µF film
.47µF film
.47µF 250V met poly
2.2µF tantalum
4.7µF tantalum

2
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
13

10µF tantalum
10µF 50V elect
22µF 25V elect

2
1
1

C14, C19
C1
C15
C4
C2, C17
C6, C11, C13, C25
C30
C18
C3,C5, C7, C8, C9, C20, C21, C22, C23, C24, C26,
C27, C28
C10, C16
C29
C12

Resistors

Capacitors

D-13

7K • Appendix D

Diodes
1N4002
1N4732 4.7V
1N4735 6.2V
1N914
ICTE-15/MPTE-15

2
4
1
5
1

D5, D6
D1, D2, D4, D12
D7
D3,D8, D9, D10, D11
M1

2
1

Q2, Q3
Q1

1
2
1
1
2
1
1

U2
VR1, VR2
U4
U5
U1, U3
U7
U6

Transistors
2N3904
2N3906

Integrated Circuits
CD4053
CLM6500
ICM7555
LCA110/LH1056
LMC660/TLC274
TCM1520A
TIL181

Gas Discharge Tubes
DSA301LS-270

E1, E2, E3

L1, L2

1
1
1
2
2
2
1

Transformers
SPT-109

Ferrite Beads
2943666661

Connectors
14-pin (dual 7) header
ribbon cable assembly
modular jack 66011-001
6-pin IC socket
8-pin IC socket
14-pin IC socket
16-pin IC socket

Hardware
PC board

D-14

J2
(for U5, U6)
(for U4, U7)
(for U1, U3)
(for U2)

Parts Lists and Schematics

TIM Schematic to be provided.

D-15

7K • Appendix D

TIM Board Layout to be provided.

D-16

Parts Lists and Schematics

Audio Delay Module (ADM)
Parts: Audio Delay Module (ADM)
Part # or Type

Qty

Location

1
1
1
8
4
1
1
2
6
4
1
2

R30
R13
R14
R3, R4, R5, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11
R15, R21, R26, R31
R16
R32*
R27, R28
R1, R12, R17, R20, R22, R25
R2, R6, R18, R23
R29
R19, R24

2
2
1
1
2
4
6
7

C5, C9
C11, C24
C7
C3
C4, C8
C16, C18, C20, C22
C2, C6, C10, C17, C21, C25*
C1, C12, C13, C14, C15, C19, C23

D1*

1
1
2

U4
U1
U2, U3

2
1

(for U2 & U3)

Resistors
4.99K¾ 1% 1/4W
11.3K¾ 1% 1/4W
14.0K¾ 1% 1/4W
20.0K¾ 1% 1/4W
47¾ 5% 1/4W
100¾ 5% 1/4W
120¾ 5% 1/4W
2.7K¾ 5% 1/4W
10K¾ 5% 1/4W
100K¾ 5% 1/4W
20K¾ pot
100K¾ pot

Capacitors
100pF ceramic NPO
.001µF film
0039µF film
.0047µF film
.039µF film
.1µF film
.47µF film
10µF tantalum

Diodes
1N961B 10V 400mW zener

Integrated Circuits
7555 CMOS timer
LMC660 CMOS op amp
RD5108A delay

Connectors
4-pin male header,
1/4"post
8-pin IC sockets
ribbon cable assembly

Hardware
PC board

D-17

7K • Appendix D

•
•

D-18

Model ADM/U (Universal) utilizes marked components.
Model ADM/K (K series of repeater controllers) omits R32, C25, and D1;
R32 and C25 are replaced by wire jumpers

Parts Lists and Schematics

ADM Schematic to be provided.

D-19

7K • Appendix D

ADM Board Layout to be provided

D-20

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Creator                         : Microsoft Word 8.0
Modify Date                     : 2003:01:04 09:17:37-07:00
Author                          : S-COM, LLC, Dave Maciorowski
Title                           : S-COM 7K Owner's Manual
Create Date                     : 2000:11:21 12:43:36
Page Count                      : 400
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

S COM 7K Owner's Manual Manual7k203i

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation